Download Q-series basic Course(for GX Developer)
Transcript
Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Training Manual Q-series basic course(for GX Developer) Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Q-series basic course(for GX Developer) Training Manual Q-series basic course(for GX Developer) MODEL SCHOOL-Q-BASIC-WIN-E MODEL CODE 13JW50 SH(NA)-080617ENG-A(0601)MEE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission. Specifications subject to change without notice. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these instructions before using the exercise.) When designing the system, always read the relevant manuals and give sufficient consideration to safety. During the exercise, pay full attention to the following points and handle the product correctly. [EXERCISE PRECAUTIONS] WARNING Do not touch the terminals while the power is on to prevent electric shock. When opening the safety cover, turn off the power or conduct a sufficient check of safety before operation. Caution Follow the instructor’s direction during the exercise. Do not remove the module of the demonstration machine or change wirings without permission. Doing so may cause failures, malfunctions, personal injuries and/or a fire. Turn off the power before installing or removing the module. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions of the module or electric shock. When the demonstration machine (X/Y table, etc.) emits abnormal odor/sound, press "Power switch" or "Emergency switch" to turn off. When a problem occurs, notify the instructor as soon as possible. REVISIONS * The textbook number is given on the bottom left of this textbook. Print Date * Textbook number Jan., 2006 SH-080617ENG-A Revision First edition This textbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this textbook. © 2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF PLC 1- 1 to 1-14 1.1 Program ..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1 1.2 Program Processing Procedure................................................................................................................ 1- 4 1.3 MELSEC-Q Module Configuration ............................................................................................................ 1- 5 1.4 External I/O Signals and I/O Numbers..................................................................................................... 1-10 1.5 System Configuration and I/O Numbers of Demonstration Machine...................................................... 1-13 CHAPTER 2 OPERATING GX DEVELOPER 2- 1 to 2-40 2.1 Basic Knowledge Required for Operating GX Developer......................................................................... 2- 1 2.1.1 GX Developer Screen ........................................................................................................................ 2- 1 2.1.2 Project................................................................................................................................................. 2- 3 2.2 Operation Before Creating Ladder Programs........................................................................................... 2- 5 2.2.1 Starting up the GX Developer ............................................................................................................ 2- 5 2.2.2 Creating a new project........................................................................................................................ 2- 6 2.2.3 Changing the assignment of the function keys .................................................................................. 2- 8 2.3 Preparations for Starting Up CPU............................................................................................................. 2- 9 2.4 Creating a Ladder Program...................................................................................................................... 2-13 2.4.1 Creating a ladder program using the function keys .......................................................................... 2-13 2.4.2 Creating a ladder program using the tool buttons............................................................................. 2-15 2.5 Converting the Program ........................................................................................................................... 2-17 2.6 Writing to the PLC CPU ........................................................................................................................... 2-17 2.7 Monitoring the Condition of the Ladder Program..................................................................................... 2-22 2.8 Editing Ladder Program ........................................................................................................................... 2-25 2.8.1 Making partial correction to the ladder program ............................................................................... 2-25 2.8.2 Drawing/Deleting lines....................................................................................................................... 2-27 2.8.3 Inserting/Deleting rows ...................................................................................................................... 2-30 2.8.4 Cutting/Copying ladder program ....................................................................................................... 2-35 2.9 Saving Ladder Program ........................................................................................................................... 2-38 2.9.1 Saving newly-created or overwritten projects ................................................................................... 2-38 2.9.2 Saving a project under another name............................................................................................... 2-39 2.10 Reading the Saved Project .................................................................................................................... 2-40 CHAPTER 3 PLC DEVICES AND PARAMETERS 3- 1 to 3- 4 3.1 Devices ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1 3.2 Parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 3- 3 CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE & BASIC INSTRUCTIONS -Part 1- 4- 1 to 4-40 4.1 List of Instructions Described in this Chapter ........................................................................................... 4- 1 4.2 Differences between OUT and SET · RST .......................................................................... 4- 4 4.3 Measuring Timer ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 5 4.4 Counting by the Counter............................................................................................................................ 4- 6 4.5 [PLS] Pulse·[PLF] Pulf .............................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.6 MC · MCR ..................................................................................................................................... 4-19 4.7 CJ · SCJ · CALL · RET · FEND ...................................................................................... 4-23 4.7.1 CJ · SCJ ................................................................................................................................. 4-23 4.7.2 CALL (P) Call· RET Return............................................................................................... 4-27 4.7.3 FEND F end .............................................................................................................................. 4-31 4.8 Practice Questions ................................................................................................................................... 4-34 4.8.1 Practice Question (1) ................................................................................................................. 4-34 4.8.2 Practice Question (2) ................................................................................................................. 4-35 4.8.3 Practice Question (3) ................................................................................................................. 4-37 4.8.4 Practice Question (4) ................................................................................................................. 4-38 CHAPTER 5 BASIC INSTRUCTION Part 2 5- 1 to 5-60 5.1 Notation of Numbers (Data) ...................................................................................................................... 5- 1 5.2 Transfer Instruction ................................................................................................................................... 5- 9 5.2.1 MOV (P) 16-bit data transfer...................................................................................................... 5- 9 5.2.2 BIN (P) BCD BIN data conversion instruction........................................................................ 5-16 5.2.3 BCD (P) BIN BCD data conversion instruction ...................................................................... 5-18 5.2.4 Example of specifying digit for bit devices and data transfer............................................................ 5-21 5.2.5 FMOV (P) FMOV (Batch transfer of the same data) BMOV (P) BMOV (Batch transfer of the block data)................................................................ 5-22 5.3 Comparison Operation Instruction ........................................................................................................... 5-27 5.4 Arithmetic Operations Instruction............................................................................................................. 5-32 (P) · (P) BIN 16 bit data addition/subtraction................................................................ 5-32 5.4.1 5.4.2 * (P) · / (P) BIN 16 bit multiplication/division......................................................................... 5-36 5.4.3 32-bit data instructions and their necessity....................................................................................... 5-42 5.4.4 Calculation examples of multiplication/division that include decimal points (in the case where an arithmetic operation " " or "/" is used) .......................................................... 5-44 5.5 Index Register, File Register .................................................................................................................... 5-45 5.5.1 How to use index register Z............................................................................................................... 5-45 5.5.2 How to use file register R .................................................................................................................. 5-47 5.6 External Setting of the Timer/Counter Set Value, and the External Display of the Current Value ......... 5-51 5.7 Practice Question ..................................................................................................................................... 5-53 5.7.1 Practice Question (1) MOV......................................................................................................... 5-53 * 5.7.2 Practice Question (2) BIN, BCD conversion............................................................................... 5-54 5.7.3 Practice Question (3) FMOV....................................................................................................... 5-55 5.7.4 Practice Question (4) Comparison instruction............................................................................ 5-56 5.7.5 Practice Question (5) , 5.7.6 Practice Question (6) , / ............................................................................................................ 5-58 5.7.7 Practice Question (7) * .......................................................................................................... 5-57 * D , D/....................................................................................................... 5-59 CHAPTER 6 USING OTHER FUNCTIONS 6- 1 to 6-26 6.1 Clock Function........................................................................................................................................... 6- 1 6.2 Test Function at Online ............................................................................................................................. 6- 3 6.2.1 Turning device "Y" ON/OFF forcibly................................................................................................... 6- 4 6.2.2 Setting and resetting device "M" ........................................................................................................ 6- 5 6.2.3 Changing a current value of device "T".............................................................................................. 6- 6 6.2.4 Reading error steps ............................................................................................................................ 6- 7 6.2.5 Remote RUN/STOP ........................................................................................................................... 6- 8 6.3 Forced I/O Assignment by Parameter Settings ........................................................................................ 6- 9 6.4 Using Retentive Timers ............................................................................................................................. 6-11 6.5 Batch Replacement of Devices................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.5.1 Batch replacement of device numbers ............................................................................................. 6-13 6.5.2 Batch switching of specified devices between normally open and normally close .......................... 6-14 6.6 Write During RUN..................................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.7 Registering Devices.................................................................................................................................. 6-16 6.8 Creating Comments ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 7- 1 to 7-22 7.1 Intelligent Function Module ....................................................................................................................... 7- 1 7.2 Data Communication between Intelligent Function Modules and CPUs ................................................. 7- 2 7.2.1 I/O signals to CPUs ............................................................................................................................ 7- 2 7.2.2 Data communication with intelligent function modules ...................................................................... 7- 3 7.3 Communicating with Intelligent Function Modules ................................................................................... 7- 4 7.3.1 Communication methods with intelligent function modules............................................................... 7- 4 7.3.2 Using GX Configurator for communication ........................................................................................ 7- 5 7.3.3 Data created by GX Configurator....................................................................................................... 7- 6 7.4 Exercise System of Intelligent Function Module ....................................................................................... 7- 7 7.5 Q64AD Analog/Digital Conversion Module............................................................................................... 7- 8 7.5.1 Names of parts ................................................................................................................................... 7- 8 7.5.2 A/D conversion characteristics............................................................................................................... 7- 9 7.5.3 Intelligent function module switch settings........................................................................................ 7-10 7.5.4 Setting with GX Configurator............................................................................................................. 7-12 7.5.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine ........................................................................................ 7-14 7.6 Q62DA Digital/Analog Conversion Module.............................................................................................. 7-15 7.6.1 Names of parts .................................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.6.2 D/A conversion characteristics.......................................................................................................... 7-16 7.6.3 Intelligent function module switch settings........................................................................................ 7-17 7.6.4 Setting with GX Configurator............................................................................................................. 7-19 7.6.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine ........................................................................................ 7-21 CHAPTER 8 USING THE LOGIC TEST FUNCTION (GX SIMULATOR) 8- 1 to 8-16 8.1 Operating Procedure of Logic Test Function (GX Simulator) .................................................................. 8- 2 8.2 Monitoring Device Status and Testing Devices ........................................................................................ 8- 4 8.3 I/O System Settings Function.................................................................................................................... 8- 8 8.3.1 Device value input .............................................................................................................................. 8- 9 8.3.2 Timing chart value input .................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.3.3 Executing the I/O system settings..................................................................................................... 8-15 CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE 9- 1 to 9- 8 9.1 Typical Troubles ........................................................................................................................................ 9- 1 9.2 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 9- 2 9.3 Consumable Products............................................................................................................................... 9- 3 9.4 Service Life of Output Relay...................................................................................................................... 9- 4 9.5 Spare Products.......................................................................................................................................... 9- 5 9.6 Using Maintenance Supporters................................................................................................................. 9- 7 APPENDIX App- 1 to App-133 Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode......................................................................................................................App- 1 Appendix 1.1 Direct mode .......................................................................................................................App- 1 Appendix 1.2 Refresh mode....................................................................................................................App- 2 Appendix 1.3 Comparisons between the direct mode and refresh mode ..............................................App- 3 Appendix 2 Instruction Table.......................................................................................................................App- 4 Appendix 2.1 Sequence instructions.......................................................................................................App- 4 Appendix 2.2 Basic instructions ..............................................................................................................App- 8 Appendix 2.3 Application instructions.....................................................................................................App-24 Appendix 2.4 Instructions for data link ...................................................................................................App-45 Appendix 2.5 QCPU instructions............................................................................................................App-48 Appendix 3 Special Relay List....................................................................................................................App-50 Appendix 4 Special Register List................................................................................................................App-64 Appendix 5 Application Program Examples...............................................................................................App-90 Appendix 5. 1 Flip-flop ladder.................................................................................................................App-90 Appendix 5. 2 One shot ladder...............................................................................................................App-92 Appendix 5. 3 Long time timer................................................................................................................App-93 Appendix 5. 4 Off delay timer .................................................................................................................App-94 Appendix 5. 5 On delay timer (momentary input) ..................................................................................App-95 Appendix 5. 6 ON-OFF repeat ladder ....................................................................................................App-96 Appendix 5. 7 Preventing chattering input .............................................................................................App-96 Appendix 5. 8 Ladders with a common line ...........................................................................................App-97 Appendix 5. 9 Time control program......................................................................................................App-98 Appendix 5.10 Clock ladder ...................................................................................................................App-99 Appendix 5.11 Starting stardelta operation of electrical machinery.....................................................App-100 Appendix 5.12 Displaying elapsed time and outputting before time limit ............................................App-101 Appendix 5.13 Retentive timer .............................................................................................................App-102 Appendix 5.14 Switching timer set value externally.............................................................................App-103 Appendix 5.15 Setting counters externally...........................................................................................App-104 Appendix 5.16 Measuring operation time ............................................................................................App-106 Appendix 5.17 Measuring cycle time ...................................................................................................App-106 Appendix 5.18 Application example of (D) CML (P) ............................................................................App-107 Appendix 5.19 Program showing divided value of 4-digit BIN value to 4 places of decimals.............App-108 Appendix 5.20 Carriage line control .....................................................................................................App-111 Appendix 5.21 Starting compressors in order using ring counters......................................................App-113 Appendix 5.22 Application example of positioning control...................................................................App-117 Appendix 5.23 Application example using index Z ..............................................................................App-118 Appendix 5.24 Application example of FIFO instruction......................................................................App-120 Appendix 5.25 Application example of data shift .................................................................................App-122 Appendix 5.26 Example of operation program calculating square root of data ..................................App-125 Appendix 5.27 Example of operation program calculating n-th power of data....................................App-126 Appendix 5.28 Program using digital switch to input data ...................................................................App-127 Appendix 5.29 Displaying number of faults with fault numbers using fault detection program...........App-128 Appendix 6 Keys of GX Developer...........................................................................................................App-132 INTRODUCTION This textbook describes the PLC, the program editing methods, the sequence instructions and the application instructions to help you understand the MELSEC-Q series programming. The multiple CPU system is available for the MELSEC-Q series with multiple CPU modules, but this textbook explains the case in which one CPU module is used. Refer to the following school textbook for the exercises when the multiple CPU system is used. : Q Programming School Textbook (Practice) .............................SH-080045-D or later The related manuals are shown below. (1) QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)........................ SH(NA)-080483ENG Explains the hardware. (2) QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,Program Fundamentals) .......................... SH(NA)-080484ENG Explains the functions and programming method. (3) QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions).......................................................................... SH(NA)-080039 Explains details of each instruction. (4) GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (Startup).................................................................SH(NA)-080372E (5) Ladder Logic Test Function software for Windows SW5D5C-LLT-E Operation Manual...................................................... SH(NA)-080064 (6) GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual ................................................................................SH(NA)-080373E Explains the operating method. In this textbook, the following CPUs are generically named "QCPU (Q mode)". Q02CPU Q12HCPU Q02HCPU Q25HCPU Q06HCPU CHAPTER 1 1.1 BASICS OF PLC Program Taking PLC as a control ladder, PLC can be described by an input ladder, output ladder, and internal sequential operation. PLC PB1 X6 T1 X0 LS1 Y70 Y74 X1 Output relay Y74 Y72 X2 X3 PB2 Y74 X6 Y74 T1 X5 Electromagnetic valve Y73 K30 X4 Sensor PL Y71 MC Y75 Timer Magnet contactor Y76 X6 Contacts for external outputs Input relay (virtual coil) COM COM (+) Input circuit Input module Turns on/off the input relay with external signal. (-) Output circuit Internal sequential operation Activates the internal sequential operation by the contact of the input relay. Transmits the on/off operations of the output relay. Output module Activates the external loading. Figure 1.1 PLC Configuration The PLC is an assembly of relays and timers/counters as well as an electronic device centered around a microprocessor. As in figure 1.1, internal sequential operation is performed by turning on/off the coil by connecting the normally open and normally close serially or in parallel. "Relay", which is also called an electromagnetic relay, is a switch that passes on signals. Also, it is a key component that makes up a logic ladder. 1) Energizing the coil Excitation • Closes the normally open (Conducted) Coil off Coil on (all times) (in operation) Not conducted Conducted Normally • Opens the normally close (Not conducted) open Coil Common 2) De-energizing the coil Normally Demagnetization A-contact • Opens the normally open (Not conducted) B-contact • Closes the normally close (Conducted) 1-1 close Conducted Not condcuted Internal Sequential Operation The signal flow of figure 1.1 internal sequential operation is described below. 1) When the sensor turns on, the coil of input relay X6 is energized. 2) Energizing the coil of input relay X6 conducts the normally open X6 and energizes the coil of output relay Y74. (As the timer is not energized at this moment, the normally close remains conducted.) 3) Once the coil of output relay Y74 is energized, the external connection Y74 is conducted allowing the magnet contactor (MC) to be turned on. 4) Turning off the sensor demagnetizes the coil of input relay X6 and ceases the conduction of normally open X6. As self-maintaining the normally open Y74 is conducted, the coil remains energized. (Self-maintaining operation) 5) When the coil of output relay Y74 is energized (with the normally open Y74 conducted), turning off the sensor (with normally close X6 conducted) energizes the coil of the timer T1 so that the timer starts measuring the time. After a lapse of three seconds (K30 indicates 3.0 seconds), the normally open of the timer becomes conducted and the normally close is brought non conductive. 6) As a result, the coil of output relay Y74 demagnetizes and the load magnet contactor drops. The output relay self- maintenance is also released. Time Chart A time chart that explains the input/output relays and timer operations is shown below. Input X6 Output Y74 Timer T1 (Coil) Timer T1 (Contact) 3 sec. 1-2 The internal sequential operation can be described as a program of PLC. The program is saved in the program memory as close to the instruction list described below. Step number X6 T1 Y74 0 Y74 Y74 X6 4 Instruction words I/O number 0 LD X6 1 OR Y74 2 ANI T1 3 OUT Y74 K30 4 LD Y74 T1 5 ANI X6 6 OUT T1 K30 7 END (a) Ladder diagram Repeat operation (b) Instruction list (program list) Figure 1.2 Program • The program consists of a large number of instruction words and I/O numbers. (I/O numbers include not only the input (X) and output (Y), but all the contacts and the factor numbers of the coils such as a timer (T) that make up a ladder diagram. Those numbers are also called device numbers.) • The instructions, which contain instruction words and I/O numbers, are added numbers that represent the order of operations. Those numbers are called step numbers. (Instruction words are sometimes referred to as instructions.) • The number of steps varies depending on the types of instructions or the setting method for the numbers to be used for the I/O numbers and operations. (The more complicated the operations become, the more numbers are added to the instructions.) • The instructions repeat from "Step number = 0" to "Instruction words end" endlessly. This is called "repeat operation", "cyclic operation" or "scanning".) Amount of time required to take once through is called operation cycle (scan time). • The number of the programming steps from step number = 0 to the END instruction defines the length or the size of the program. • The program is stored in the program memory within the CPU. The operation is performed in one ladder block unit. One ladder block ranges from the operation START instruction (LD, LDI) to the OUT instruction (including the DATA instruction). 1-3 1.2 Program Processing Procedure The operation process is performed serially from the start step of the program memory left to right then top to bottom (in the order corresponding to 1), 2)... 17)) in ladder block unit as shown below. 1) X0 2) X1 3) 0 Y10 4) X2 5) X3 7) 3 Y11 6) X4 8) X5 9) X6 7 10) Y12 11) X7 12) Y13 13) X8 14) Y14 15) X9 16) XA 17) Y15 17 1-4 1.3 MELSEC-Q Module Configuration (1) High Performance model and Basic model Q series CPU has two models; High Performance model and Basic model. As a High Performance model CPU (Q mode) is used as the demonstration in this course, "QCPU" means "High Performance model CPU (Q mode)" in this textbook unless otherwise specified. * See "Q series data book (L08029E)" for details. Model CPU Description High Performance model Target CPU name Features Basic model Target CPU name Features For the use of focusing on high-speed processing and system extension Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU • High-speed processing • Large-capacity memory...... the number of programs: 252(Q25H) file register: 128 K(Q12H/Q25H built-in) • Number of I/O device points…8,192 (including devices for remote I/O) • Number of I/O points .... 4,096 (excluding the I/Os for remote I/O) • The SFC program is available. • The Multiple CPU system is configurable. • The Motion CPU is mountable. • The personal computer CPU (manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD) is applicable. • The real number, trigonometric function, character-string, and PID control operation are available. • The memory cards are compatible • The ROM operation is available by using the CPU built-in standard ROM. For the use for a small-scale system Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU • Number of I/O device points…..2,048 (including the devices for remote I/O) • Number of I/O points (excluding the I/Os for remote I/O)..... 256 (Q00J) 1,024 (Q00/Q01) • All-in-one power supply base is available (Q00J). • Built-in serial communication ready for service (Q00/Q01) • The ROM operation is available by using the CPU built-in standard ROM. (2) Q mode CPU and A mode CPU QCPU series has two models; the one is Q mode CPU models that utilize the Q-series original functions and performance. The other is A mode CPU models that especially improve CPU processing ability by using the program hardware of the conventional AnS series. This textbook deals with the Q mode models. 1-5 (3) Basic configuration of the PLC system The actual configuration of the PCL is explained below using the building-block type. MELSEC Q61P-A1 POWER Q25HCPU QX10 MODE RUN ERR USER BAT BOOT PULL USB PULL MITSUBISHI Power supply module QX10 QX10 QX10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F CPU module QX41 QX41 I/O6 I/O7 Q38B I/O modules Base unit Figure 1.3 MELSEC-Q Module Configuration Base Unit Extension base unit Main base unit CPU Power supply CPU Q33B Power supply Q35B Power supply Q38B Q312B Power supply Power supply Power supply CPU With 12 I/O modules Power supply With eight I/O modules CPU With five I/O modules Power supply With three I/O modules Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B • The main roles of the base unit are; to attach the power supply module, CPU module, and I/O modules securely, to supply 5VDC power from the power supply module to the CPU module and I/O modules, and to transmit the control signals to each module. • Q00JCPU, which is all-in-one power supply base, is available for the basic model CPU. 1-6 Power Supply Module Input Output Module model 100V-120V AC 5V DC 6A Q61P-A1 200-240V AC 5V DC 6A Q61P-A2 100V-120V AC 5V DC 3A, 24V DC 0.6A Q62P 24V DC 5V DC 6A Q63P CPU Module Maximum number of I/O Program Capacity Basic instruction connected to the PLC (Maximum) processing speed 28 K steps 79ns Q02CPU 28 K steps 4096 points Q02HCPU 60 K steps Q06HCPU 34ns 124 K steps Q12HCPU 256 K steps 256 points 1024 points CPU type Q25HCPU 8 K steps 200ns Q00JCPU 14 K steps 160ns Q00CPU 14 K steps 100ns Q01CPU I/O Module No. of I/O Format 8 points 120V AC Input module 240V AC 24V DC (Plus common) 24V DC (High-speed input) 24V DC (Minus Common) 5/12V DC Output module Connection output Independent contact output Triac output Transistor output (Sink) Transistor output (Source) I/O mixed 1-7 16 points 32 points 64 points Memory Card QCPU equips a built-in memory as a standard to store the parameters and the program so that a program can normally execute without a memory card. High Performance model QCPU is compatible with the memory cards. However, the Basic model QCPU does not support the memory cards. The memory cards are required when using the following functions; Type Description Can be written/changed within the amount of the memory. <Example of the usage> • During boot operation SRAM card • When using the file register that exceeds 32 K points/128 K points in volume. • For storing the sampling trace data • For storing the SFC trace data • For storing the failure history data Writes the contents of the program memory or the specified file in one pass. The newly written data replaces all the original data. Can only be read by using the sequence Flash card program. <Example of the usage> • During boot operation • When no change will be made to the data Can be written/changed within the amount of the program. Using the file access order (such as FWRITE instruction) in the sequence program, accesses ATA card the PLC user data of the ATA card in the CSV type/binary type. <Example of the usage> • During boot operation • When used by PLC user data (general-purpose data) • The memory cards are required when the amount of the built-in program memory, standard RAM, and standard ROM are not enough for storing the data. • The memory cards should be selected according to the size of the program or the type of the data to be stored. • The SRAM-type RAM card must install the supplied batteries upon purchase. The SRAM card data cannot be duplicated unless those batteries are installed. • Format the memory card before using it first. • The Flash card is writable 100,000 times. The ATA card is writable 1,000,000 times. MODE RUN ERR. USER BAT. BOOT ON SW Memory Card 1 2 3 4 5 STOP RUN RESETL CLR 1-8 <Reference: QCPU System Configuration> The memory of QCPU consists of the following block configurations. CPU module Drive numbers of the target memory accessed by peripheral devices. Program memory Drive number 0 Standard RAM Drive number 3 Memory card (RAM) Drive number 1 Memory card (ROM) Drive number 2 Standard ROM Drive number 4 • Program memory • Standard RAM • Standard ROM • Memory card (RAM) • Memory card (ROM) :Stores the program that is used by QCPU for operation. The programs stored in the standard ROM or in the memory card are read into the program memory before execution. :Stores the data of the file register and the local device. :Stores the data of the parameters and the program when the QCPU is operated with ROM. :Stores the local device, debug data, SFC trace data, and failure history data as well as the parameters and program. :The Flash card stores the parameters, program, and the file register. :The ATA card stores the parameters, program, and the PLC user data (general-purpose file). 1-9 1.4 External I/O Signals and I/O Numbers (1) Wiring of I/O devices The signals from external input devices are substituted by the input numbers, which is determined by the fixing points and port numbers of the connected input module, and are dealt with in the program. The operation result output (coil) uses the output numbers that are determined by the fixing points and port numbers of the output module that is connected to the external output devices. 0 (Power supply) 1 2 3 4 Slot numbers (CPU) Input numbers (QY) Base unit (QX) Output numbers Y10 PB1 V1 X0 CS1 CS2 PB2 PB3 LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 PB4 PB5 CS3 Y11 X1 X2 V2 Y12 V3 · Input numbers are hexadecimal numbers X3 Y13 X4 X5 that start with 0. I/O numbers share the same numbers. "X" at the beginning of the number represents "Input", and "Y" indicates "Output". RL Y14 GL · Maximum number of the QCPU (Q X6 mode) I/O number is 4,096. Y15 MC1 X7 Y16 X8 X9 MC2 Y17 MC3 XA COM1 XB XC Y18 XD Y1F XE XF COM2 COM Output module Input module Figure 1.4 Wiring of I/O devices 1 - 10 (2) I/O numbers of the main base unit The I/O numbers of the I/O modules that are attached to the main base unit are assigned as follows. This concept applies both to the I/O modules and to the intelligent function module. Main base unit (Q33B,Q35B,Q38B,Q312B) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot numbers 00 to 0F 10 to 1F 20 to 2F 30 to 3F 40 to 4F 50 to 5F 60 to 6F 70 to 7F 80 to 8F 90 to 9F A0 to AF B0 to BF CPU Power supply module 0 I/O numbers Base unit with three slots (Q33B) Base unit with five slots (Q35B) Base unit with eight slots (Q38B) Base unit with 12 slots (Q312B) • The I/O numbers of one slot (one module) is assigned in ascending order in units of 16 points. (0 to FH) The status that 16-point module is attached to each slot is considered as a standard. For example, the I/O numbers when 32-point module is attached to the fifth slot is as shown below. Main base unit 4 5 50 to 5F / 60 to 6F 40 to 4F 30 to 3F 20 to 2F 10 to 1F 00 to 0F CPU Power supply module 6 7 80 to 8F 3 2 1 70 to 7F 0 The I/O numbers of the slot next to the one with 32-point modules are changed. (The numbers are assigned in order from lower numbers.) Slot numbers • The vacant slot (The slot with no I/O modules installed) is also assigned with the I/O numbers. For example, if the third slot is vacant, the I/O numbers are assigned as described below. (Default) The number of assigned point is changeable depending on the setting. Main base unit 20 to 2F Vacant slot (30 to 3F) 5 6 7 70 to 7F 10 to 1F 4 60 to 6F 3 50 to 5F 2 40 to 4F 1 00 to 0F CPU Power supply module 0 Slot numbers • As for the multiple CPU configuration (Two to four CPUs), the I/O numbers are assigned from the slot next to the one to which a CPU is attached. 1 - 11 (3) I/O numbers of the extension base unit Connect the extension base unit when the required number of the slots exceeds the number of the slots of the main base unit. The I/O numbers are assigned as follows by default. This concept applies both to the I/O modules and to the intelligent function module. Main base unit (Q38B) 5 40 to 4F 50 to 5F 60 to 6F 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A0 to AF B0 to BF 10 to 1F 7 90 to 9F 6 70 to 7F 30 to 3F 4 80 to 8F 00 to 0F 3 1 8 CPU Power supply module Extension cable 2 20 to 2F 0 Slot numbers Extension base unit (Q68B) D0 to DF E0 to EF F0 to FF 23 24 25 26 27 28 170 to 17F 180 to 18F 190 to 19F 1A0 to 1AF 1B0 to 1BF 1C0 to 1CF C0 to CF 22 160 to 16F Power supply module With one extension base units Extension base unit (Q65B) 18 19 20 120 to 12F 130 to 13F 140 to 14F 100 to 10F Power supply module With two extension base units 17 110 to 11F 16 As for the number of the slots, setting the number different from the actual number is possible. For example, setting the base unit for 12 slots as for three slots is possible and vice versa. This is in order to handle the future extension, and to prevent the gap of I/O numbers which is likely to happen when making the transition from the conventional system to the new one. For details, refer to QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals). Extension base unit (Q68B) 21 150 to 15F Power supply module With three extension base units • The slots of the extension base unit are also assigned in ascending order in units of 16 points. • The head I/O numbers of the extension bases follow the last number of the main base or the one of the previous extension base. • It is possible to assign "0" as the I/O number to the vacant slot or to the area with no slot. The number of the extension base units that can be extended is as follows; CPU type Number of stages (Including the ones connected via GOT bus) High Performance model Basic model Q00JCPU Q00CPU,Q01CPU 1 - 12 7 2 4 1.5 System Configuration and I/O Numbers of Demonstration Machine Output module CPU module Input module Power supply module Base unit Q3 B * QCPU QCPU (One (Two station) station) Q61P -A1 QX QY Q64 Q62 42 42P AD DA (64 (64 (16 (16 points) points) points) points) X0 RS-232 cable Y40 to to X3F Y7F Peripheral device * Not used in this textbook. (Leave it in STOP status.) I/O panel Y6F Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70 Y7F Y7E Y7D Y7C Y7B Y7A Y79 Y78 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 Y60 X3F ON X30 1 9 4 2 Y5F X2F Y50 Y4F Y40 X20 4 1 3 6 MELSEC-Q OFF XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 A/D INPUT X8 ON OFF 1 - 13 D/A OUTPUT MEMO 1 - 14 CHAPTER 2 2.1 2.1.1 OPERATING GX DEVELOPER Basic Knowledge Required for Operating GX Developer GX Developer Screen 1) Title bar 2) Menu bar 3) Tool bar 4) Project data list 5) Edit screen 6) Status bar 2-1 1) Title bar Shows the name of the active project. Zooms GX Developer. Resizes/Terminates GX Developer . Displays the name and the path of the project. Minimizes GX Developer. Terminates GX Developer. 2) Menu bar Most frequently used item when operating GX Developer. Click the menu bar to select a variety of functions from the drop-down menu under the menu bar. 3) Tool bar Equips buttons to easily access the commonly-used functions. quicker and speedier operation. This enables Point the cursor to the tool button to show the function of each button. 4) Project data list A ladder program creation screen or dialogue boxes can be read out from the list. This list shows the project data sorted in classified categories. 5) Edit screen Displays a ladder program creation screen or a comment creation screen. Various screens are displayed so that you can edit ladder diagrams, comments, or parameters. 6) Status bar Shows the status information of the GX Developer. Shows the current mode. Shows the explanation of the point where the mouse cursor is placed. Shows the CPU type. Shows the connected CPU. 2-2 Shows the state of Scroll Lock. Shows the state of Caps Lock. Shows the state of Num Lock. 2.1.2 Project A project consists of programs, device comments, parameters, device memory, and device default. Project Program ········ Program Device comment ········ Device comment Parameter Device memory Device default Item Program Description A sequential program that is required to operate the PLC CPU. A comment for the sequential program device, which is classified into Device comment two types. One is "common comment" that is common to all the projects, and the other is "comment by program", which varies by projects. Parameter Device memory Device default Used for specifying the range of various settings such as the network related setting and device spectrum. Displays the current device capacity. The device capacity can be changed by entering numeric value. Sets the device default for the PLC CPU. 2-3 1) One project per GX Developer One GX Developer can edit only one project unit. To edit two or more projects at a time, run as many GX Developers as the number of projects. 2) Device Comments The device comments of GX Developer are categorized into common comment and comments by program. Comment type Number of comments Common comment 1 Comments by Equals the number of program the programs Description A device comment that is common to all the programs within the project. A device comment that is set by each program. The name of the comment must be the same as of the program. If the contents of the two device comments overlap with one another, select [Tools] [Option] [By program] to set priorities of them. 2-4 2.2 Operation Before Creating Ladder Programs 2.2.1 Starting up the GX Developer 1) Click the Start button. 2) Select the [All Programs] menu. 3) Select the [MELSOFT Application] menu. 2) Select! 3) Select! Put a mouse cursor over the items to select the menu. (Clicking or double-clicking the mouse is not required.) 4) Click! 1) Click! 4) Click the [GX Developer] menu. 5) GX Developer will start up. 5) GX Developer will start up. 2-5 2.2.2 Creating a new project 1) Click on the tool bar or select [Project] [New Project] menu ( Ctrl + N ). 1) Click! 2) Click the button with an inverted delta symbol on the [PLC series] column. 2) Click! 3) Click on "QCPU(Qmode)" to select it from the drop-down menu. 3) Click and select! 4) Click the button with an inverted delta symbol on the [PLC Type] column. 4) Click! 5) Click on "Q02(H)" to select it from the drop-down menu. 5) Click and select! (Continue on the next page) 2-6 (Continued from the previous page) 6) Click the OK button. 6) Click! 7) New project window will open. 7) New project window will open! 2-7 2.2.3 Changing the assignment of the function keys 1) Click [Tooles] [Customize keys] menu. 1) Click! 2) Click on the desirable key type to select it. As an example, the window on the left shows the case when "GPPA type" is selected. 2) Select the desirable key type! 3) Click the 3) Click! OK button. REFERENCE Display of the tool bar changes depending on the selected key type. Assignment of the shortcut keys alters accordingly. GPPA format GPPQ format MEDOC format 2-8 2.3 Preparations for Starting Up CPU Setting up switches and formatting the built-in memory are required in advance to writing a program to the CPU. Connect or set up the connectors and the switches indicated as (1) to (3) shown below. (The figures below are illustrations of Q02HCPU. The locations of the switches and connectors are the same with other CPUs.) MODE RUN ERR. USER BAT. BOOT ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 (2) STOP RUN RESET L CLR (3) (1) (1) Connect a battery Connect the battery connector to the CPU as it is not connected with shipment. (2) Set up the switches Set up the DIP switches for the system setting and the RUN/STOP switch. 1) Setting the DIP switches for the system setting Set all the switches to Off. (Set switch 1 to Off to remove its write and control protection restrictions.) 2) Setting the RUN/STOP switch Move the switch to the STOP position. 3) Setting the RESET/L.CLR switch Move the switch to the central position. (3) Connect the RS-232 cable 2-9 (4) Format the built-in memory of the CPU The program memory of the QCPU is formatted in the following procedure. 1) Click the [Online] menu. [Format PLC memory] 1) Click! 2) The dialogue box as shown on the left will appear. Select "Program memory / Device memory" from the Target memory drop-down menu. 2) Select the target memory! 3) Click the Execute 4) Click the Yes button. 3) Click! button to begin format. 4) Click! 5) When format is complete, the dialogue box shown left will appear. Click the OK button. 5) Click! 6) Click the box. 6) Click! 2 - 10 Close button to close the dialog (5) Clear all the device memory from the CPU Clears the device memory from the QCPU. [Clear PLC memory] 1) Click the [Online] menu. 1) Click! 2) The dialogue box as shown on the left will appear. Confirm that the "Clear devices whole memory" checkbox is checked. 2) Confirm that the box is checked. 3) Check 3) Check the "Include latch" checkbox. 4) Click the Execute 5) Click the device. Yes button. 4) Click! button to clear the latch 4) Click! 6) When completed, the dialogue box as shown on the left will appear. Click the OK button. 5) Click! 7) Click the box. 7) Click! 2 - 11 Close button to close the dialog (6) Clear the fault history in the CPU Clear the fault history data stored in the QCPU. 1) Click the [Diagnostics] menu. [PLC diagnostics] 1) Click! 2) The dialogue box as shown on the left will appear. Click the Clear log button. 3) The dialogue box for confirmation will appear. Click the Yes button. 4) Click the Close dialogue box. 2) Click! 4) Click! 2 - 12 button to close the 2.4 2.4.1 Creating a Ladder Program Creating a ladder program using the function keys Follow the steps below to create the ladder program as shown on the left. A ladder program to be created X2 X0 Y70 Y70 Make sure that the write mode is active before creating the ladder program. X3 Y71 1) Press the F5 key to open the Enter symbol screen. Enter "X2". If you pressed other key(s) by mistake, press Esc and retype. 2) Press Enter to confirm the entry. 2) Press Enter ! 1) Enter! You can also use the OK or Cancel button to confirm or cancel your entry. 3) The symbol you entered ( X2 ) will appear. 3) The symbol will appear. 4) Press the 4) Enter "X0"! Shift + F5 keys, and enter "X0". 5) Press Enter to confirm the entry. 5) Press Enter ! 6) The symbol you entered ( XO ) will appear. 7) Press the F7 key, and enter "Y70". 6) The symbol will appear. 8) Press Enter to confirm the entry. 7) Enter "Y70"! 8) Press Enter ! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 13 (Continued from the previous page) 9) The symbol you entered ( appear. 9) The symbol will appear! Y70 ) will 10) Press the F6 key, and enter "Y70". 11) Press Enter ! 10) Enter "Y70"! 11) Press Enter to confirm the entry. 12) The symbol you entered ( 12) The symbol will appear! Y70 ) will appear. 13) Move the cursor to the ladder under 13) Move the cursor! Y70 . 14) Press the F5 key, and enter "X3". 14) Enter "X3"! 15) Press Enter ! 15) Press Enter to confirm the entry. 16) The symbol you entered ( 16) The symbol will appear! 17) Enter "Y71"! 18) Press Enter ! X3 ) will appear. 17) Press the F7 key, and enter "Y71". 18) Press Enter to confirm the entry. 19) The symbol you entered ( appear. Y71 19) The symbol will appear! 20) This is the end of the procedure. (Continued on the next page) 2 - 14 ) will 2.4.2 Creating a ladder program using the tool buttons Follow the steps below to create the ladder program as shown on the left. A ladder program to be created X2 X0 Y70 Make sure that the write mode is active before creating the ladder program. Y70 X3 Y71 1) Click on the tool bar to open the Enter symbol screen. Enter "X2". If you clicked other key(s) by mistake, press the Exit button. 1) Click , then enter "X2". 2) Click the 2) Click! OK button to confirm the entry. 3) The symbol you entered ( 4) Click 3) The symbol will appear! 5) Click the 4) Click , then enter "X0". ) will appear. on the tool bar, and enter "X0". OK button. 5) Click! 6) The symbol you entered ( 7) Click 6) The symbol will appear! 8) Click! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 15 X0 ) will appear. on the tool bar, and enter "Y70". 8) Click the [OK] button. 7) Click , then enter "Y70". X2 (Continued from the previous page) 9) The symbol you entered ( appear. 9) The symbol will appear! 10) Click 10) Click , then enter "Y70". 11) Click the 12) The symbol will appear! on the tool bar, and enter "Y70". OK button. 14) Click 15) Click the 15) Click! ) will appear. 17) Click 16) The symbol will appear! 18) Click the Y70 . on the tool bar, and enter "X3". OK button. 16) The symbol you entered ( , then enter "Y71". Y70 13) Move the cursor to the ladder under 13) Move the cursor! 17) Click ) will 11) Click! 12) The symbol you entered ( 14) Click , then enter "X3". Y70 X3 ) will appear. on the tool bar, and enter "Y71". OK button. 18) Click! 19) The symbol you entered ( appear. 19) The symbol will appear! Y71 20) This is the end of the procedure. 2 - 16 ) will 2.5 Converting the Program 1) Activate and select the window that displays the ladder you want to convert. 1) Activate the window! on the tool bar or select the [convert] 2) Click [convert] menu ( F4 ). 2) Click! If an error occurs while converting, the cursor will automatically move to the defective point of the ladder program. Check the point and correct the program as necessary. 2.6 Writing to the PLC CPU (1) Parameter setting for Multiple CPUs (if only one CPU is installed, omit this step.) The Q-series Multiple-CPU version demonstration machines are equipped with two CPUs. Those machines are not dealt with in this textbook, however, it is required to set the PLC parameters of each CPU for the reason mentioned below. Each CPU should be informed where in the main base slot the I/O numbers begin <When two CPUs are installed> DA unit AD unit Input unit Output unit CPU 2 CPU 1 Power supply I/O numbers start from this slot. Follow the steps below to set the parameters. For details on parameters, refer to "3.2 Parameters". 1) Double-click "PLC parameter" on the GX Developer project list. 1) Double-click! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 17 (Continued from the previous page) 2) The Qn (H) parameter setting dialogue box will appear. Click the Multiple CPU settings button. 2) Click! 3) Select "2" in <Number of CPU> box in the Multiple CPU settings dialogue box. 3) Select "2". 4) Click the End button. 4) Click! (2) Writing to CPU 1) Suppose that the ladder program (sequence program) has been created with GX Developer to proceed to the next step. MODE RUN ERR. USER BAT. BOOT 2) Set the RUN/STOP switch on the CPU to STOP. ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 2) Set the switch to "STOP"! STOP RUN RESET L CLR on the tool bar or click [Online] 3) Click [Writ to PLC] menu. 3) Click! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 18 (Continued from the previous page) 5) Click! 4) Select a program to be written by clicking on data! 4) From the "File selection" tab, click to select the program and parameter that you want to write to the CPU. Or click Param+Prog to select them. 5) Click Execute to accept the selection. 6) If the parameter or program has already been written to the CPU, the confirmation appears asking if you want to overwrite the parameter/program. Click Yes . 6) Click! 7) The progress bar will appear. 8) The completion pop-up window will appear when writing is complete. Click OK . 8) Click! (Continued on the next page) When two CPUs are installed, perform the procedure from step 9) to step 15) explained in the dotted lines on the next page in order to write a parameter into the CPU No.2 When only one CPU is installed, go on to step 17) on page 2-21 . 2 - 19 (Continued from the previous page) 9) Set the RUN/STOP switch of the second PLC CPU to STOP. 10) Click the Transfer setup button on the "Write to PLC" dialogue box. 10) Click! 11) The "Transfer Setup" dialog box will appear. Click "2" in the "Multiple CPU setting" column. 12) Click the OK button. 11) Click! 12) Click! 13) The target CPU will switch to the second CPU. 14) Mark the checkbox for "PLC/Network/Remote" placed below the "Parameter". 15) Click the Execute button to start writing the parameter to the CPU No.2. 13) The target CPU switches. 14) Click! 15) Click! (Continued on the next page) 16) When the writing is complete, follow the steps from 9) through 12) to select the first CPU again. (At Step 11), select "1" in the "Multiple CPU setting" column.) 2 - 20 (Continued from the previous page) 17) Click the Close button to close the dialog box. 5) Click! IMPORTANT If you practice the operation by following the procedures described in this textbook, resetting/rewriting the parameter for the CPU No.2 is required only in Section 6.3 or in Chapter 7. (In the case where two CPUs are installed.) <Reasons> (1) Only the CPU No.1 drives the CPU program. (2) No changes are made to the parameter items that correspond to the multiple CPU system. (The number of CPUs, refresh, I/O assignment setting) 2 - 21 2.7 Monitoring the Condition of the Ladder Program 1) Suppose that the ladder program (sequence program) has been written into the PLC to proceed to the next step. MODE RUN ERR. USER BAT. BOOT 2) Reset with the RESET/L.CLR switch on the CPU, and set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN. ON SW 1 2 3 4 5 2) Set the switch to "RUN"! STOP RUN RESET L CLR 3) Click on the tool bar or click the [Online] [Monitor] [Monitor mode] menu. 3) Click! 4) Selecting another menu ends the monitor mode. Operation Practice 1) Confirm that the LED indicator Y70 lights up by turning the snap switch X2 on, and that the indicator remains lit after the snap switch is turned off. 2) Confirm that the LED indicator Y70 turns off by pressing push button X0, and that the indicator does not light up when releasing the button. 3) Turn the snap switch X3 on to turn on LED indicator Y71. 2 - 22 (1) In monitor mode, the monitor status dialogue box shown below will appear regardless of whether the monitoring is activated or not. <QCPU (Q mode) or QnA series> 1) 3) 2) 1) Scan time Shows the maximum scan time of the monitored PLC CPU. The Q-series device will display the scan time in 0.1-ms increments. 2) PLC CPU condition Shows the operating condition of the PLC CPU. 3) Monitor execution status Flashes while the monitoring is active. (2) The statuses of ladder are indicated as shown below. 1) Display of contacts when X0 = OFF X0 Normally open (Not conducting) X0 Normally close (Conducting) Display of contacts when X0 = ON X0 X0 Normally open Normally close (Conducting) (Not conducting) 2) Display of coil output instruction, contact-equivalent comparison instruction, and coil-equivalent instruction Not executed, conditions not established * Executed, conditions established * *: Available contact-equivalent comparison and coil-equivalent instructions are; SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, MC, FF, DELTA, and DELTAP. 2 - 23 POINT · The monitor of RST instruction shows on/off status of the device to be reset. The device to be reset is off : The device to be reset is on : · By alternating to list mode, the ladder program can be displayed in list form. In list mode, on/off status is shown as described below. 1) Bit device Shows the device name and the monitor status under the row where the list instruction is displayed. Off: [X0 = OFF], On: [X0 = ON] 2) Word device Shows the current value. 2 - 24 2.8 2.8.1 Editing Ladder Program Making partial correction to the ladder program Perform the following steps to make partial correction to the ladder as shown on the left. (OUT Y71→OUT Y72) A ladder program to be created X2 X0 Y70 Make sure that the write mode is active before making changes to the ladder program. Y70 Y72 X3 Y71 1) Confirm that "Overwrite" is shown in the lower-right portion of the screen. If "Insert" is shown on the screen, press the Ins key to change the display to "Overwrite". If "Insert" is shown on the screen, contacts or coils you enter will be added to the diagram. 1) Check! <When correcting from X2 to X5> Added! X5 X2 <When correcting from SET to RST> SET M3 RST M3 Added! 2) Double-click the point you want to correct. 2) Double-click! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 25 (Continued from the previous page) 3) The Enter symbol screen will appear. 3) A diagram creation window will appear! 4) Click the edit box and enter "Y72". 5) Click the 4) Enter "Y72"! OK button to accept the change. 6) The modified ladder program will appear. 5) Click! 6) A diagram will be modified! 2 - 26 2.8.2 Drawing/Deleting lines (1) Drawing lines Perform the following steps to add a line to the ladder as shown on the left. A ladder program to be created X2 X0 Y70 Y70 Y73 X3 Y72 1) Click ( Alt + F10 ) on the tool bar. 1) Click! 2) Drag the mouse from the start position to the end position. 2) Drag! A vertical line will be created to the left of the cursor. 3) A line will be created when the left button of the mouse is released. 3) A line will be created! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 27 (Continued from the previous page) 4) Click 5) Click the 4) Click , then enter "Y73"! on the tool bar, and enter "Y73". OK button. 5) Click! 6) The ladder ( appear. 6) The ladder will appear! 2 - 28 Y73 ) you entered will (2) Deleting lines Perform the following steps to delete the line from the ladder shown on the left. A ladder program to be created X2 X0 Y70 Y70 Y73 X3 Y72 1) Click ( Alt + F9 ) on the tool bar. 1) Click! 2) Drag the mouse from the start position to the end position that you want to delete. 2) Drag! 3) The line will be deleted when the left button of the mouse is released. 3) A line will be removed! The line drawn for End instruction cannot be removed. 4) Press the Delete 4) Press "Delete"! 2 - 29 key to delete Y73 . 2.8.3 Inserting/Deleting rows (1) Inserting rows X7 Perform the following steps to insert a row to the ladder shown on the left. A ladder program to be modified Y77 X2 X0 Y70 Y70 X3 Y72 1) Click on any point of the row. 1) Click to move cursor! The new row will be inserted above the row selected with the cursor. 2) Click the right button of the mouse on any point on the ladder window except on the rows to display the menu. 2) The menu will appear! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 30 (Continued from the previous page) 3) Click the [Insert line] ( Shift + Ins ) menu. 3) Click! 4) The new row will be inserted above the selected row. 4) New line will be inserted! on the tool bar to open the Enter 5) Click Symbol screen. Enter "X7". 6) Click the 5) Click , then enter "X7"! 6) Click! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 31 OK button to confirm the entry. (Continued from the previous page) 7) The symbol ( 7) The symbol will appear! 8) Click 8) Click , then enter "Y77"! 9) Click the 9) Click! X7 on the tool bar, and input "Y77". OK 10) The symbol ( appear. 10) The symbol will appear! 2 - 32 ) you entered will appear. button. Y77 ) you entered will (2) Deleting rows X7 Perform the following steps to remove the row from the ladder shown on the left. A ladder program to be modified Y77 X2 X0 Y70 Y70 X3 Y72 1) Click on any point of the row to be deleted. 1) Click to move cursor! 2) Click the right button of the mouse on any point on the ladder window except on the rows to display the menu. 2) The menu will appear! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 33 (Continued from the previous page) 3) Click the [Delete line] ( Shift + Del ) menu. 3) Click! 4) The selected row will be deleted. 4) The row will be removed! 2 - 34 2.8.4 Cutting/Copying ladder program Follow the steps below to cut and copy the ladder program shown on the left. A ladder program to be modified X7 Y77 X2 X0 Y70 Y70 1) Click on the start point of the ladder program you want to cut. Range of cut/copy 1) Click to move cursor! 2) Drag the mouse cursor over the ladder to specify the area. The selected area will be highlighted. 2) Drag to specify the area! Click the step numbers and drag the mouse cursor vertically to specify the area in ladder block units. 3) Click on the tool bar or select "Edit" 3) Click "cut" ( Ctrl + X ) to cut the specified area. to cut! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 35 (Continued from the previous page) 4) Click the start point of the ladder program you want to copy. 5) Drag the mouse cursor over the ladder to specify the area. The selected area will be highlighted. Click the step numbers and drag the mouse cursor vertically to specify the area in ladder block units. 6) Click on the tool bar or select "Edit" Ctrl "copy" ( + C ) to copy the specified area. 6) Click ! The ladder will be pasted above this block! 7) Click to move cursor! (Continued on the next page) 2 - 36 7) Click any ladder block to move the cursor to the ladder. The copied ladder will be pasted right above the row with a cursor. (Continued from the previous page) on the tool bar or select the "Edit" 8) Click "paste" menu ( Ctrl + V ) to paste the specified area. 8) Click! 9) The copied ladder will be pasted. 9) Complete! 2 - 37 2.9 Saving Ladder Program 2.9.1 Saving newly-created or overwritten projects 1) Click on the tool bar or select the [Project] [Overwritten Project] menu ( Ctrl + S ). Saving the overwritten project completes at this step. 1) Click! ( Saving newly-created project) 2) Specify the area to store the new project. 3) Name the project. 3) Name the project! 2) Specify the location to store the project! 4) Set a title as necessary. 5) Click the 5) Click! Save button to confirm your entry. 4) Set a title as necessary! 6) Click the Yes button. The new project will be stored. 6) Click! Reference · The following characters cannot be used for the project name. /, , >, <, *, ?," ", |, :, ; (: and can only be used to specify a drive.) Do not place a period (.) at the end of the name. · Eight or more characters can be used for the project name when operating with GX Developer (SW8D5-GPPW or later), however, only the first seven characters will be displayed if the project is read in GX Developer (SW2D5-GPPW or older). · Maximum 150 characters are allowed for the project path + project name. · Maximum 32 characters are allowed for the title. · If space(s) is included in the project path or the project name, GX Developer will not start up properly by double-clicking GPPW.gpj, ***.gps on the Explorer. To open such project, start GX Developer first and open the project by selecting the [Project] [Open project] menu. 2 - 38 2.9.2 Saving a project under another name 1) Click [Project] bar. [Save as …] on the menu 1) Click! 2) Specify the location to store the project. 3) Name the project. 3) Name the project! 2) Specify the location to store the project! 4) Set a title as necessary. 5) Click the 5) Click! Save button to confirm your entry. 4) Set a title as necessary! 6) Click the Yes button. The project will be stored under the new name. 6) Click! 2 - 39 2.10 Reading the Saved Project 1) Click on the tool bar or select the "Project" "Open project" menu ( Ctrl + O ). 1) Click! 2) Specify the location where the project you want to open is stored. 3) Click on the project. 3) Click! 4) GX Developer starts to read the specified project. 4) Click! The following dialogue box will appear depending on the condition (when another project has been open). Yes No : will terminate the project. : will keep the project activated. Yes : will terminate the project without converting the project : will keep the project activated. (Continue editing the ladder program.) When another project has been open without being converted. No When another project has been open without being saved. Yes No Cancel 2 - 40 : will save the project before terminating it. : will terminate the project without saving it. : will keep the project activated. CHAPTER 3 3.1 PLC DEVICES AND PARAMETERS Devices The devices are imaginary elements for programming in the PLC’s CPU, as well as the components (such as contacts and coils) that compose a program. X6 T2 Y74 Y74 Y 74 Device No. Device symbol Type Description Transmits instructions or data to the PLC through the external devices such as the push buttons, selector switches, limit switches, and digital switches. X Input Y Output M Internal relay Auxiliary relay inside the PLC that cannot output directly to the external devices. L Latch relay Uninterruptible auxiliary relay inside the PLC that cannot output directly to the external devices. S Step relay Auxiliary relay inside the PLC that cannot output directly to the external devices. B Link relay F Annunciator V Edge relay SM Special relay SB Special link relay Internal relay for data link that indicates the communication status and errors. FX Function input Internal relay that captures the on/off data specified by the subroutine call instructions with arguments in the subroutine program. FY Function output Internal relay that transmits the operation result (on/off data) in the subroutine program to the subroutine program call source. T(ST) Timer Accumulative timers of four types: low-speed timer, high-speed timer, low-speed integrator, and high-speed integrator. C Counter Outputs to the solenoids, electromagnetic switches, signal lights or digital indicators as a result of control. Internal relay for data link that cannot output directly to the external devices. The area not assigned by initial link information · Bit device · Mainly deals with the setting can be used as the internal relay. on/off signals. Used for failure detection. Create the failure detection program beforehand and turn on the program while the PLC is running to store the numerical values in the special register D. Internal relay that stores the operation result (on/off information) from the top of the circuit block. Internal relay that stores the CPU conditions. Accumulative counters of two types: the counters for the sequence program and the counters for interruption sequence program. D Data register Memory that stores the data in the PLC. W Link register Data register for data link. R File register Register for the extensive use of data registers, which uses user memory area. SD Remark Special register Register that stores the CPU conditions. SW Link data register Data register for data link that stores the communication status and failure information. FD Function register Register for the exchange data between the subroutine call source and the subroutine program. Z Index register Registers for modification to the devices (X, Y, M, L, B, F, T, C, D, W, R, K, H, and P). 3-1 · Word device · Mainly deals with a data. · One word consists of 16 bits. · Can be specified by entering " .*". (*=0 to F (hexadecimal). Type Description N Nesting P Pointer I BL TR Interruption pointer SFC block device device designation device I/O No. U designation device K H E Shows the nesting (nested structure) of the master control. Locates the jump addresses of the branch instructions (CJ, SCJ, CALL and JMP). Locates the jump address that corresponds to the factor of the interruption when an interruption occurs. Device that checks if the SFC program designated block is activated or not. SFC transition Device to check if the designated transition condition of SFC Network No. J Remark Decimal constant Hexadecimal program designated block is specified as forced transition or not. Used when designating Network No. by the instructions of data link. Used when designating I/O No. by the instructions for the intelligent function module. Used when designating the followings; timer counter set value, pointer number, interruption pointer number, number of digits of bit device, and basic/application instruction values. Used when designating the basic/application instruction values. constant Real constant Used when specifying real numbers as instructions. "Character Character-string Used when specifying character strings as instructions. string" constant Jn X Jn Y Jn S Jn SB Jn W Link direct Device that can access directly to the link device of the network device module. (Establish the refresh parameter beforehand.) Jn SW Un G Intelligent Un G function module device Device that can access directly to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module. 3-2 · Bit device · Mainly deals with the on/off signals. · Word device · Mainly deals with a data. · One word consists of 16 bits. 3.2 Parameters The parameters are basic settings applied to the PLC in order to control the object as planned. The parameters are divided into the PLC parameter, network parameter, and remote password as shown below. PLC Name Setting PLC System Setting PLC Parameter Label................................................. Sets the QCPU label (name and purpose) Comment .......................................... Sets the comment of QCPU label Timer interval setting.............................. Sets either the low-speed/high-speed timer RUN-PAUSE contact ............................. Sets contact that controls QCPU RUN/PAUSE Remote reset ............................................ Permits/Prohibits the remote reset operations from GX Developer STOP-RUN output mode...................... Sets the output (Y) status after switching from STOP to RUN Computation on floating decimal point data ................................................... Sets the execution of computing floating decimal point data in double accuracy Intelligent function module setting ..... Sets the following items: Interruption pointer assignment (I50 to I255), head I/O No. and head SI No. of intelligent function module Common pointer ...................................... Sets the head No. of the pointer used as a common pointer Number of vacant slots ......................... Sets the number of vacant slots for the basic/expanded bases System interruption setting .................. Sets execution interval for head No. of interruption counters and interruption pointers (I28 to I31) Interruption program/Fixed-cycle program setting........................................ Sets the execution of interruption program at high speeds Unit synchronization setting................. Sets the synchronization of the start-up of QCPU with that of intelligent function module A series CPU compatibility setting .... Sets whether or not to use the special relay/register for MELSEC-A series PLC File Setting File register....................................... Sets the file of the file register used throughout the program Comment file used in instructions..... Sets the file of the comment used throughout the program Device initial value............................ Sets file of the device initial value used for QCPU Local device file................................ Sets the local device file used throughout the program PLC RAS Setting WDT setting......................................Sets the QCPU watchdog timer Operation mode in error condition ....Sets the QCPUs operation mode in the error status Error check .......................................Sets the detection of specified errors Constant scan ..................................Sets constant scan time Low speed program execution time .Sets the execution time for each scanning of the low speed program Failure history ...................................Sets the area to store the QCPUs failure history Device Setting No. of devices................................... Sets the number of devices according to the systems Latch (1) start/last............................. Sets the latch range (starting/last No. of devices) cleared by the latch clear key or remote latch clear operation Latch (2) start/last............................. Sets the latch range (starting/last No. of devices) cleared by the latch clear key or remote latch clear operation Local device start/last ....................... Sets the device range (starting/last No. of devices) used at local device Program Setting ....................................................................... Sets the file name and execution type (execution condition) of the program when writing multiple programs for QCPU Boot option ....................................... Sets whether or not to clear the program memory at boot Boot File Setting SFC Setting I/O Assignment Boot file setting ................................. Sets the type, data name, and transfer from drive of the program file that operate at boot Standard ROM automatic refresh..... Sets the execution of automatic refresh on the standard ROM ...................................................................... Sets the start mode/condition of the SFC program when the program is in use, and sets the output mode when the block is at a stop I/O assignment ................................. Sets the type, model, occupation numbers, and start input/output numbers of the installed module Basic setting ..................................... Sets the basic base module in use, expanded base module, power supply module, model of expanded cable, and the number of the slot of the base module Switch setting ................................... Sets various switches of the intelligent function module Detailed setting................................. Sets the operations at an error and the response time of the input module Network Parameter MELSECNET, Ethernet Setting ....................................................................Sets the network parameters for MELSECNET/H and Ethernet CC-Link Setting ....................................................................Sets the parameters for CC-Link Remote Password .......................................................................................................................... Sets the password that limits the access via the Ethernet or serial communication modules 3-3 · When GX Developer starts, it employs the preset values as the parameters. These values are called the default (initial values). · PLC can run with those values unchanged, however, modify them within a specified range as necessary. · The second CPU is installed on the demonstration machine for making up a Multiple CPU structure. In MELSEC-Q series, multiple CPU setting for the parameters is required if two to four CPUs are installed. Operation Example: Changing Multiple-CPU Setting The number of CPUs of Multiple CPU setting is one by default. Change the value to "two". (If only one CPU is installed, omit this step.) 1) Double-click "PLC parameter" on the GX Developer project list. 1) Double-click! 2) The Qn (H) parameter setting dialogue box appears. Click the Multiple CPU settings button. 2) Click! 3) Enter "2" in <Number of PLC> box in the multiple CPU setting dialogue box. 3) Select "2" 4) Click the End button. 4) Click! 5) Click! 5) Click the End button in the Qn (H) parameter setting dialogue box. The setting is completed. 3-4 CHAPTER 4 4.1 SEQUENCE & BASIC INSTRUCTIONS -Part 1- List of Instructions Described in this Chapter The table below shows the sequence and basic instructions described in this chapter. Instruction symbol (Name) Functions OUT Out Coil output MC Master control MCR Master control reset Instruction symbol (Name) CJ Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Starts master control Terminates master control Nn Sets devices RST Reset Resets devices PLS Pulse Pulse Generates the pulses for one program cycle during an input SCJ Mc Nn n = 0 to 14 (nesting) MCR CALL Nn n = 0 to 14 (nesting) SET SET Set PLF Pulf Drawing (devices to be used) CALLP Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Pulf Generates the pulses for one program cycle during an input RST RET Return Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. FEND PLS Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. PLF Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. 4-1 Functions Conditional jump (non-delay) Conditional jump Jumps after one scan Calls a subroutine program Calls a subroutine program (pulsing operation) Returns from a subroutine program Terminates a mainroutine program Drawing (devices to be used) CJ Pn n = 0 to 4095 (pointer number) SCJ Pn n = 0 to 4095 (pointer number) CALL Pn n = 0 to 4095 (pointer number) CALLP Pn n = 0 to 4095 (pointer number) RET FEND [List of Instructions Not Described in this Chapter: Part 1] "Introduction: PLC Course" covers the instructions shown below. The conventional A series also support them. Refer to "QCPU (Q mode) / QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)" for more details. Instruction symbol (Name) LD Load LDI Load inverse AND And ANI And inverse OR Or ORI Or inverse ANB And block ORB Or block MPS Push Functions Starts logical operation Starts to operate normally open Starts logical inverse operation Starts to operate normally open Logical AND operation normally open series connection Logical AND inverse operation normally close series connection Logical OR operation normally open parallel connection Logical OR inverse operation normally close parallel connection Drawing (devices to be used) Instruction symbol (Name) Functions MRD Lead Intermediate branching MPP Pop Terminates branching NOP Nop Ignored END Terminates a program END processing STOP Stops operation Drawing (devices to be used) Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. For a space or deleting a program Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Must be used as an end of a program Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. STOP Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. SFT Shift 1-bit shift for devices SFTP Shift P 1-bit shift for devices (pulsing operation) NOPLF Ignored (Inserts a page break when printing) PAGE Ignored (Recognized as zero step of n-page) Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. AND operation between logical blocks Series connection between blocks OR operation between logical blocks Parallel connection between blocks Starts to cause a branch 4-2 SFT Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. SFTP Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. NOPLF PAGE n [List of Instructions Not Described in this Chapter: Part 2] The instructions listed below are intended for the Q series and not supported by the A series. Some of them are explained in "Q Programming Practice Course". Refer to "QCPU (Q mode) / QnACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)" for more details. Instruction symbol (Name) Functions LDP Load P Starts to operate rising pulse LDF Load F Starts to start a falling pulse ANDP And P Series connection of rising pulse ANDF And F Series connection of falling pulse ORP Or P Parallel connection of rising pulse ORF Or F Parallel connection of falling pulse MEP Converts the operation results into a rising pulse Drawing (devices to be used) Instruction symbol (Name) Functions MEF Converts the results into a falling pulse Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Drawing (devices to be used) Designates bit device and word device INV Inverse Inverts the operation results EGP Edge P Converts the results into a rising pulse (Memorized by Vn) EGF Edge F Converts the results into a falling pulse (Memorized by Vn) FF Inverts a device output DELTA Delta Converts a direct output to a pulse DY Converts a direct output to a pulse DY Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Designates bit device and word device Vn Designates bit device and word device Vn Designates bit device and word device FF Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Designates bit for bit devices and word devices. Designates bit device and word device DELTAP Delta P 4-3 Designates bit device and word device DELTA DELTAP 4.2 Differences between OUT and SET • RST Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QB-1 MAIN OUT Instruction X0 0 Y70 • The OUT instruction turns the specified device ON when receiving the input condition, and turns the device OFF when the condition becomes OFF. [Timing Chart] X0 Y70 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QB-2 MAIN SET· RST instruction X0 0 SET Y70 RST Y70 X1 2 • The SET instruction turns the specified device ON when receiving the input condition, and maintains the device ON status even if the condition becomes OFF. To turn the device OFF, use the RST instruction. [Timing Chart] X0 X1 Y70 4-4 4.3 Measuring Timer Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QB-3 Program name MAIN K30 X5 T0 0 Timer setting value (Time limit: 3 s.) T0 Y70 5 T0 7 Y71 * OUT T is a 4-step instruction. [Timing Chart] • The timer contact operates X5contact when a given delay time elapses after the coil is energized. (Ondelay timer) T0 coil • The allowable range of timer 3.0 s setting is between K1 to T0Normally open, Y70 coil K32767. Low-speed (100 ms) timer T0Normally closeY71 coil 0.1 to 3276.7 s High-speed (10 ms) timer 0.01 to 327.67 s • When the timer setting value is set to zero, it turns ON (Time out) by the execution of the instruction. The following four types of timer are available. Timer No. Type (Default) Low-speed timer Counts time in increments of 100 ms. High-speed timer Counts time in increments of 10 ms. Low-speed retentive timer Accumulates time in increments of 100ms. High-speed retentive timer Accumulates time in increments of 10ms. T0 to T2047(2048) ─── ─── • The number of each type of timer can be changed in units of 16 using parameters. • Change the output instruction (OUT) to OUTH to select the high-speed timer or high-speed retentive timer. ─── Refer to Section 6.4 for explanation on the retentive timers. 4-5 4.4 Counting by the Counter Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QB-4 MAIN K12 X1 0 C20 Counter setting value C20 5 Y72 X7 7 RST C20 * OUT C is a 4-step instruction. [Timing Chart] • Counts when an input signal •X1contact C20 coil 1 2 3 11 (Current value of counter) 12 0 C20contact, Y72 coil X7contact (Input of the RST instruction) rises. • After the count, the subsequent input signals are not counted. • Once the counter counts, the contact status and the current counter value do not change until the RST instruction is performed. • Perfoming the RST instruction before the count returns the counter to zero. • The allowable range of the counter setting is between K0 and K32767. (K0 turns ON (Count up) by the execution of the instruction.) In addition to the direct designation using K, indirect designation using D (Data register) is available. Setting value Digital switch X0 0 2 4 0 D10 C30 C30 D10 24 5 Y71 • The counter C30 counts when the number of rising edges on the input signal X0 becomes the same as the number (e.g.; 24) specified by the data register D10. • This indirect designation is useful for applying a value specified with an external digital switch to the counter. The indirect designation using data register D is also available for the timer. 4-6 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX1 MAIN Ladder Example When the conveyor belt operation start switch (X0) is turned ON, the buzzer (Y70) beeps for three seconds and then the conveyor belt (Y71) starts to operate. The conveyor belt automatically stops when the sensor (X1) detects that six packages have passed through. Sensor (X1) Conveyor belt Control panel Operating panel Operation Buzzer (X0) (Y70) Motor MC (Y71) Create the following ladder and check if it works properly. 0 X0 C0 M0 During operation Y70 K30 T0 Buzzer Y71 K6 C0 Operating the conveyor belt M0 4 7 12 14 19 M0 Y71 M0 T0 X1 Y71 RST 4-7 C0 3-sec timer Counter for counting the number of packages Operating Procedure (1) Create a new project 1) Click on the tool bar. Click 2) The dialog box for creating a new project appears. Confirm that the "PLC series" is QCPU and the "PLC type" is QO2H. Then click the OK button. Click 3) If the project in preparation exists, the dialog box appears asking if you want to save the product. Click the No button. Click 4) The screen shifts to the new project creation mode. 4-8 (2) Create a program [Using the keyboard] F5 X 0 Shift + F5 C 0 F7 M 0 F4 Convert [Using the tool buttons] Enter after clicking 1) Click . on the toolbar to open the ladder input window. Click 2) Enter "X0" with the keyboard and click the OK button. Enter after clicking . 3) Click Click on the toolbar to open the ladder input window. 4) Enter "C0" with the keyboard and click the OK button. Enter after clicking 5) Click . Click on the toolbar to open the ladder input window. 6) Enter "M0" with the keyboard and click the · · · · OK button. Click 7) When creating the circuit is finished, click on the toolbar. 4-9 (3) Write to the PLC As the demonstration machine has two CPUs, setting parameters for Multiple-CPU is required. (The setting is not necessary only for one CPU machine.) Refer to Section 3.2 Parameters for the Multiple-CPU setting procedure. 1) Write the created ladder to the memory on the PLC. Set the RUN/STOP switch of the CPU to STOP on the tool bar. Click The dialog box for writing to the PLC appears. Click 2) Click the Param+Prog button. Checkboxes for the program of the write data and the parameter displayed in the window are automatically marked. 3) Click the Execute button. Click this button after the program name (MAIN) and PLC parameter appear and their checkboxes are marked. Click 4 - 10 4) If the parameters have been already written, the dialog box appears asking if you want to overwrite them. Click the Yes button. Click 5) The progress bar dialog box appears to show how much the PLC parameter is written. 6) If the program has already been written, the dialog box appears asking if you want to overwrite it. Click the Yes button. Click 7) The progress bar dialog box appears to show how much the program MAIN is written. 8) Click the OK button. Click 4 - 11 (4) Monitor the ladder Reset the CPU Set the RUN/STOP switch of the CPU to RUN 1) Click on the tool bar. Click 2) The ladder (write) screen is used to monitor the ladder. Operation Practice 1) Turn the push button switch (X0) ON. Y70 becomes ON, and T0 starts at the same time. 2) When the timer T0 counts three seconds (time is up), Y70 goes OFF and at the same time, Y71 becomes ON. 3) Turn the push button switch (X1) ON and OFF. The counter C0 counts the number of ON to turn Y71 OFF after counting ON for six times. 4 - 12 4.5 PLS Pulse (Turns the specified device ON for one scan at rising edge of an input condition.) PLF Pulf (Turns the specified device ON for one scan at falling edge of an input condition.) Path name Project name Program name 0 3 1 1 X0 X1 A: SCHOOL QB-5 MAIN PLS M5 PLF M0 2 • The PLS instruction turns the specified device ON only for one scan at rising edge of the PLS command. [Timing Chart] X0 M5 One scan 2 One scan • The PLF instruction turns the specified device ON only for one scan at falling edge of the PLF command. [Timing Chart] X1 M0 One scan 4 - 13 One scan Application • The instructions can be used in the standby program that waits for the operation condition. Operation Trigger X0 PLS M0 SET M5 M0 M5 Y70 K50 Operation Condition TO TO RST M5 [Timing Chart] X0 (Trigger) M0 M5 Y70 (Operation) 5s Time to wait for the condition (system user) register (H) Direct Jn Bit PLS D PLF D Word R Bit Word Intelligent function module Un G Index register Z K H P I N Digit MELSECNET/10 Level File Pointer Internal Device Constant Applicable Device Basic number of steps Operation Condition 2 D 4 - 14 • The instructions can be used for the detection program that detects passage of moving objects. After detecting the passage of a product, the next process for the product is started. X0 M0 PLF M0 SET Y70 Product Sensor Y70 Sensor (Detection of input from X0) Conveyor belt [Timing Chart] X0 M0 Y70 Other Useful Ways of PLS & PLF Part 1 • They can be used to create the program that performs the output operation for a given period of time when the input signal changes ON to OFF. [Timing Chart] Input(X0) Output(Y76) Given period of time 10 s Pulse duration [Program example] Path name Project name Program name 0 3 X0 M1 A: SCHOOL QB-6 MAIN PLF T16 Y76 M1 K100 T16 Y76 4 - 15 Other Useful Ways of PLS & PLF Part 2 • The program for the repeated operation such as switching ON/OFF status alternately by pressing the push button switch can be made using the instructions. If you use the PLS for the above program, the rising edge caused when the push button switch is pressed triggers the program. If you use the PLF, the falling edge caused when the switch is released becomes the trigger. [Timing Chart] X0 Y70 Y71 [Program Example] Path name Project name Program name 0 5 X0 M0 Y70 A: SCHOOL QB-7 MAIN PLS M0 PLF M1 Y70 M0 Y70 11 M1 Y71 Y71 M1 Y71 4 - 16 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX2 MAIN Ladder Example Create the following ladder and check if it works properly. 0 3 X2 M0 PLS M0 X0 Y70 Y70 7 10 X3 M1 PLF M1 X1 Y71 Y71 [Timing Chart] X2 M0 PLS Y70 X0 X3 M1 PLF Y71 X1 REFERENCE The following is a timing chart of a lockup ladder programmed using OUT instructions. Compare this with the lockup ladder created using the PLS instructions. X2 Y70 X0 X2 X0 Y70 Y70 4 - 17 Operating Procedure See Section 4.4 Operating Procedure for the procedure of the following operations. (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder Operation Practice • Turning X2 switch ON makes Y70 turn ON, and Y70 switch OFF when X0 turns ON. (Even when X2 stays ON, Y70 is turned OFF when X0 turns ON.) • Turning X3 switch OFF makes Y71 turn ON, and Y71 switch OFF when X1 turns ON. Related Exercise __ Exercise 3 REMARK Input pulse processing is not required for the QCPU as it uses a derivative contact. ( / ). [A/AnSCPU case] X0 PLS M0 SET M5 SET M5 M0 [QCPU case] X0 Supported instructions are; LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, and ORF. 4 - 18 MC Master control MCR (Start) Master control reset (End) A: SCHOOL QB-8 MAIN Path name Project name Program name X7 0 N0 MC N0 M98 M98 X2 3 Y70 X3 5 Y71 7 MCR *N0 N0 M98 is displayed in the read mode. • The above program is a basic one. • MC N M to MCR N (indicated as "MC to MCR" hereafter.) The allowable nesting (N) numbers for the MC to MCR are between N0 and N14. • The scan time skipped by the "MC to MCR" hardly changes. The status of the devices which exist in the skipped area becomes as follows; All the devices are turned OFF by the OUT instruction. The SET, RST and SFT instructions make no change, and values of the counter and retentive timer remain unchanged. The 100ms timer and 10ms timer are reset to zero. Reference X7 0 NO MC N0 M98 M98 You do not need to write contacts for the master control when creating the ladder. After creating the ladder, convert it ( F4 ) and enter into the read mode. The contacts are automatically inserted. MELSECNET/10 (system user) register (H) Direct Jn Bit MC MCR n D n Word R Bit n Word Intelligent function module Un G Index register Z K H P I N Digit File Level Internal Device Pointer Applicable Device Basic number of steps Application • The instructions can be used to create the program for switching between manual and automatic operations. (Refer to the Ladder Example.) Constant 4.6 2 1 D The basic number of steps of the MC instruction is two, and that of the MCR instruction is one. 4 - 19 Nested "MC to MCR" Program Example • The MC and MCR instructions can be nested as shown below. Path name Project name Program name 0 2 N0 5 10 X5 A: SCHOOL QB-9 MAIN Y70 X2 MC N0 M6 M6 X6 K5 C0 X3 MC N1 M7 1 N1 13 M7 X7 K100 18 19 MCR N1 X20 Y71 21 22 24 N0 27 MCR N0 X0 SET Y72 X4 MC N0 M8 M8 X1 32 2 N0 RST Y72 29 30 N1 N0 TO MCR N0 X30 Y73 M6 Y74 1 is nested under the "MC to MCR" program . (It is • The "MC to MCR" program called "nested structure".) To do that; 1) Assign the nesting number (N) of MC instructions in ascending order. 2) For the MCR nesting number (N), assign the numbers used for the MC in descending order. 2 is independent from the program. The nesting • The "MC to MCR" program program can be used for the program. numbers (N) used in the • The internal relay number (M) must be changed by MC. 3 • As shown in the contact. program, the internal relay number M 4 - 20 of MC can be used as a Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX3 MAIN Ladder Example A program for switching between manual and automatic operations can be made using the MC and MCR instructions. • When selecting manual operation by turning X7 OFF 1) The system goes into low-speed operation mode when X2 is turned ON. 2) The system goes into high-speed mode when X3 is turned ON. • When selecting automatic operation by turning X7 ON, the system operates in low-speed mode for 3 s after X0 is turned ON. Then it operates in high-speed mode for 10 s and stops. High speed Low Speed 10 s 3s 0 N0 3 6 9 10 N0 13 Manual X7 MC M10 Need no key input X2 M82 X3 M81 MCR Automatic X7 M11 X0 MC 19 M12 Y70 N0 Need no key input T1 MC N1 Need no key input M72 M71 27 T0 M72 34 35 M10 M81 Instruction for manual low-speed M82 Instruction for manual high-speed N0 M11 Y70 Y70 N1 N0 MCR M71 Automatic start M12 M71 K30 T0 Instruction for auto low-speed M72 K100 T1 Instruction for auto high-speed N0 Y71 Low speed operation Y72 High speed operation M81 38 M72 M82 4 - 21 Operating Procedure See Section 4.4 Operating Procedure operations. for the detailed procedure of the following (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder Operation Practice • The manual operation is selected by turning the X7 switch OFF. When the X2 switch is turned ON, Y71 lights and the low-speed operation is performed. To perform the high-speed operation, turn the X3 switch ON. Y72 lights and the high-speed operation starts. • Automatic operation is selected by turning the X7 switch ON. When the X0 switch is turned ON, Y70 lights and indicates that it being automatically operated. Y71 also lights at the same instant and stays on for three seconds indicating the system is in low-speed mode. After the three seconds elapsed, Y72 lights and stays on for 10 s indicating in high-speed mode. Then the operation is stopped. (Y70, Y71, and Y72 have stopped lighting at the end.) NOTE For the MCR instructions in one nested program block, all master controls in the program can be terminated with the lowest nesting (N) number only. 4 - 22 4.7 CJ • SCJ • CALL • RET • FEND Path name Project name Program name 4.7.1 CJ SCJ A: SCHOOL QB-10 MAIN (Conditional jump: instataneous execution condition jump) (S conditional jump: execution condition jump after one scan) 1 X0 0 CJ P10 2 X1 3 SCJ X0 6 X1 P10 Y70 Pointer P10 X3 9 Y71 1 • The CJ instruction instantaneously executes a program with jumping it to the designated jump address (pointer number) when the input condition is ON. When the condition is OFF, the program is not jumped. 2 • The SCJ instruction executes a program without jumping for the scan when the input condition is ON. From next scan, the instruction executes a program with jumping it to the designated jump address (pointer number). When the input condition is OFF, the program is not executed. • The SCJ instruction is used when some operations must be executed before jumping the program. For example, when the output needs to be ON or reset in advance. [Timing Chart] Input Condition (X0, X1) CJ Executes at every scan Executes at every scan Executes at every scan SCJ One scan Executes at every scan One scan 4 - 23 Caution • The pointer numbers available for both CJ and SCJ are P0 to P4095. • Use the FEND instruction as shown below when a program using the CJ and SCJ must be concluded in each program block. (See Section 4.7.3 for explanation on the FEND.) Start 0 When Not executing CJ When executing CJ Sequence program A Step 0 Input Condition Sequence program A CJ Step 0 P CJP Sequence program B Input condition is ON? YES FEND P NO Sequence program B FEND P Sequence program C END Sequence program C END • The status of ladders skipped by the CJ instruction remains unchanged. (Before executing CJ) (During executing CJ) X0 X0 CJ 1100 P10 CJ 1100 X2 1103 P10 1330 P10 X2 Y72 1103 M1 P10 1330 X1 PLS Because X0 is ON, all instructions within this area are not executed. Hence Y72 remains ON even after X2 is turned OFF. Y72 X1 PLS M1 (system user) register (H) Direct Jn Bit CJ P** SCJ P** Word R Bit P Word Intelligent function module Un G Index register Z K H P I N Digit MELSECNET/10 Level File Pointer Internal Device Constant Applicable Device Basic number of steps • Once the coil of the timer is energized, the timer updates even if the coil is skipped by the CJ or SCJ instruction. When time is up, the contact becomes ON. This is because the timer updates and turns the contact ON/OFF after each END. 2 4 - 24 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX4 MAIN Ladder Example Create the following ladder with GX Developer and write it on the CPU of the demonstration machine. Then check the difference between CJ and SCJ instructions. 0 3 P10 6 9 X0 X1 X0 X1 CJ F3 P10 SCJ F3 P10 Y70 X3 Y71 Operating Procedure See Section 4.4 Operating Procedure operations. (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder 4 - 25 for the detailed procedure of the following Operation Practice (2) When X0 is turned ON, the CJ instruction is executed jumping to P10. Therefore, Y70 remains ON. (1) When X0 and X1 are OFF, the CJ and SCJ instructions are not executed. Therefore, Y70 is ON. [Before executing CJ and SCJ] [Executing CJ] First scan and subsequent scans X0 X0 CJ P10 X1 X0 CJ P10 X1 SCJ P10 X1 X0 Y70 P10 X3 Y71 SCJ P10 X1 Y70 P10 X3 Y71 (3) The SCJ instruction is executed when X0 is turned OFF and X1 is turned ON. The instruction is executed jumping to P10 from the next scan. Therefore, Y70 becomes OFF. [Executing SCJ] First scan [Executing SCJ] Second scan and subsequent scans X0 First scan CJ P10 X1 X0 Second scan & subsequent times SCJ P10 X1 X3 Y71 CJ P10 X1 X0 Y70 P10 X0 SCJ P10 X1 Y70 P10 X3 Y71 (4) Y71 is turned ON/OFF by X3 regardless of the CJ or SCJ instructions. • The following lists explain the difference between the CJ and SCJ instructions. [ SCJ ] [ CJ ] After X1 becomes ON Second scan & subsequent times First scan only 0 LD X0 0 LD X0 1 CJ P10 1 CJ P10 3 LD X1 3 LD X1 4 SCJ P10 4 SCJ P10 6 LDI X0 6 LDI X0 X1 X1 7 ANI 8 OUT Y70 9 P10 7 ANI 8 OUT Y70 9 P10 10 LD X3 10 LD 11 OUT Y71 11 OUT Y71 12 END 12 END Related Practice Question ____ 4 - 26 Practice Question 4 X3 CALL (P) 4.7.2 RET Call Executes a subroutine program Return 0 50 M0 M5 X2 CALL P10 CALL P10 FEND 103 P10 2 Sequence program 1 X1 104 Y70 Subroutine program 157 1 2 RET • The above program is a basic style to execute the subroutine program using the CALL and RET instructions. Keep this structure, otherwise an error occurs and PLC stops. A subroutine program consists of the ladders for executing the same data many times in one program. The subroutine starts at Pointer P and ends with the RET instruction. • 0 to 4095 can be used as the Pointer P number. (Same as the pointer numbers used for the CJ and SCJ instructions.) • The subroutine program is executed as shown in the following diagrams. (When not executing CALL P10) 0 0 (When executing CALL P10) 0 Sequence program CALL P10 Input Condition CALL P10 Next step after CALL Sequence program FEND P10 FEND P10 FEND Subroutine program Sequence program Execution of subroutine program RET RET END 4 - 27 About Nesting • The CALL (P) instructions can be nested up to 16 levels. Subroutine program P1 Sequence program 0 Subroutine program P2 Subroutine program P3 Subroutine program P4 CALL P3 Subroutine program P5 CALL P5 CALL P1 CALL P4 RET RET CALL P2 RET RET RET FEND The following ladder circuit shows the above nested program. 0 CALL P1 Sequence program FEND P1 CALL P2 P1 subroutine program RET P2 CALL P3 P2 subroutine program RET P3 CALL P4 P3 subroutine program RET P4 CALL P5 P4 subroutine program RET RET P5 subroutine program (system user) register (H) Direct Jn Bit CALL(P) P** Word R Bit P Word Intelligent function module Un G Index register Z K H P I Digit MELSECNET/10 Level File Pointer Internal Device Constant Applicable Device N ○ Basic number of steps P5 2 1 RET The basic number of steps of CALL (P) is 2 tn, and that of RET is one. ("n" is a argument passed to the subroutine.) 4 - 28 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX5 MAIN Ladder Example Create the following ladder with the GX Developer and write it on the CPU of the demonstration machine to check if the CALL and RET instructions work properly. 0 3 5 P10 6 X2 CALL X3 P10 Y70 FEND X4 Y71 RET 9 Operating Procedure Refer to Section 4.4 following operations. Operating Procedure (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder 4 - 29 for the detailed procedure of the Operation Practice Verify the operation of the ladder, which was created with the GX Developer and written to the CPU of the demonstration machine, by monitoring the ladder on the screen. 0 3 X2 CALL X3 Y70 5 P10 6 P10 FEND X4 Y71 9 RET 10 END (1) When X2 is OFF 1) Operates from 0 to FEND. 2) Y70 turns ON/OFF when turning X3 ON/OFF. 3) Y71 remains unchanged even when turning X4 ON/OFF. Computation when X2 is OFF (2) When X2 is ON 1) After executing P10 subroutine, operate from Step 4 to FEND. 2) Y70 turns ON/OFF when turning X3 ON/OFF. 3) Y71 turns ON/OFF when turning X4 ON/OFF. Related Practice Question ____ 4 - 30 Practice Question 4 0 LD X2 1 CALL P10 3 LD X3 4 OUT Y70 5 FEND 6 P10 7 LD X4 8 OUT Y71 9 RET Operation when X2 is ON 4.7.3 FEND F end FEND FEND is a one-step instruction. • Use the FEND instruction as the END instruction under the following conditions: 1) When a sequence program must be executed and terminated in each program block. For example, use this instruction with CJ and SCJ instructions. 2) When using the subroutine programs (CALL and RET instructions). 3) When using an interrupt program. • After each execution of the FEND, the PLC processes the current value of the timer and counter and makes self-diagnostic check, and then re-operates from 0 step. 0 CALL Operation when not executing CJ Sequence program CJ P** Sequence program Sequence program Jump by CJ Operation when executing CJ FEND P** P** FEND P** I** Sequence program Subroutine program Interrupt program END END (a) When operating in each program block by CJ instruction (b) When using the subroutine and interrupt programs Caution • There is no limit to the number of FEND instructions in a sequence program, however, it cannot be used in the subroutine and interrupt programs. • The FEND instruction cannot be used to terminate the main or sub sequence program. Make sure to use an END instruction for the end of a whole program. REFERENCE The interrupt program allows you to stop the current process and processes an interrupt upon receiving an interrupt request in the middle of processing a normal program. 4 - 31 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX6 MAIN Ladder Example Create the following ladder with the GX Developer and write it to the CPU of the demonstration machine to check if the FEND instruction work properly. 0 3 5 P10 6 X3 CJ X4 F3 P10 Y70 FEND X5 Y72 Operating Procedure Refer to Section 4.4 following operations. Operating Procedure (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder 4 - 32 for the detailed procedure of the Operation Practice Verify the operation of the ladder, which was created with the GX Developer and written to the CPU of the demonstration machine, by monitoring the ladder on the screen. 0 3 X3 CJ X4 Y70 5 P10 6 P10 FEND X5 Y72 9 END Operation when X3 is OFF (1) When X3 is OFF 1) Operates from 0 to FEND. 0 LD X3 2) Y70 turns ON/OFF when turning X4 1 CJ P10 ON/OFF. 3 LD X4 3) Y72 remains unchanged even 4 OUT Y70 when turning X5 ON/OFF. 5 FEND Jump by CJ 6 P10 (2) When X3 is ON 1) Jumps to P10 pointer by the CJ instruction. 2) Y70 remains unchanged when turning X4 ON/OFF. 3) Y72 turns ON/OFF when turning X5 ON/OFF. Related Practice Question ____ 4 - 33 7 LD X5 8 OUT Y72 9 END Operation when X3 is ON Practice Question 4 Path name Project name Program name 4.8 4.8.1 A: SCHOOL QTEST1 MAIN Practice Questions Practice Question (1) LD to NOP When X0 turns ON, Y70 is self-maintained, and Y74 and Y77 flicker alternately every 0.5 s. When X1 turns ON, Y70 turns OFF and flickering of Y74 and Y77 also stops. [Timing Chart] X0 Y70 T0 Y74 T1 Y77 X1 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s Create the following program with the GX Developer filling in the blanks verify the operation using the demonstration machine. 0 X0 2) Y70 1) 4 10 Y70 3) T0 4) T1 Y74 16 5) Y70 Y77 4 - 34 K5 K5 , and Path name Project name Program name 4.8.2 A: SCHOOL QTEST2 MAIN Practice Question (2) SET, RST When turning X0 ON, Y70 starts to flicker at one-second intervals and stops the flickering for five seconds after flickering 10 times, then restart flickering. The flickering of Y70 can be stopped by turning X1 ON. Create the following program with the GX Developer filling in the blanks verify the operation using the demonstration machine. 0 2 X0 1) M0 M1 T1 T0 T0 T1 T0 23 2) 3) 4) T2 RST M1 5) 36 K10 Y70 K10 C0 T2 30 K10 X1 6) 7) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 4 - 35 K50 , and Hint (1) The following shows the timing chart of the program. X0 M0 X1 Restart T0-contact 1s T1-contact 1s Y70 1s 1s 1s 5s C0-contact C0 counter 1. 2. ··············· 10. 1. 2.0. (2) The following shows the basic flickering ladder and its timing chart. [Ladder] T1 [Timing Chart] K10 T0 T0 Start T0contact 1s K10 T1 T1contact 1s 1s REFERENCE The flickering ladder can be created using the special relay that generates clock as shown below. Other than the SM413 (2-s clock), the following K10 can be used. SM413 (2-s clock) T0 SM409 (0.01-s clock) SM410 (0.1-s clock) SM411 (0.2-s clock) SM412 (1-s clock) [Timing Chart] SM414 (2n-s clock) Y70 SM415 (2-nms clock) 1s 1s 1s Starts from OFF when the PLC is reset or the power is turned ON. 4 - 36 Path name Project name Program name 4.8.3 A: SCHOOL QTEST3 MAIN Practice Question (3) PLS, PLF Y70 starts to switch between ON and OFF alternately upon detecting a rising edge of X0 signal, and a falling edge of the signal triggers Y71 to do the same operation as Y70 does. [Timing Chart] X0 Y70 Y71 Create the following program with the GX Developer filling in the blanks verify the operation using the demonstration machine. 0 5 X0 M0 Y70 1) M0 2) M1 Y70 M0 Y70 11 M1 Y71 Y71 M1 Y71 1) 2) 4 - 37 , and Path name Project name Program name 4.8.4 A: SCHOOL QTEST4 MAIN Practice Question (4) CJ, CALL, RET, FEND Y70 and Y71 flicker for 0.5 s alternately when X7 is OFF, and when X7 is ON, Y72 and Y73 flicker for 1.0 s alternately. Turning X0 ON resets the currently flickering Y70 to Y73. Create the following program filling in the blanks the demonstration machine. T0 , and verify the program with T0 K9999 K9999 T200 T200 X7 CJ SM401 T11 T10 1) K5 T10 K5 T11 Y70 T10 Flip flop ladder Y71 X0 2) P10 F3 3) P0 K10 T21 K10 T20 SM401 T20 T21 Y72 T21 Y73 X0 4) P10 5) P10 SM401 RST Y70 F3 RST F3 Y71 RST F3 Y72 RST F3 Y73 6) 4 - 38 Flip flop ladder Hint 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) START X7 ON? N P0 Y70 & Y71 0.5-s flickering X0 ON? <CJ P0> Y Y Y72 & Y73 1-s flickering X0 ON? Y N N P10 Reset Y70 to Y73 Subroutine program <FEND> <FEND> END 4 - 39 Chapter 4 Practice Question Answers Question Answers No. 1 2 3 4 1) Y70 2) X1 3) T1 4) T0 5) Y74 1) SET M0 2) C0 3) Y70 4) SET M1 5) RST C0 6) RST M0 7) RST C0 1) PLS 2) PLF 1) P0 2) CALL 3) FEND 4) CALL 5) FEND 6) RET 4 - 40 CHAPTER 5 5.1 BASIC INSTRUCTION Part 2 Notation of Numbers (Data) The PLC CPU converts all the input signals into ON or OFF signals (logical 1 or 0, respectively) to store and process them, and performs the numeric operation using the numeric value stored with the logical 1 or 0 (binary numbers = BIN). In our everyday life, on the other hand, a decimal system is most commonly used because it is easier to understand. Therefore, decimal-to-binary conversion or the reverse is required whenever you write/read (monitor) numbers to/from the PLC. The programming system and some instructions have the function of performing the conversion. This section explains how numbers (data) are expressed in decimal, binary, hexadecimal and binary-coded decimal notation (BCD), and how the conversion is made. Decimal • A decimal number system consists of ten single-digit numbers: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 which represent the order and size (amount). The number after 9 is 10. The number after 19 is 20 and so forth. Additional powers of 10 require the addition of another positional digit. • The following shows how a base-ten number (in this case 153) is represented. 153 = 100 + 50 + 3 = 1 x 100 + 5 x 10 + 3 x 1 = 1 x 102 + 5 x 101 + 3 x 100 Decimal (0 to 9) symbol Base number 10 raised to the power of digit number n .......Digit number (0,1,2…) 10 .......Decimal number • The Q series PLC uses a symbol K when it expresses numbers in decimal notation. 5-1 Binary (BIN) • The binary number is a base 2 method of counting in which only the digits 0 and 1 are used. When 1 is reached, counting begins at 0 again, with the digit to the left being incremented. The two digits 0 and 1 are referred to as bits. Binary Decimal 0 0 1 1 10 2 11 3 100 4 101 5 110 6 111 7 1000 8 … … • Let’s look at how the binary number shown below is converted to decimal. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 128 64 ... "10011101" The diagram below depicts the binary number with the powers of two written beneath it. The same incrementing pattern as the decimal system goes for the binary system except for the difference of the radix. Since the binary method uses only 0 and 1 digits, it has more carries than the decimal method. 16 8 4 2 1 32 Bit number Binary symbol Base number 2 raised to = Bit value the power of digit number From the diagram, we see that the binary number can be broken down as: 1×128 0×64 0×32 1×16 1×8 1×4 0×2 1×1 So, the equivalent decimal number is: 128 16 8 4 1=157 The decimal equivalent of a binary number can be calculated by adding together each digit 1 multiplied by its power of 2. 5-2 Hexadecimal • The hexadecimal (often called hex for short) is a numeral system with a radix of 16 usually written using the symbols 0-9 and A-F. The A-F represent 10-15 respectively as shown in the table below. When F is reached, counting begins at 0 again, with the digit to the left being incremented just like the decimal and binary system. Decimal Hexadecimal Binary 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 10 3 3 11 4 4 100 5 5 101 6 6 110 7 7 111 8 8 1000 9 9 1001 10 A 1010 11 B 1011 12 C 1100 13 D 1101 14 E 1110 15 F 1111 16 10 10000 17 11 10001 18 12 10010 … … … 19101 4A9D 0100 1010 1001 1101 3 2 1 0 Digit number 4 A 9 D Hex symbol 3 2 1 0 n ........Digit number 16 ....... Hexadecimal =(4)×16 (A)×16 (9)×16 (D)×16 =4×4096 10×256 9×16 13×1 =19101 • One hex digit is equivalent to 4 bits of binary. • The Q series PLC uses a symbol “H” when it expresses numbers in hex notation. • The hex system is used to represent the specific numbers of the following devices. • Input and output (X, Y) • Input and output of function (FX, FY) • Link relay (B) • Link register (W) • Special relay for link (SM) • Special register for link (SW) • Link direct devices (Jn X, Jn Y, Jn B, Jn SB, Jn W, Jn SW) 5-3 Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) • The binary-coded decimal is a code in which a string of four binary digits represents a decimal number. A decimal number 157, for example, is expressed as shown below in BCD. 2 1 Digit number 0 1 5 7 (100) (10) (1) 0001 0101 0111 842 8 2 Decimal Place (digit) BCD Values allocated to each digit 8 • In BCD, decimal numbers (0 to the biggest 4-digit number; 9999) can be represented by 16 bits. The diagram below shows the bit values allocated to each digit of BCD. Thousand digits Hundred digits Ten digits 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 0 4 1 8 200 0 10 400 1 20 0 40 0 80 0 100 0 800 4000 0 1000 0 2000 0 8000 Unit digits • The BCD is used for the following signals. 1) Output signals of digital switches 2) Signals of seven-element display (digital display) 0 1(0) 2(0) 4(0) 8(0) COM 1 2 (1) (0) (0) (0) 3 (0) (1) (0) (0) 4 (1) (1) (0) (0) 5 (0) (0) (1) (0) 6 (1) (0) (1) (0) BCD Code Digital Switch 5-4 7 (0) (1) (1) (0) 8 (1) (1) (1) (0) 9 (0) (0) (0) (1) (1) (0) (0) (1) How to Convert Decimal to Binary A decimal number 157, for example, is converted to binary as shown below. 1) - 157 128 - 29 16 - 13 8 - 5 4 - 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Bit value 0 2) Quotient Remainder 2 157 2 78 1 2 39 0 2 19 1 2 9 1 2 4 1 2 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 How to Convert Decimal to Hex A decimal number 157, for example, is converted to hex as shown below. 1) 16 157 9 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 ...13(D) 9 5-5 D 1 Valid Numbers for Q series PLC • 8 bits is usually called 1 byte and 16 bits (2 bytes) is called 1 word. 1 bit 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 word (2 bytes) • Each register of word devices in the MELSEC-Q PLC consists of 16 bits. • Data register D Binary digit value • Link register W etc. • The following two ranges of numbers can be processed using 16 bits (1 word). 1) 0 to 65535 2) -32768 to +32767 • The MELSEC-Q PLC uses the 2) range. The negative numbers adopt two’s complement to positive numbers (1+0+32767). • In the two’s complement, each binary bit is inverted, and then 1 is added to the lower bits. Example) Negative 1 is represented as shown below using two’s complement: 1 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 Invert all the bits 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 -1 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The most significant bit indicates the sign. If the bit is 1, the bits contain a negative number in two's complement form. 5-6 Add 1 to the least significant bit 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 • File register R 8192 • Current counter C value 16384 32768 D0 • Current timer T value (Binary Coded Decimal) BCD (Binary) BIN (Decimal) K (Hexadecimal) H 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0 0000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000001 1 0001 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000010 2 0002 00000000 00000011 00000000 00000011 3 0003 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000100 4 0004 00000000 00000101 00000000 00000101 5 0005 00000000 00000110 00000000 00000110 6 0006 00000000 00000111 00000000 00000111 7 0007 00000000 00001000 00000000 00001000 8 0008 00000000 00001001 00000000 00001001 9 0009 00000000 00010000 00000000 00001010 10 000A 00000000 00010001 00000000 00001011 11 000B 00000000 00010010 00000000 00001100 12 000C 00000000 00010011 00000000 00001101 13 000D 00000000 00010100 00000000 00001110 14 000E 00000000 00010101 00000000 00001111 15 000F 00000000 00010110 00000000 00010000 16 0010 00000000 00010111 00000000 00010001 17 0011 00000000 00011000 00000000 00010010 18 0012 00000000 00011001 00000000 00010011 19 0013 00000000 00100000 00000000 00010100 20 0014 00000000 00100001 00000000 00010101 21 0015 00000000 00100010 00000000 00010110 22 0016 00000000 00100011 00000000 00010111 23 0017 00000001 00000000 00000000 01100100 100 0064 00000001 00100111 00000000 01111111 127 007F 00000010 01010101 00000000 11111111 255 00FF 00010000 00000000 00000011 11101000 1000 03E8 00100000 01000111 00000111 11111111 2047 07FF 01000000 10010101 00001111 11111111 4095 0FFF 00100111 00010000 10000 2710 01111111 11111111 32767 7FFF 11111111 11111111 1 FFFF 11111111 11111110 2 FFFE 10000000 00000000 32768 8000 5-7 Demonstration Machine Configuration & Input/Output No. Output Module CPU module Power Supply Input module Module Base Unit Q3 8 QY Q64 Q62 QCPU QCPU * QX Q61P-A1 (No. 1) (No. 2) 42 42P AD DA (64 (64 (16 (16 points)points) points)points) X0 to X3F RS-232Cable Y40 to Y7F Peripheral device *Not used for the practices instructed in this text book. Keep it in off state. I/0 Panel Y6F Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70 Y7F Y7E Y7D Y7C Y7B Y7A Y79 Y78 Y60 X3F X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X30 Y5F X2F Y50 Y4F Y40 X20 X0 ON 1 9 4 2 4 1 3 6 MELSEC-Q OFF XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 A/D INPUT X8 ON OFF 5-8 D/A OUTPUT 5.2 Transfer Instruction Path name Project name Program name 5.2.1 A: SCHOOL QB-11 MAIN MOV (P) 16-bit data transfer X7 K50 T0 0 T0 K1500 T0 C10 X1 13 RST C10 S D MOV T0 D0 MOVP C10 D1 MOVP K157 D2 X2 18 1 X3 21 2 X4 24 3 X5 27 1 MOVP H4A9D D3 • As soon as the input condition goes active, the current value of timer T0 is transferred to the data register D0. S …Source, D …Destination • The current T0 value is stored in the register in binary form and transferred to the data register D0 without changing the form. T0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 45 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 2 • When the input condition goes active, the decimal number 157 is transferred to the data register D2 and stored in the register binary form. The decimal number (K) is automatically converted to binary before it is transferred. K157 D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 5-9 • When the input condition goes active, the 4A9DH is transferred to the data register 3 D3. H4A9D (4) (A) (9) (D) Hex numbers D3 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Binary bit weight Difference Between MOV & MOVP The P of MOVP stands for a pulse. • Use the MOV instruction when the target data is changing and needs to be read frequently. To read the fixed data such as setting data, or data required to identify the cause of abnormal condition, use the MOVP instruction. • The following both of programs function the same. X4 X4 MOVP K157 D2 PLS M1 K157 D2 (system user) register Bit MOV S D Word R MELSECNET/10 (H) Direct Jn Bit S Word Intelligent function module Un G Index register Z K H P Level File Pointer Internal device Constant Applicable Device I steps MOV Digit Basic number of M1 N * D * The number of steps varies by the device used. 5 - 10 Check Operation The CPU is in RUN Input X2, X3, X4, X5, and X7 is ON. • Monitor the data stored in the data register D0 to D3. • After writing the data to the PLC, select [Online] [Monitor] [Device batch]. The Device batch monitor dialog box appears. • Enter "D0" in the Device batch monitor dialog box and click the button. Enter "D0". Click after entering the device number. 5 - 11 Start monitor Current values of timer and counter. (They changes.) A decimal number 157 is stored. A decimal number equivalent to a 4A9DH . Indicates ON/OFF state of each bit in the word devices. (Binary digit 0) (Binary digit 1) 1 0 1 H4A9D 1 1 2 1 4 0 8 0 16 1 (D) 32 0 64 1 128 0 (9) 256 1 1024 0 2048 0 4096 1 8192 0 16384 D3 (A) 512 (4) Binary bit weight Sign bit 19101 5 - 12 • Change the displayed decimal numbers into hex. Select hex in the device batch monitoring dialog box. [Device Batch Monitor Window] • Change the display format to the corresponding binary codes Select Bit in the device batch monitoring dialog box. [Device Batch Monitor Window] Numbers in D1 Numbers in D0 Numbers in D3 Numbers in D2 5 - 13 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX7 MAIN Ladder Example Create the following ladder with the GX Developer and write it to the CPU of the demonstration machine to check if the MOV instruction works properly. 0 5 X0 X1 Operating Procedure See Section 4.4 Operating Procedure operations. MOV K200 D0 MOV D0 D1 RST D0 RST D1 for the detailed procedure of the following (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder • How to alter the transfer instruction Follow the procedure given below to alter the transfer instruction. Example: Change the transfer data K200 of [MOV K200 D0] to K100 1) Double-click the instruction to be changed. 2) A ladder input window appears. 3) Move the cursor to "2" of "MOV K200 D0" and write "1" over the "2". 4) Click the OK button on the ladder input window. All data exist in can be changed using the above method. Be sure to make the changes in overwrite mode. If "Insert" is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen, press the Insert key to change it to overwrite. 5) When finished, click on the toolbar. 5 - 14 Operation Practice Check that "200" is displayed under both D0 and D1 on the monitor screen when X0 on the control panel of the demonstration machine is turned ON. 0 5 X0 X1 10 MOV K200 D0 MOV D0 D1 200 RST D0 RST D1 200 200 END When X0 turns ON, the values of D0 and D1 become 200. Related Practice Question Practice Question 5 5 - 15 Path name Project name Program name BIN (P) BCD BIN data conversion instruction Operations to read and write data from 35 steps onward X7 K50 T0 T0 0 K1500 T0 C10 S D BIN K4X20 D5 MOV K4X20 D6 X0 30 X0 34 Check the difference between BIN and MOV instructions. • When the input condition is activated, the data in the device designated as S is automatically judged as a BCD code, and converted into binary to be transferred to the device designated as D . 8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 S BCD 9999 0 1 0 1 1 Thousand digits 0 0 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Hundred digits Ten digits Unit digits Converted to binary 163848192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 D 0 BIN 9999 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 4 2 1 1 1 1 Becomes 0. • As the ordinary digital switches generate BCD codes, the BIN instruction can be used to write data of the digital switches to the PLC. X21 X20 X22 X23 X24 X26 X25 X27 X29 X2D 32 16 8 4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 5 - 16 1 64 0 2 128 0 256 0 128 1 256 0 512 1 512 1 1024 0 1024 0 2048 0 K4X20 4096 1 1 2048 0 2 4096 0 8 8192 1 4 Digital switch 8192 0 8 1 4 16384 0 4 3 X28 X2F 0 8 X2B 2 X2A 4 X2C 8 X2E 2 16384 + 1024 128 64 16 2 1234 1 · · + 4096 512 32 16 4 4660 · · 5.2.2 A: SCHOOL QB-12 MAIN D6 When the BCD code is input without conversion. D5 When the BCD is converted to binary code. K4X20 • As each of the word devices D (data register), T (timer current value), and C (counter current value) consist of 16 bits (1 word), transferring the data is performed in units of device. • Using 16 bit devices (such as X, Y, and M) allows you to handle 16-bit data. To do that, the numbers allocated to the 16 bit devices must be in consecutive order. • Four bit devices allow you to handle data in units of 4 bits. 4 Place (digit) 1 K4 X20 X20 X21 2 X22 X23 X24 8 X25 4 X26 8 X28 1 X29 X2B 3 4 X2A 8 X2C 2 X2D 4 X2E X2F 8 2 X27 1 First Number K2X28 Specify to read two-digit data "12". K1X20 (X23 to X20) (X2F to X28) K2X20 (X27 to X20) Read one-digit data "4". Read two-digit data "34". K3X20 (X2B to X20) Read three-digit data "234". K4X20 (X2F to X20) Read four-digit data "1234". As long as four bit devices to read 4-digit data are in consecutive order, any bit device can be the first one. • Other bit devices can be used in the same way as described above. (Internal relay M) M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 K2M6 K1M0 K3M5 (system user) register Bit Word R Direct function Jn module Bit S BIN S Word Un G Index register Z K H P I Digit MELSECNET/10(H) Intelligent Level File Pointer Internal device Constant Applicable Device N Basic number of steps A sample program that performs data input by digital switches is provided in Appendix 85. K1 D to D K4 5 - 17 3 A: SCHOOL QB-13 MAIN Path name Project name Program name BCD (P) BIN BCD data conversion instruction X7 K50 T0 0 T0 K1500 T0 C10 S D BCD T0 K2Y40 BCD C10 K4Y50 X6 37 • When the input condition is activated, data in the device designated as S is automatically judged as a BIN code, and converted into BCD to be transferred to the device designated as D . 163848192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 0 BIN 9999 S 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 Must be set to "0" 1 0 0 1 1 Thousand digits 32 16 8 4 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 BCD conversion 8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100 BCD 9999 D 64 0 0 1 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Hundred digits Ten digits Unit digits • As the ordinary digital displays display numbers using BCD code, the BCD instruction 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 Y5B Y5A Y57 Y56 Y53 Y52 8 4 2 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 Y50 256 0 Y51 512 1 Y54 1024 0 Y55 2048 0 Y58 4096 0 Y59 8192 0 Y5C 16384 0 Y5D + 1024 128 32 16 8 4 1 1213 Y5E can be used to display data of the PLC (current timer and counter values, operation results). Y5F 5.2.3 C10 (BIN) (BCD) K4Y50 4 Digital display 5 - 18 Allowable Range with BCD Instruction • The allowable range of data to be displayed by the BCD instruction (to be converted from BIN to BCD) is between 0 and 9999. Any data that falls outside the range cause an error. (Error code 50: OPERATION ERROR) • When you want to display the current timer value that exceeds 9,999, use the DBCD instruction. The instruction allows you to handle 8-digit data up to 99,999,999. Output Power 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40 8 4 2 1 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 80 40 20 10 Y4B Y4A Y49 Y48 800 400 200 100 Y4F Y4E Y4D Y4C 8000 4000 2000 1000 80000 40000 20000 10000 COM Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 PLC Output Module 0 1 0 1 K18000 X3 0 T5 SM400(ON at all times) DBCD T5 K5Y40 (system user) register Bit Word R Direct function Jn module Bit S Un G register Z K H P I N K1 S BCD Word Index Digit MELSECNET/10(H) Intelligent Level File Pointer Internal device Constant Applicable Device Basic number of steps 2 D to D K4 5 - 19 3 A: SCHOOL QEX8 MAIN Path name Project name Program name Ladder Example Create the following ladder with GX Developer and write it to the CPU of the demonstration machine to check if the BCD instruction works properly. 0 X0 C0 BCD 8 X1 C0 RST K10 K2Y40 C0 Operating Procedure Refer to Section 4.4 following operations. Operating Procedure for the detailed procedure of the (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder Operation Practice Check that the current value of C0 is displayed on the Y40 to Y47 BCD digital displays when the X0 on the control panel is turned ON several times. The C0 is reset by turning the X1 ON. Y5F to Y5C Y5B toY58 Y57 to Y54 Y53 to Y50 Y4F to Y4C Y4B to Y48 Y47 to Y44 Y43 to Y40 0 - 10 Displays the value of C0 BCD Didital Display Related Practice Question ____ 5 - 20 Practice Question 6 5.2.4 Example of specifying digit for bit devices and data transfer Program Example Process When the destination D is a word device X3 X2 X1 X0 MOVP S D K1X0 D0 K1X0 1 1 0 1 Become 0. b15 • Source: Source device b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 • Destination: Destination device When the source S is a word device b15 MOV S D D0 K2M100 b8 b7 b0 D0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M100 M108 M107 M115 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 K2M100 No change. When the source S is a constant MOV S D H1234 K2M0 1 2 3 4 H1234 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 M15 M8 M7 M0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 K2M0 No change. 3 4 When the source S is a bit device M15 S MOV D M8 M7 M4 M3 M0 K1M0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 K1M0 K2M100 0 M115 M108 M107 M104 M103 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 K2M100 No change. 5 - 21 M100 0s are Data of M3 transferred. to M0 are transferred. Path name Project name Program name 5.2.5 A: SCHOOL QB-14 MAIN FMOV (P) FMOV (Batch transfer of the same data) BMOV (P) BMOV (Batch transfer of the block data) S D n FMOVP K365 D0 K8 FMOVP K7000 D8 K16 S D n BMOVP D0 D32 K16 FMOVP K0 D0 K48 X3 0 X4 5 X5 10 X6 15 Operation Practice Input condition FMOVP S D n K365 D0 K8 FMOV • When the input condition is activated, the FMOV instruction starts to transfer the data specified in S to the specified number ( n ) of devices starting from the device specified in D . Example The FMOV instruction performs the following operation when X3 is turned ON. D S K365 365 365 D0 365 D1 365 D2 365 D7 n 8 devices (K8) • FMOV instruction is useful when clearing many data all at once. Example Equal Input condition FMOV K0 D0 K8 Input condition RST D0 RST D1 RST D7 Only one FMOV instruction can be substituted for many RST instructions as shown above. 5 - 22 S D n D0 D32 K16 Input condition BMOVP BMOV • When the input condition goes active, the BMOV instruction performs the batch transfer of the data stored in the specified number ( n ) of devices starting from the device specified in S , to the specified number ( n ) of devices starting from the device specified in D . The BMOV instruction performs the following operation when X5 is turned on. Example D S 365 365 ... 365 D39 D8 7000 7000 D40 ... ... D15 7000 ... ... 365 ... D7 ... ... D32 ... ... D0 7000 D47 • BMOV instruction is useful in the following situations: • When filing a logging data • For saving important data (e.g. data for auto-driving or measured data) into the Bit Word R Bit Word Un G Z S D n S BMOV S D n D K H (Note) (Note) Digit Pointer File (Note) FMOV Constant MELSECNET/10 (H) Intelligent Index Direct function register (system, user) register Jn module Internal device Level Available device P I N Basic number of steps latch area. This allows you to avoid data loss in the event of a power failure. Using the instruction, set to transfer the important data to data registers which have been set to live after the shut down. K1 to 4 K4 n (Note) Not available in BMOV instruction. 5 - 23 Operation Practice • Write the program on the previous page to the CPU, and run the CPU. • Follow the following steps to perform device batch monitoring. The contents from D0 to D47 can be monitored. After writing to PLC Select [Online] [Monitor] [Device batch]. Enter the device "D0" in the device batch monitor dialogue box. Select “Word” for the monitor type. Click the Start monitor button. Enter "D0". Select "Word". After setting the device and the monitor type, click this button. [Monitor screen] 1) Turn X3 ON. The numeric value 365 is sent to eight registers starting from D0 to D7 all at once. 2) Turn X4 ON. The numeric value 7000 is sent to 16 registers starting from D8 to D23 all at once. 3) Turn X5 ON. The contents of the 16 registers starting from D0 to D15 are sent to the 16 registers starting from D32 to D47 all at once. 4) Turn X6 ON. "0" is sent to the all 48 registers starting from D0 to D47 all at once. In other words, all the 48 registers are cleared to 0 at a time. 5 - 24 Reference • If a bit device is specified as D , the operation becomes as follows; FMOV instruction S D n D0 K2Y40 K4 Input condition FMOV As D is specified with two-digit numbers, these data are ignored. S D D0 (Example: when the content is 365.) D Y4F Y48 Y47 Y40 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 D n 4 devices (K4) D Y5F Y58 Y57 Y50 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 • Among the device from Y40 to Y5F, the devices specified as "1" are output first. • Programming as shown below allows you to turn ON the output of Y40 to Y5F all at once by activating the input condition (1), or to turn OFF the output of Y40 to Y5F at a time by activating the input condition (2). Input condition FMOV K255 K2Y40 K4 K255 bit pattern Input condition FMOV K0 K2Y40 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 K4 • When turning off bit devices in units of 4 bits; 16 bit devices or less 32 bit devices or less More than 32 bit devices MOV instruction DMOV instruction FMOV instruction e.g. e.g. e.g. K0 K4M0 DMOV K0 K8M0 FMOV K0 K4M0 K4 (Turns OFF 64 bit device) ) BMOV instruction Input condition BMOV As D is specified with two-digit numbers, these data are ignored. MOV D0 3 0 5 S D n D0 K2Y40 K4 D 1 D Y4F to Y48 D1 3 0 5 7 5 7 Y47 to Y40 5 1 n D2 D3 3 3 0 0 5 5 D D Y5F to Y58 Y57 to Y50 6 5 4 pieces (K4) 5 5 5 6 • The product codes (hexadecimal numbers) are stored in the devices from D0 to D3 as shown above. The instruction is useful for displaying and monitoring the last two digits that represent their types. 5 - 25 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX9 MAIN Ladder Example Create the ladder chart shown below using GX Developer, write the chart into the demonstration machine, and confirm if the FMOV instruction is correctly performed. 0 5 X0 X1 FMOV K200 D0 K5 FMOV K0 D0 K5 Operating Procedure The following procedures are the same as the Operating Procedure described in Section 4.4. (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder Operation Practice Make sure that the contents of the devices from D0 to D4 become 200s on the batch monitor screen by turning X0 ON on the control panel of the demonstration machine. The data in the devices are cleared by turning X1 ON. Change the setting of the device batch monitor as shown below to display the numbers in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary numbers. Numeric value: decimal………..displays the numbers in decimal. Numeric value: hexadecimal…..displays the numbers in hexadecimal. Monitor type: bit…………………displays the numbers in binary. Related Practice Question Practice Question 7 5 - 26 Path name Project name Program name 5.3 A: SCHOOL QB-15 MAIN Comparison Operation Instruction = >= <> > < Size comparison <= K100 SM413 (2 s clock) X3 C10 0 X4 BCD C10 K4Y40 6 SM400 (ON at all times) > 10 S1 K10 S2 C10 Y70 15 <= S1 K10 19 = K20 C10 Y72 23 <> K30 C10 Y73 27 > K20 C10 Y74 < K40 C10 34 <= K25 C10 >= K35 C10 Y75 41 <= K10 C10 >= K20 C10 Y76 <= K40 C10 > K50 C10 = K100 C10 55 S2 C10 Y71 RST C10 X0 • The comparison operation instruction compares the data of source 1 ( S1 ) and source 2 ( S2 ), and brings the devices into conduction if the conditions are met. • The instruction can be considered as one normally open ( ) as they are only conducted when the conditions are met. > K20 C10 < K40 C10 • = S1 S2 • < S1 S2 • > S1 S2 • <= S1 S2 • >= S1 S2 • <> S1 S2 Y74 Y74 Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 agree. Becomes conducted when source 1 is smaller than source 2. Becomes conducted when source 1 is larger than source 2. Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 agree or when source 1 is smaller than source 2. Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 agree or when source 1 is larger than source 2. Becomes conducted when source 1 and source 2 do not agree. 5 - 27 Operation Practice • Write the program to the CPU. • Turn ON both X3 and X4. • C10 starts to count (one count every two seconds). The current counted value is displayed on the digital display (Y40 to Y4F). • Make sure that the devices Y70 to Y76 turn ON as follows. • The counter is designed to be reset every 200 s. • In this way, the comparison instruction not only compares one data, but also specifies (system, user) register Bit Word R direct function Jn module Bit S1 Un G Z K H P I N K1 S1 Comparison instruction Word Index register Digit MELSECNET/10 (H) Intelligent Level File Pointer Internal device Constant Applicable device Basic number of steps the range. This function is commonly used for the program that judges the passing status of products, etc. to S2 S2 K4 5 - 28 3 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX10 MAIN Ladder Example Read the following ladder diagram from FD, write it to the demonstration machine, and make sure that , instructions are correctly performed. 0s T0 3s Y70: ON, 2.7 s T0 3.3 s Y71: ON, 3s T0 6s Y72: ON Y70:ON T0: 0 0 2 8 10 Y71:ON 2.8 2.9 3.0 Y72:ON 3.1 3.2 6.0 s X0 SET M0 M10 T0 T0 M20 > K30 T0 < K27 T0 < K30 T0 Y70 > X1 K33 T0 Y71 Y72 T0 RST Operating Procedure (1)Read data from FD Read the project data stored in FD. • Click K60 M10 BCD 33 M0 on the tool bar. Click 5 - 29 K2Y40 M0 • Click beside "Project drive" and select [-a-] to display "SCHOOL" and the path name. • Double-click on "SCHOOL". Click to display the pull-down menu. Select [-a-]. After selecting the project drive, double-click on "SCHOOL". • Double-click on "QEX10". Once "QEX10" is displayed on the project name box, click the Open button. Click After setting the project name, click the button. The following procedures are the same as the (2) Write to the PLC (3) Monitor the ladder 5 - 30 Operating Procedure in Section 4.4. Operation Practice • Turn X0 ON, and make sure that the program works properly. 0 X0 X0 SET M0 K60 T0 30 2 8 T0 10 M10 > K30 T0 < K27 T0 < K30 T0 Y70 30 30 > K33 T0 Y71 30 Y72 30 BCD 33 X1 T0 RST 35 30 K2Y40 M0 END Related Practice Question ____ 5 - 31 Practice Question 8 5.4 Arithmetic Operations Instruction Path name Project name Program name 5.4.1 +(P) BIN 16 bit data addition -(P) BIN 16 bit data subtraction S D +P K5 D0 S1 S2 D D0 K100 D1 X2 0 X3 4 1 +P 1 2 • The device content specified as D is added the device content specified as S , D and the result is stored in device every time the input condition is turned ON. D S + D0 (Input condition) First ON Second ON Third ON 2 A: SCHOOL QB-16 MAIN D (5) D0 5 + 0 (Assumption) 5 + 5 5 + 10 D0 contents are changed 5 10 15 • The device content specified by S1 is added the device content specified by S2 D and the result is stored in device when the input condition is turned ON. S2 S1 + D0 (Input condition) ON 15 (Assumption) D (100) D1 115 + 100 D0 contents are not changed. CAUTION should always be used for add-subtract instructions. + or is used for the instructions, add-subtract operation is • When performed upon every scanning. To use + or - for the instructions, operands must have been converted to pulse beforehand. • +P or -P X2 +P X2 K5 D0 M0 + PLS M0 K5 D0 REFERENCE • The following two instructions work on the same principle in add-subtract operation. (Addition) (Subtraction) 5 - 32 +P K1 D0 INCP -P K1 D2 DECP D2 D0 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QB-17 MAIN X4 0 MOVP K1000 D2 S D -P K10 D2 S1 S2 D D2 K50 D3 X5 3 X6 7 3 -P 3 4 • The device content specified as S is subtracted from the device content specified as D , and the result is stored in ON. D device every time the input condition is turned D S D - (10) 1000 - 10 990 D2 D2 (Input condition) First ON (Assumption) - 10 980 Second ON 990 - 10 970 Third ON 980 D2 contents are changed. 4 • The device content specified as S2 is subtracted from the device content specified as S1 and the result is stored in D device when the input condition is turned ON. S2 S1 D2 - (50) - 50 D D3 (Input condition) ON 970 920 (Assumption) Bit Add-substract instruction Add-substract instruction S D S1 S2 D S Word R (H) direct Jn Bit Word Intelligent function module Un G Index register Z K H P I Digit (system, user) register MELSECNET/10 Level File Pointer Internal device Constant Applicable device N Basic number of steps D2 contents are not changed. K1 3 S1 S2 to D K4 The basic number of steps becomes four steps for 5 - 33 S1 S2 D type. 4 Path name Project name Program name A: SCHOOL QEX11 MAIN Ladder Example Create the ladder diagram shown below with GX Developer, write it to the demonstration machine, and confirm if "+, - instructions" work properly. 0 10 X0 X1 20 >= D1 K0 26 < D1 K0 BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 +P D1 D0 BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 -P D0 D1 DBCD D1 K5Y40 Y70 DMOV K0 K5Y40 Operating Procedure The following procedures are the same as Section 4.4. (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder 5 - 34 Operating Procedure described in Operation Practice (1) When X0 is turned ON, the addition of data in X30 to 3F and data in X20 to 2F is performed, and the result is output to Y40 to Y53. (2) When X1 is turned ON, the subtraction of data of X30 to 3F and data of X20 to 2F is performed, and the result is output to Y40 to 53. When the result is negative value, Y70 is turned ON while Y40 to 53 are cleared to 0. 0 10 X0 X1 20 >= D1 26 < D1 400 400 K0 BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 +P D0 D1 BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 -P D0 D1 DBCD D1 K0 300 300 400 300 400 400 300 400 400 K5Y40 Y70 DMOV 34 K0 K5Y40 END + D0 D1 = D1 + D0 100 + 300 D1 400 Related Practice Question Practice Question 9 5 - 35 Path name Project name Program name 5.4.2 * (P) /(P) A: SCHOOL QB-18 MAIN BIN 16 bit multiplication BIN 16 bit division X0 0 X2 3 *P X3 7 1 /P MOVP K2000 D0 S1 S2 D K30 D0 D10 S1 S2 D D0 K600 D20 1 2 • The device content specified by S1 is multiplied by the device content specified by S2 , and the result is stored in the device specified by turned ON. S1 K30 30 x S2 D0 2000 16 bit (1 word) is not enough for storing the result of 16-bit data x 16-bit data. Thus, D10 that is specified by the program and D11, which is the next device number, work as the holder of the result. = D when the input condition is D D11 D10 60000 This device is handled as 32-bit register to hold the result. Left-most bit of D10 (b15) is not a sign bit. It is handled as a part of the data. The instructions should be handled as 32-bit when programming using the calculation result of the (P) instruction. (e.g. DMOV instruction, DBCD instruction) 5 - 36 2 • The device content specified by S1 is divided by the device content specified by S2 when the input condition is turned on, and the result is stored in the device specified by D . S1 D0 2000 S2 K600 600 ÷ D D20 3 = D21 200 Quotient and Quotient goes to D20 specified by the program. Remainder Remainder goes to D21, which is the next device number. Digits after the decimal point of the operation result are ignored. • If a bit device is specified as D , the quotient is stored, however, the remainder is not saved. • Examples when handling negative values are explained below. -5 ÷ (-3) = 1, remainder -2 5 ÷ (-3) = -1, remainder 2 • Examples when dividing a number by 0, or dividing 0 by a number are explained below. Example 0÷0 Error “OPERATION ERROR” 1÷0 0÷1 Both quotient and remainder are 0 Example Operation Practice • Write the program to the CPU and run the program. • Turn X0 ON and store "2000" (BIN value) into D0. • Turn X2 ON. The following operation is performed. D11 and If the "60000" (operation result of ) is handles as 16-bit integral number and only D10 is monitored, "-5536" is displayed. To avoid this, follow the procedures on the following pages. S1 S2 K30 (30) D0 (2000) D10 D = D11 D10 (60000) • Turn X3 ON. S2 D D0 (2000) K600 (600) = D21 (200) Remainder D20 (3) Quotient (system, user) register Bit Multiply-division instruction S1 S2 D Word R direct function Jn module Bit Word Un G Index register Z K H P I Digit MELSECNET/10 (H) Intelligent Level File Pointer Internal device Constant Applicable device N Basic number of steps S1 S1 K1 * S2 to D K4 4 The basic number of steps for multiplication instruction is three or four steps, and that for division instruction is four steps. * The multiplication instruction varies depending on the device to be used. 5 - 37 • How to monitor 32-bit integral number data If the operation result of the multiplication instruction is out of the range from 0 to 32,767, the result cannot be displayed properly when the number is handled as 16-bit integral number and the contents of the lower register are monitored in ladder. To monitor those numbers correctly, follow the steps below (device registration monitor operation). • Select [Online] • Click [Monitor] Register devices [Entry data monitor]. to show the device registration dialogue box. Click this button to display the device registration dialogue box. Continued on the next page 5 - 38 Continued from the previous page • Enter "D10" in the device edit box on the device registration dialogue box. • Click • Click the on the display edit box, and select "32-bit integral number". Register button. The items are displayed on the device registration monitor dialogue box. • When complete, click the Cancel button to close the window. 1) Enter "D10". 3) After entering the device and setting the display, click "Register". 2) Click the button and select "32-bit integral number" from the pull-down menu. 4) When complete, click "Cancel". 5) Click the Start monitor button. Thus, 2 words of the operation result stored in D10 and D11 can be monitored. Click this button to show the operation result of D10 and D11. 5 - 39 Path name Project name Program name 0 X0 A: SCHOOL QEX12 MAIN Ladder Example Create the ladder chart shown below with GX Developer, write it to the demonstration machine, and make sure that "*, / instructions" can be performed properly. BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 *P D0 D1 D10 DBCDP D10 K8Y40 13 X1 BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 /P D0 D1 D20 BCDP D20 K4Y50 BCDP D21 K4Y40 Operating Procedure The following procedures are the same as the Section 4.4. (1) Create a new project (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder 5 - 40 Operating Procedure described in Operation Practice (1) When X0 is turned ON, the data of X20 to 2F is multiplied by that of X30 to 3F, and the result is output to Y40 to 5F. (2) The data of X20 to 2F is divided by that of X30 to 3F when X1 is turned ON. Its quotient is output to Y50 to 5F, and the remainder is output to Y40 to 4F. 0 X0 *P BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 D0 D1 D10 6 DBCDP D10 13 X1 /P 3 18 K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 D1 D20 6 BCDP D20 BCDP D21 30 3 0 0 3 18 K8Y40 BINP D0 6 6 3 0 K4Y50 K4Y40 END D0 x D1 = D10 6 x 3 = 18 As the operation result of this example is in the range from 0 to 32767, the result is displayed properly even though the number is handled and monitored as 16-bit integral number. Related Practice Question Practice Question 10, Practice Question 11 5 - 41 32-bit data instructions and their necessity • The data memory of Q-series PLC, which consists of 16-bit, is a memory of 1-word unit. The memory generally processes transfer, comparison, and arithmetic operations in 1-word unit. • Q-series PLC also supports 2-word (32-bit) unit. In this case, add "D" at the head of each instruction to indicate that the instruction is handled as 2-word. The following shows the examples: Data Instruction Transfer 1-word 16-bit 2-word 32-bit MOV(P) DMOV(P) BIN(P) DBIN(P) BCD(P) DBCD(P) <, >, < = Comparison D <, D >, D < = > =, =, < > D > =, D =, D< > + (P) Four arithmetic operations D + (P) - (P) D - (P) (P) D * (P) / (P) D / (P) * Available range of - 32768 0 - 2147483648 numbers to to to 32767 9999 2147483647 Numbers in parentheses are for 0 to BIN (P), BCD (P) instructions. 99999999 Numbers in parentheses are for BIN (P), DBCD (P) instructions. Available range of digits K1 to K4 K1 to K8 • The bit value of the 32-bit configuration is as follows: b31 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · b16 b15 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · b0 -2147483648 1073741824 536870912 268435456 134217728 67108864 33554432 16777216 8388608 4194304 2097152 1048576 524288 262144 131072 65536 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 5.4.3 As in the case of handling 16-bit data, the PLC handles a 32-bit negative value in two’s complement form. Therefore, the leftmost bit (B15 for 16-bit) is regarded as a sign bit. b31 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · b0 Top bit (Sign bit) Allowable range -2147483648 to 0 to 2147483647 If the bit is 0, the number is interpreted as a positive number. If the bit is 1, the number is interpreted as a negative number. 5 - 42 • Determine if the data should be handled in 2-word (32-bit) unit or not depending on the data size. In the following conditions, 2-word instructions must be used. 1) When the data size exceeds the range ( 32768 to 32767) that can be dealt with by 1 word. DMOV S D K50000 D0 D1 D0 Stored in the two contiguous devices. 50000 50000 Transferred 2) When transferring the result of 16-bit multiplication instruction (1-word instruction). * S1 S2 D D0 D1 D10 D0 D11 D1 D10 The result of the multiplication is stored in the two contiguous devices. X DBCD D10 K8Y40 D11 D10 8-digit Display (0 to 99999999) BCD conversion The result of the 32-bit data multiplication will be 64 bits. 3) When utilizing the result of 32-bit division instruction. D/ D20 D21 D30 D40 D20 D31 D30 D41 D40 ÷ (Quotient) D43 D42 (Remainder) DBCD D40 K8Y40 Displays quotient DBCD D42 K8Y60 Displays remainder 5 - 43 5.4.4 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QB-19 Program name MAIN Calculation examples of multiplication/division that include decimal points (in the case where an arithmetic operation instruction " " or "/" is used) * Example 1 Calculation example to determine a circle's perimeter Numeric value of the digital switch × 3.14 (Circle ratio) (K4X30) Displays integral part and Displays decimal fraction part (K8Y50) (K2Y48) • Programming method Specify the circle ratio as 314 (3.14 x 100), and divide the result by 100 afterward. Example 2 Calculation example to handle decimal places (division example) Numeric value of the digital switch ÷ 0.006 (K4X30) Displays quotient and (K8Y50) Displays remainder (K4Y40) • Programming method In order to deal with 0.006 as an integer 6, both the dividend and divisor have to be multiplied 1,000 times. Ordering Example 1 calculation X0 X1 BINP K4X30 D0 *P D0 K314 D1 D0 x 314 D/P D1 K100 D10 D2 Digital switch set value is taken into D0 . D1 → D2 ÷ 100 D1 → D11 D10 D13 D12 Quotient Ordering Example 2 calculation X1 Remainder (decimal fraction part) DBCD D10 K8Y50 Displays integral part (quotient) BCD D12 K2Y48 Displays decimal fraction part (remainder) MOV K0 K2Y40 BINP K4X30 D20 *P D20 K1000 D21 D20 x 1000 → D/P D21 K6 D30 D22 D21 DBCD D30 K8Y50 Displays quotient by multiplying 1,000 times BCD D32 K3Y44 Displays remainder by multiplying 1,000 times X0 Digital switch set value is taken into D20 . ÷ D22 D21 6 → D31 D30 D33 D32 Quotient Remainder REMARK QCPU has instructions that can handle actual (floating point) operation data for highly accurate operations. As long as you use the instructions, you don’t have to pay careful attention concerning the place of the decimal point as shown above. 5 - 44 5.5 5.5.1 Index Register, File Register How to use index register Z • The index register (Zn) is used to indirectly specify the device number. The result of an addition of data in the index register and the directly specified device number can be specified as the device number. Example D0Z0 Can be interpreted as D(0 + Z0) Device number. For example, if Z0 is 0, the device number becomes D0. if Z0 is 50, the device number becomes D50. • Z0 to Z15 can be used as the index register. • The index register (Zn) is a word device that consists of 16 bits. The allowable data size range is -32768 to +32767. • Index modification can be applied to the following devices. Bit device……… X, Y, M, L, S, B, F, Jn X, Jn Y, Jn B, Jn SB (e.g. K4Y40Z) Word device …... T, C, D, R, W, Jn W, Jn SW, Jn G (e.g. D0Z) Constant………. K,H (e.g. K100Z) Pointer………… P CAUTION The index register cannot be used for indirectly specifying the timer or the counter coil. Example K100 TOZ K50 COZ 5 - 45 Application Example • The data is written to the data register whose number is specified with the digital switch. K3000 T2 T2 0 X0 5 BINP K2X20 Z0 MOVP T2 D0Z0 • Perform the device batch monitoring while conducting a check. The operating procedure is the same as the one explained in Section 5.2.1. Enter any two-digit number in the digital switch column (X27 to X20) and turn X0 ON. 5 0 X27 - X20 Z0 = 50 D0Z0 = D50 The current value of T2 is transferred to D50 column. 5 - 46 5.5.2 How to use file register R • The file register (R) is a register that consists of 16 bits as well as the data register (D). • The file register applies to the standard RAM of the QCPU and the memory cards (SRAM card, Flash card). Program memory Stores the parameter program, device comment, and device default value. (File register cannot be stored.) Standard RAM Stores the file register from 1K to 32K. Standard ROM Stores the parameter program, device comment, and device default value. (File register cannot be stored.) Memory card Stores the file register from 1K to 1018K. The maximum number of the file register to be stored varies depending on the memory card in use. • The data in the file register remains after the reset operation or after the power is turned off. To clear the data, write 0 to the file register by using the MOV(P) instruction as such or write with GX Developer. • Use [Write to PLC] of GX Developer or a sequence program to write to the standard RAM or to the SRAM card. • Use [Write to PLC (Flash ROM)] of GX Developer to write to the Flash card. • Specify the area of the file register in 1K-point (1,024-point) unit using the parameter. Application Example • Set 32-K points of the file register R0 to R32767, and use them with the program. • Follow the steps below to register the parameter. 1) Double-click [Parameter] on the project list. 1) Double-click! 2) [PLC parameter], [Network param], and [Remote pass] appear. Double-click [PLC parameter]. 2) Double-click! (Continued on the next page) 5 - 47 (Continued from the previous page) 3) The Qn(H) Parameter dialogue box appears. Click the <PLC file> tab on the box. 3) Click! 4) Check the box beside "Use the same file name as the program." of the file register field, and select "Memory card(RAM)" for the corresponding memory. 4) Select! 5) When complete, click the End button. 5) Click! 6) Right-click on the "Device memory" from the project data list, and click [New]. 6) Click! (Continued on the next page) 5 - 48 (Continued from the previous page) 7) Click the OK button. 8) Click the Yes button. 7) Click! 8) Select! 9) Enter "R0", and click! 10) Enter values! (Continued on the next page) 5 - 49 9) The device memory main screen appears. Enter "R0" in the device edit box, and click the Display button. 10) Check to see that the device name is changed to "R". Enter "100", "200", "300", and "400" in R1, R2, R3, and R4 columns, respectively. (To clear, enter "0".) (Continued from the previous page) 11) Select [Online] [Write to PLC] to display the Write to PLC dialogue box, and select "parameter" on the File selection tab. 12) Click the 11) Click! 12) Click! Execute button to start writing. As the demonstration machine has two CPUs installed, it is necessary to write the parameter after setting the parameter for the Multiple CPU. (This procedure is not required when only one CPU is installed.) For details on the setting procedure, refer to Multiple CPU setting of the parameter in Section 3.2. 13) Select "memory card (RAM)" for "target memory" on the Write to PLC dialogue box. 13) Click! 14) Click the "MAIN" box under the file register on the File selection tab. Click the Execute button to start writing. 14) Click! • Check that 100 to 400 are written in the R1 to R4 columns by using the device batch monitor. The operating procedure is the same as the one described in Section 5.2.1. • To write or clear the data of the file register with the program, write the program below. For the operating procedure, refer to Section 4.4. Writing X0starts when X0 is turned on, and the data is cleared when X1 is turned on. 0 MOV K173 R5 MOV K0 R5 X1 3 5 - 50 The file register data of the SRAM card is retained with the battery. Resetting or turning off the power does not clear the data. To clear, write "0". 5.6 External Setting of the Timer/Counter Set Value, and the External Display of the Current Value The timer and the counter can be specified either by K (decimal constant) directly or by D (data register) indirectly. Programming as described below allows the set value to be changed with the external digital switch. X0 0 BINP Digital switch X2F to X20 D5 K4X20 D5 X4 1 2 3 4 T10 4 T10 D5 1 2 3 4 Y70 9 T10 SM400 11 BCD T10 K4Y40 BINP K4X30 D6 X1 15 D5 Digital display Y4F to Y40 D6 X5 C10 19 Displays the current value of T10. C10 24 Y71 X6 26 RST C10 C10 K4Y50 SM400 31 BCD • This program is saved in the text FD as Project name QTC Read it to GX Developer, and write it to the PLC to see if it works. Operating Procedure The step (1) of the following procedure is the same as that of Operating Procedure described in Section 5.3. The steps (2) to (4) of the following procedure are the same as that of Operating Procedure described in Section 4.4. (1) Read data in FD (2) Create a program (3) Write to the PLC (4) Monitor the ladder 5 - 51 Operation Practice (1) External setting of the timer set value and display of the current value Set the timer set value in the digital switch (X20 to 2F), and turn the X0 switch ON. When the X4 switch is turned ON, Y70 turns ON after the set time specified with the digital switch elapses. (e.g. Y70 turns ON after 123.4 s elapsed if you entered 1 2 .)3 4 The digital display (Y40 to 4F) shows the current value of the timer T10. (2) External setting of the counter set value and display of the current value Set the counter set value for the digital switch (X30 to 3F), and turn the X1 switch ON. Turn the X5 switch ON and OFF repeatedly. Y71 turns ON when the number of times that X5 is turned ON reaches the number specified with the digital switch. The digital display (Y50 to 5F) shows the current value of the timer C10 (the number of the times that X5 is turned on). Turning the X6 switch on clears the counter C10 to 0. If the contact C10 is already turned on, the contact is released. 5 - 52 Path name Project name Program name 5.7 5.7.1 A: SCHOOL QTEST5 MAIN Practice Question Practice Question (1) MOV Temporarily send the eight input conditions (X0 to X7) to D0, and then output them toY70 to Y77. (e.g. Y70 turns ON when X0 is turned ON) X0 Y70 X1 Y71 X2 Y72 X3 Y73 X4 Y74 X5 Y75 X6 Y76 X7 Y77 Fill in the blank square of the program below, create a program with GX Developer and check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine. SM401 0 MOV MOV 1) D0 F3 D0 2) F3 Hint CPU K2X0 (Input module) D0 (Output module) X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 MOV MOV Y70 Y71 Y72 Y73 Y74 Y75 Y76 Y77 1) 2) K2Y70 CPU takes in the input signal as "1" when the signal is ON, and imports as "0" when it is OFF. The output module turns ON upon outputting "1", and turns OFF upon outputting "0". Comparison The program created by the sequence instruction without MOV instruction is shown on the next page. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 X0 Y70 X1 Y71 X2 Y72 X3 Y73 X4 Y74 X5 Y75 X6 Y76 X7 Y77 5 - 53 Path name Project name Program name 5.7.2 A: SCHOOL QTEST6 MAIN Practice Question (2) BIN,BCD conversion Show the number of times that X1 is turned ON on the display connected to Y40 to Y4F in BCD. The counter (C0) set value should be input with the digital switch (X20 to X2F) after X0 is turned ON. Fill in the blank square of the program below, create a program with GX Developer and check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine. 0 5 9 13 1) C0 X1 X0 BIN SM401 3) X2 2) C0 RST D0 4) C0 F3 Hint CPU BIN value BCD value BIN D0 BCD digital switch X20 to X2F(K4X20) Set value BCD value C0 BCD X1:ON/OFF BIN value 1) 2) 3) 4) 5 - 54 BCD digital display Y40 to Y4F(K4Y40) Path name Project name Program name 5.7.3 A: SCHOOL QTEST7 MAIN Practice Question (3) FMOV Create a program that works as follows: 1) 64 outputs (Y40 to Y7F) turn ON when X0 is turned ON. 2) 64 outputs (Y40 to Y7F) turn OFF when X0 is turned OFF. Fill in the blank square of the program below, create a program with GX Developer and check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine. X0 0 FMOV K255 X0 5 FMOV 3) 1) K2Y40 2) K8 Hint The constant should be output from the CPU in binary form. CPU (Output cards) 255 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Outputting 255 from Y40, for example. 128 64 1 1 32 16 8 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 + 128 = 255 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40 Y44 Y45 Y46 The question deals with 64-point (Y40 to Y7F) outputs. How many blocks are required for 255 on an output unit basis? Y47 MOV 1) 2) 3) Comparison The program created by the sequence instruction without FMOV instruction is shown below. The number of steps used is 130. 0 X0 Y40 Y41 Y42 Y7F 5 - 55 Path name Project name Program name 5.7.4 A: SCHOOL QTEST8 MAIN Practice Question (4) Comparison instruction Use the two BCD digital switches, perform (A-B) operation and show the result on the BCD digital display (Y40 to Y4F). (X3F to X30) (X2F to X20) A B (Y4F to Y40) Display the result of A - B calculation on the BCD display of Y40 to Y4F. If the result is a negative number, however, make sure that the display turns to 0 and the LED of Y70 turns on. Fill in the blank square of the program below and check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine. 0 X0 1) K4X20 D0 2) K4X30 D1 D0 D1 -P 3) 4) K0 D1 SET K0 D1 MOV K0 K4Y40 BCD D1 K4Y40 RST Hint The constant should be output from the CPU in binary form. − D0 D1 = D1 - D0 → D1 1) 2) 3) 4) 5 - 56 Y70 F3 Y70 F3 Path name Project name Program name 5.7.5 A: SCHOOL QTEST9 MAIN Practice Question (5) +,When X0 turns ON, create a program that imports the value specified by the digital switch (X20 to X2F) into D3 and D2 (32-bit data), adds them to D1 and D0 and shows the result on the display (Y40 to Y5F). Also, when X1 turns ON, the program should import the value specified by the digital switch (X20 to X2F) into D5 and D4, subtract them from D1 and D0 and show the result on the display. If the result becomes a negative number, the program should turn Y77 ON and show the absolute value on the display in two’s complement form. Fill in the blank square of the program below and check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine. 0 X0 DBIN K4X20 D2 D2 D0 Adds the external set value to D0. 1) 9 17 D<= X1 K0 D0 DBCD D0 K8Y40 DBIN K4X20 D4 D4 D0 2) 26 X0 PLS Only displayed when the result is a positive number. Subtracts the external set value from D0. M1 F3 X1 30 D> M1 K0 D0 DCML D0 D8 D+P D8 K1 DBCD D8 50 X7 If the result is a negative number, it is converted and displayed as a positive number (determines the negative absolute value). K8Y40 DMOV K0 Y77 Outputs that the number is a negative. D0 Clears D0 and D1. 1) 2) Reference Complement (Deny transfer) D1 M1 D> K0 D0 DCML D0 D + P K1 D8 D8 Before executing DCML (negative value) b31 b30 1 1 D0 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 1 0 1 1 0 D9 The absolute value is determined by calculating two's complement of D0 and D2 (32-bit data). After executing DCML 0 0 0 0 0 b1 1 b0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 D8 1 0 0 1 D9 After executing both D + P (absolute value) b2 0 D8 0 1 0 1 0 If 16-bit data is a negative number, it is changed to the absolute value using NEG (two’s complement) instruction. REMARK The CML instruction inverts condition is turned ON. S bit pattern and transfers it to Input condition CML 5 - 57 S D D0 D10 D when the input Path name Project name Program name 5.7.6 Practice Question (6) A: SCHOOL QTEST10 MAIN *, / The multiplication/division data can be set by turning X0 ON. When X2 is turned ON, the BIN multiplication of the value specified with the digital switch X20 to X27 and X30 to X37 is performed, and a division is performed when X3 is turned ON. The result of the multiplication or the quotient of the division is displayed on the BCD display of Y40 to Y4F, and the remainder is displayed on the BCD display of Y60 to Y67. (X30 to X37) × (X20 to X27) (Y40 to Y4F) (X30 to X37) ÷ (X20 to X27) (Y40 to Y4F)……(Y60 to Y67) Fill in the blank square of the program below, create a program with GX Developer and check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine. X0 0 7 12 18 X2 X3 X3 X2 SM401 Hint D0 BINBIN value multiplication BIN-division D1 D3 0 BIN value D2 BIN value D0 D1 D2 D3 BIN value BIN value BIN value BIN value 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 5 - 58 1) K2X30 D0 2) K2X20 D1 3) D0 D1 D2 4) D0 D1 D2 5) D2 K4Y40 6) D3 K2Y60 A: SCHOOL QTEST11 MAIN Path name Project name Program name 5.7.7 * Practice Question (7) D , D/ Create a program that performs the BIN-multiplication of the value specified with the 5-digit digital switch (X20 to X33) by 1100 when X2 is turned ON. If the result is less than 99999999, show the result on the 8-digit display (Y40 to Y5F). The program should perform the BIN-division of the value specified with the 8-digit digital switch (X20 to X3F) by 40000 when X3 is turned ON. If X4 is ON, show the quotient of the result on the 8-digit display (Y40 to Y5F). If X4 is OFF, show the remainder on the same display. (X20 to X33)×1100 (Y40 to Y5F) Quotient (Y40 to Y5F) X4 ON (X20 to X3F)÷40000 Remainder (Y40 to Y5F) X4 OFF Fill in the blank square of the program below, create a program with GX Developer and check to see if it works properly with the demonstration machine. 0 X2 X3 DBINP K5X20 D0 K1100 D2 D2 D4 Y077 1) 2) D< Y77 24 X3 D0 K99999999 D4 Y77 DBCDP D4 X2 5) X4 X4 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 5 - 59 K8Y40 3) K8X20 4) K40000 D12 D10 D12 D10 D14 Y077 DBCD 6) K8Y40 DBCD 7) K8Y40 Answers for the practice questions in Chapter 5 Question 5 6 7 8 Answer 1) K2 X0 2) K2 Y70 1) D0 2) K4 X20 3) BCD 4) K4 Y40 1) K2 Y40 2) K8 3) K0 1) BIN P 2) BIN P 3) 4) 9 10 11 1) D P 2) D P 1) BIN 2) BIN 3) P 4) P 5) BCD 6) BCD 1) DMOV P 2) D P 3) DBIN P 4) DMOV P 5) D/P 6) D14 7) D16 5 - 60 CHAPTER 6 6.1 USING OTHER FUNCTIONS Clock Function With the clock function, the following items can be set in the clock elements incorporated in the CPU; year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of the week. To enable the clock function, use GX Developer or a program. To set or read the clock data, use GX Developer. 1) Click [Online] and then [Set time] to display the Set time dialog box. 1) Click! 2) Input year, month, day, hour, minute and second, and select the day of the week in the Set time dialog box. 2) Enter! 3) Click! 3) Click the 6-1 Setup button. Reference The following shows an example of using the clock function with a program. ( Project name QEX13 ) • Writing clock data 0 X7 MOVP H0104 SD210 2001.04(April) MOVP H0110 SD211 Date: 1st Hour: 10 o'clock MOVP H4020 SD212 Minute: 40 Second: 20 MOVP H2000 SD213 Year: 2001 00 is Sunday SM210 Clock data set request PLS Settable items are items in Set time a few minutes ahead of actual time, and then write it to the PLC. When actual time has reached the set time, turn on the input switch X7. Then the clock is activated. • Reading clock data 11 13 X7 SM400 Turn off X07 to read time. 6-2 SM213 Clock data read request MOV SD211 K4Y50 Date and hour MOV SD212 K4Y40 Minute and second 6.2 Test Function at Online Exercise this function with the program Project name As preparation, follow the procedure below. 0 X6 X1 Y70 For details on the operation method, refer to Chapter 2. K1500 TO 0 1) Read the project from the user floppy disk (FD) using GX Developer. Y70 4 X4 M10 X6 T1 BCD 13 TO 0 K4Y50 2) Write the parameter and program of the read project to the CPU (PLC). (The CPU must be at stop to do this.) 3) Set GX Developer to the monitor mode. Y74 Y74 17 23 Y74 X6 QEX14 . T1 K30 0 END 4) Confirm a program displayed in the screen. 6-3 6.2.1 Turning device "Y" ON/OFF forcibly Stop the CPU before proceeding with the procedure below. 1) Click the button on the toolbar. 1) Click! 2) The Device test dialog box appears. Click "Device" and input "Y70" in the list box. 2) Click to set! 3) Click the FORCE ON / FORCE OFF button to forcibly turn "Y70" on/off. 3) Click! Check Using Demonstration Machine 1) Confirm that the content displayed on the execution history area switches between ON and OFF according to clicks of the FORCE ON / FORCE OFF button. Also, confirm Y70’s LED on the demonstration machine switches between on and off according to the same operation. NOTE If the CPU is in a RUN state, operation results of programs are given priority. For this reason, stop the CPU first to make confirmation with the demonstration machine. POINT To execute setting/resetting of contacts, changing a current value of word devices, and forced outputs, it is also possible to use the test function while GX Developer is monitoring ladders. In the ladder-monitoring screen of GX Developer, double-click the contact or press Enter key while holding the Shift key. This forcibly switches the contact between closed and open. To display the dialog box for changing current values, double-click the word device or press Enter key while holding the Shift key in the ladder-monitoring screen of GX Developer. 6-4 6.2.2 Setting and resetting device "M" Activate the CPU before proceeding with the procedure below. 1) Click the button on the toolbar. 1) Click! 2) The Device test dialog box appears. Click "Device" and input "M10" in the list box. 2) Click to set! 3) Click the FORCE ON / FORCE OFF button to set or reset "M10". 3) Click! Check Using Demonstration Machine Turn X4 off and check the following items. M10 X4 M10 4 1) When M10 is set, is de-energized and the current value of the timer T0 is cleared to 0. Confirm that the value on the digital display (Y50-Y5F) stops changing. K1500 T0 K4 BCD T0 Y50 M10 (Monitoring screen with M10 set) 2) When M10 is reset, is energized and the timer T0 starts counting from 0. This count value increases by 10 at a second. Confirm that the value on the display (Y50-Y5F) increases by 10 at a second. POINT With the same procedure, bit devices other than internal relays (M) can also be set and reset forcibly. 6-5 6.2.3 Changing a current value of device "T" Activate the CPU before proceeding with the procedure below. 1) Click the button on the toolbar. 1) Click! 2) The Device test dialog box appears. Click "Device" in "Word device/buffer memory" area and input "T0" in the list box. 2) Click to set! 3) Click "Setting value" and input "1000" in the list box. 3) Click to set! 4) Click! 4) After the setting is completed, click the Set button to forcibly change the current value of T0 to 1000. Check Using Demonstration Machine 1) Confirm that the value on the digital display (Y50-Y5F) changes to 1000 by . pressing POINT With the same procedure, word devices other than timers (T) can also be changed in their current values. 6-6 6.2.4 Reading error steps Activate the CPU before proceeding with the procedure below. 1) Click [Diagnostics] [PLC diagnostics]. 1) Click! 2) The PLC diagnostics dialog box appears. Click the Error Jump button to jump to the sequence program step number where the highlighted error occurred. • An error number is displayed if an error was found. 2) Jump to the step number with the error! • "No error" is displayed if no error was found. 6-7 6.2.5 Remote RUN/STOP Activate the CPU before proceeding with the procedure below. 1) Click [Online] [Remote operation]. 1) Click! 2) The Remote operation dialog box appears. Select "STOP" in the list box in the Operation area. 2) Select! 3) After the setting is completed, click the Execute button. 3) Click! 4) The message saying "Execute?" appears. Click the Yes button. The CPU stops. 5) Select "RUN" in step 2), and perform step 2) to 4) again. 4) Click The CPU, which was set to STOP in the above procedure, enters a RUN state again. 6-8 6.3 Forced I/O Assignment by Parameter Settings 1) Double-click "Parameter" in the project list. 1) Double-click! 2) "PLC parameter", "Network param", and "Remote pass" are displayed. Double-click "PLC parameter". 2) Double-click! 3) The Qn(H) Parameter dialog box appears. Click the "I/O assignment" tab. 3) Click! 4) Select! 5) Enter! 4) Select "Empty" in the list box of "Type" column. 5) Input "QX42" in the "Model name" column. 6) Select "32points" in the list box of "Points" column. 7) Input "0000" in the "StartXY" column. 8) After the setting is completed, click the END button. 6) Select! 7) Enter! After this exercise is finished, initialize the settings by the following procedure. 1) Click the Default button in the Qn(H) Parameter dialog box to initialize the parameter settings. 8) Click! 2) Click on the toolbar to open the Write to PLC dialog box, and then write only the parameters to the CPU. (Do the same for the second CPU.) 6-9 Check Using Demonstration Machine Stop the CPU and click on the toolbar. The Write to PLC dialog box opens. Click the parameter of the target data, and then click the Select button Execute button sequentially to write only the parameter to the CPU. After that, activate the CPU and confirm the following. Perform the same parameter settings to second CPU. (This is not necessary if there is only one CPU incorporated.) For how to write parameters to second CPU, refer to Section 2.6. 1) 2) A current value of the timer T0 disappears from the screen of the digital display (Y50 to Y5F). Instead, the LEDs of Y70 to Y77 start flashing. These flashes continue until the value reaches the set device value. Outputting to Y70 and Y74 with X6 turned on does not m-+ake the LEDs of Y70 and Y74 flash. [I/O numbers before forced assignment] [Slot 0] Address 0, Address 1, Address 2, Address 3 QX42 Q61P-A1 Q02H Q02H Power CPU CPU supply module [Slot 1] Address 4, Address 5, Address 6, Address 7 QY42P Address 0 Address 4 Address 1 Address 5 Address 2 Address 6 Address 3 Address 7 One address contains 16 points. Modules with 64 points take 4 addresses. Digital display [BCD T0 K4Y50] Y5F to Y50 Name plate Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70 Name plate [I/O numbers after forced assignment] Address 0 Address 1 QX42 Q61P-A1 Q02H Q02H Power CPU CPU supply module X is set to 32 points. Therefore another 32 points cannot be used. This makes each of following addresses smaller by 2. Address 4, Address 6 Digital display Address 5, Address 7 QY42P Address 0 Address 2 Address 1 Address 3 Y5F to Y50 Address 4 Name plate [BCD T0 K4Y50] Address 5 Y77 Y76 Y75 Y74 Y73 Y72 Y71 Y70 Name plate POINT • Note that address 7 has been replaced with address 5. This means that a current value of the timer T0 is output to the newly assigned address 5, and LEDs of Y70 to Y77 flash as they are connected to the address 5. • Results of outputting to Y70 or Y74 cannot be confirmed on any displays as address 7 for output modules no longer exists. To display normally, change the device number from K4Y50 to K4Y30 and from Y70-Y77 to Y50-Y57. 6 - 10 6.4 Using Retentive Timers When an input condition is turned on, the coil is energized. Then the value of a retentive timer starts increasing. Once a current value has reached the set value, a retentive timer goes time out and its contact turns on. If the input condition is turned off during that increase, the coil is de-energized but the current value is kept. To restart the increase, which means to accumulate values, turn input conditions on again to re-energize the coil. X6 contact K50 X6 ST1 ST1 coil ST1 Y73 ST1 a contact X7 2.0 s X7 contact (to input RST instructions) RST ST1 ST1 current value Before using as a retentive timer, specify the number of points in parameters. 3.0 s 0 30 30 50 50 0 An RTS instruction must be used to turn off the contact and clear the current value after the retentive timer goes time out. In the example operation below, the retentive timer is set to ST0 to ST31. 1) Double-click "Parameter" in the project list. 1) Double-click! 2) "PLC parameter", "Network param", and "Remote pass" are displayed. Double-click "PLC parameter". 2) Double-click! (To next page) 6 - 11 (From previous page) 3) The Qn(H) Parameter dialog box appears. Click the "I/O assignment" tab. 3) Click! 4) Click "Dev. point" in the "Retentive timer" row, and input "32" in there. 5) After the setting is completed, click the button. 4) Enter! 5) Click! 6 - 12 End 6.5 Batch Replacement of Devices 6.5.1 Batch replacement of device numbers In the example operation below, Y70 to Y9F (48 in total) are replaced with Y50 to Y7F (48 in total) in batch. 1) Click [Find/Replace] [Replace device]. 1) Click! 2) The Replace device dialog box appears. Click "Earlier device" and input "Y70" in the list box. 2) Enter! 3) Click "New device" and input "Y50" in the list box. 3) Enter! 4) Click "No. of substitute points" and set "48" in the spin box. 5) Click! 4) Set! 5) After the setting is completed, click the Replace button. (Before change) 0 4 13 17 X6 X1 Y70 X4 X6 M10 T1 Y74 Y74 X6 (After change) Y70 0 K1500 T0 4 BCD TO K4Y50 Y74 13 K30 T1 17 X6 X1 Y50 X4 X6 M10 T1 Y54 Y54 X6 Y50 K1500 T0 BCD TO K4Y50 Y54 K30 T1 6 - 13 6) Confirm that the target device numbers have been properly replaced. 6.5.2 Batch switching of specified devices between normally open and normally close Follow the procedure below to switch specified devices all at once between normally open and normally close. 1) Click [Find/Replace] contact] to select. [Change open/close 1) Click! 2) The Change open/close connect appears. Click "Device" and input "X4" in the list box. 2) Enter! 3) After the setting is completed, click the Replace all button. 3) Click! (Before change) 0 4 13 17 X6 X1 Y70 X4 X6 M10 T1 Y74 Y74 X6 (After change) Y70 0 K1500 T0 4 BCD TO K4Y50 Y74 13 K30 T1 17 X6 X1 Y70 X4 X6 M10 T1 Y74 Y74 X6 Y70 K1500 T0 4) Confirm that normally open have been switched to B contacts and vice versa. BCD TO K4Y50 Y74 K30 T1 NOTE Before exercising the contents in Section 6.6 after this section, be sure to store the program in a personal computer to a CPU. For how to write to a CPU, refer to Section 2.5. 6 - 14 6.6 Write During RUN This function allows programs to be written to CPUs that are currently running. Activate the CPU before proceeding with the procedure below. 1) Change the circuit! 1) Change the ladder. (In the example here, "X1" is changed to "X0".) 2) After the change is made, click "Convert" "Convert (Online change)". 2) Click! 3) The "Caution" ears. Read through the message, and click the Yes button if you agree with it. 3) Click! 4) The message saying "RUN write processing has completed" appears. Click the OK button. 4) Click NOTE Note that to execute the write during RUN operation, the PLC CPU and GX Developer must share an identical program before the modification. So, if it is not for sure that those two programs are identical, verify them before modifying with GX Developer and executing write during RUN. 6 - 15 6.7 Registering Devices Various devices, including ones in separate locations on the ladder, can be monitored all together in one screen. 1) Click [Online], [Monitor], and [Entry data monitor] sequentially. 1) Click! 2) The monitor screen for device registration appears. Click the Register devices button. 2) Click! 3) The Register device dialog box appears. Click "Device" and input "Y74" in the list box. 3) Set! 4) After the setting is completed, click the Register button. 4) Click 5) Click the box. 5) Click! (To next page) 6 - 16 Cancel button to close the dialog (From previous page) 6) Click the Start monitor button. 6) Click! 7) The Monitor status dialog box appears and the ON/OFF/Current value of the device is displayed. 7) Show! REMARK To remove registered devices, click the 6 - 17 Delete the device button. 6.8 Creating Comments Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QEX15 Program name MAIN The following is an example of a printed out ladder with comments and devices for which contacts are used. T0 a contact is in step 5 and 27. b contact is in step 30. 0.3S Timer Timer 0.6 S NO.1 Timer 0.6 S NO.1 0.3S Timer 0.9S Flicker Starts Operation Counts number of products 0.9S Flicker Counts number of products Counts number of products Counts number of products External display of flicker Timer 0.6 S NO.1 Timer 0.6 S NO.1 Activates trigger Performs reset Use a keyboard to input the above program or read it from a FD. 6 - 18 (1) Flowchart of creating comments Set the range of devices on which comments are attached* Read out a device on which comments are attached Create comments To attach comments to other devices Write the project to a floppy disk Read out the circuit with the comments and confirm it Printout the circuit with comments and devices for which contacts are used *: The above procedure must be taken to designate the device comment range and write it to a CPU. 6 - 19 (2) Creating comments 1) Double-click "Device comment" in the project list. 1) Double-click! 2) "COMMENT" and "MAIN" appear. Double-click "COMMENT" to display the COMMENT screen. 2) Double-click! 3) Enter a comment! 3) Click a desired comment area, and input desired character strings as shown on the left. (To next page) 6 - 20 (From previous page) 4) Enter! 5) Click! 4) Click "Device" and input "Y70" in the list box. Enter! 5) Click the Display button to display a comment list. In this list, the input device is shown at the top accompanied below by its following devices. 6) Click a desired comment area, and input desired character strings as shown on the left. 7) Enter! 8) Click! 7) Click "Device" and input "M1" in the list box. 9) Enter! 8) Click the Display button to display a comment list. In this list, the input device is shown at the top accompanied below by its following devices. 9) Click a desired comment area, and input desired character strings as shown on the left. (To next page) 6 - 21 (From previous page) 10) Enter! 11) Click! 10) Click "Device" and input "T0" in the list box. 12) Enter! T0 Timer 0.6S No.1 T1 0.3S timer 11) Click the Display button to display a comment list. In this list, the input device is shown at the top accompanied below by its following devices. T2 T3 T4 T5 12) Click a desired comment area, and input desired character strings as shown on the left. T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 13) Enter! 14) Click! 13) Click "Device" and input "C2" in the list box. 15) Enter! C2 14) Click the Display button to display a comment list. In this list, the input device is shown at the top accompanied below by its following devices. Count number of products C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 15) Click a desired comment area, and input desired character strings as shown on the left. C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 6 - 22 (3) Saving comments 1) Click [Project] [Save as] menu. 1) Click! 2) The Save the project with a new name dialog box appears. Click the Save button. 2) Click! 6 - 23 (4) Displaying a ladder with comments in GX Developer screens 1) Click [View] [Comment] menu. 1) Click! 2) Comments appear in the ladder screen. 0.3S Timer Timer 0. 6S NO.1 Timer 0. 6S NO.1 0.3S Timer 0.9S Flicker Starts Operation 0.9S Flicker Counts number of products Counts number of products 6 - 24 POINT In addition to device comments, a ladder screen can be displayed with statements (comments on ladder blocks) and notes (comments on outputs or instructions). Statement * Programs for counting number of products Note 0.9S Flicker * <Counts up to 1000 Counts number of products * <Display of number of products Counts number of products • Creating statements Click and then double-click a ladder block where comments are to be attached. The Enter line statements dialog box appears. Enter desired character strings, and then click the button. OK • Creating notes Click and then double-click an output or instruction where comments are to be attached. The Enter Note dialog box appears. Enter desired character strings, and then click the OK button. • There are two types of statements and notes; "Embedded" and "Separate". "Embedded" ...... The data of statements and notes is stored as a part of a program, so it is stored in a CPU used in a factory as well. Note, however, that this takes a lot of space in program memory of PLC CPUs. "Separate" ......... The data of statements and notes is stored not as a part of a program but separately in the peripheral device (personal computer). In this way, a program needs only one extra step at a location. This requires less space in program memory on PLC CPUs. Note, however, that after taking this way, changing programs at an FA site breaks consistency between programs of GX Developer on the peripheral device (personal computer) and PLC CPUs. 6 - 25 MEMO 6 - 26 CHAPTER 7 7.1 PROGRAMMING INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES Intelligent Function Module (1) Intelligent function module type On PLC CPUs (hereinafter referred to as QCPUs), some functions are not supported or are limited in use. Intelligent function modules support those functions instead of QCPUs. Therefore users need to select an intelligent function module that is appropriate for the purpose involved. QCPUs are compatible with QCPU-compatible intelligent function modules and AnS-compatible special function modules. The following list shows examples of the intelligent function modules. Table 7.1 Example of intelligent function module Number of I/O occupied points Name Analog-digital conversion module (Q64AD) Digital-analog conversion module (Q62DA) Functions Input module that converts 0 to 20mA 0 to 4000 (in standard resolution mode) 0 to ±10V 0 to ±4000 (in standard resolution mode) Output module that converts 0 to 4000 0 to 20mA (in standard resolution mode) 0 to ±4000 0 to ±10V (in standard resolution mode) 16 points 16 points Module current consumption 5VDC 0.63A 5VDC 0.33A 24VDC 0.12A (2) Using with CPUs An intelligent function module can be installed on any I/O slots on a main base unit and extension base unit. I/O slot number 4 2 3 0 1 Intelligent function module [Used No.] 16 points of X/Y80 to 8F, 16 points of X/Y90 to 9F Power QCPU supply Figure 7.1 Installation of intelligent function module REMARK To use AnS series I/O modules or special function modules, install them on QA1S65B or QA168B extension base unit. [Main base unit] [QA1S6 B Extension base unit] Use this extension base unit for mounting AnS series power supply modules, I/O modules, and special function modules. 7-1 7.2 Data Communication between Intelligent Function Modules and CPUs An intelligent function module and a CPU exchange mainly two formats of data. __________ Bit data Signals that use input Xs and output Ys ________ Word data 16-bit data or 32-bit data Internal configuration of intelligent function module QCPU Y, M, T, C, D, etc. Program Device memory X/Y Function CPU Input X Output Y (Bit data) External I/F (PLC CPU) Buffer memory Read data Write data (Word data) Figure 7.2 Internal configuration of intelligent function module 7.2.1 I/O signals to CPUs For exchanging signals of 1-bit between a QCPU and an intelligent function module, input Xs and output Ys are used. X/Y here does not mean external I/Os but symbols that are used in a sequence program to exclusively represent I/O signals of intelligent function modules. Also note that I/O numbers are assigned according to the slot where the intelligent function module is installed. [X] Xs in a sequence program represent signals Intelligent QCPU function module that are input to a QCPU by an intelligent X function module. These signals are READY signal X generated on an intelligent function module. X Note that the Xs are used as contacts in a X program. The followings are examples of the signals. (1) READY signal This signal notifies a QCPU that an intelligent function module started up Figure 7.3 X from intelligent function normally at power-on and is ready for operation. module (2) Comparison result This signal is used by high-speed counter modules. The modules compare an input count value with the set value to notify a QCPU the results of the comparison; larger (>), smaller (<) or match (=). [Y] Intelligent function module QCPU Output enable Write to user range Channel change Synchronous output Y Y Y Y Figure 7.4 Y from CPU 7-2 SETs, RSTs, or OUT-Ys represent output signals transmitted from a QCPU to an intelligent function module. These signals are generated on a QCPU. Note that they are used as coils or contacts in a program. (Ex.) D/A conversion modules output an enable instruction (output enable) before outputting analog values that were converted from digital values. 7.2.2 Data communication with intelligent function modules Data is transmitted or received in 16-bit or 32-bit units. Intelligent function modules have buffer memory to store those data. Buffer memory address Intelligent function module 0 1 2 3 to 10 11 12 QCPU Read Buffer memory Data Write D/A conversion enable/disable CH.1 Digital value CH.2 Digital value Readable and writable by QCPU System area (Not used) CH.1 Set value check code CH.2 Set value check code .... Example of memory map: Q62DA Digital/Analog Conversion Module Figure 7.5 Buffer memory (1) QCPUs can read and write buffer memory. Also note that some modules can write data to buffer memory from peripheral devices via an interface. (2) In buffer memory, space of one word (16 bits) is reserved for each intelligent function module’s unique address. The smallest address is 0, and these addresses are used to specify a target module to read or write. The minimum unit is one word. 17- to 32-bit data is treated as 2-word (32-bit) data. B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Data part Sign bit 1: Negative 0: Positive Indicated here is + 276. (Negative digital values are represented in complement of 2) Figure 7.6 Example image of buffer memory content (D/A conversion module) The buffer memory on Figure 7.6 shows an address of a D/A conversion module in 16 bits. The number is obtained from digital quantity that a QCPU wrote to the buffer memory. Digital values ranging from - 2048 to + 2047 can be set in signed binary (16 bits long). (3) Buffer memory is a RAM. 7-3 7.3 7.3.1 Communicating with Intelligent Function Modules Communication methods with intelligent function modules QCPUs provide the following methods for communicating with intelligent function modules. Table 7.2 Type of communication with intelligent function modules Communication method Initial setting, Automatic refresh setting Functions Setting method Performs initial settings and automatic refresh settings of intelligent function modules. These settings allow writing/reading data to/from intelligent function modules regardless of communication program creation or buffer memory address. Ex.) When A/D conversion module Q64AD is used. •Initial setting : •A/D conversion enable/disable setting •Sampling/averaging processing designation •Time average/number of times average designation •Average time/average number of times designation (Set data in initial settings is stored to the intelligent function module.) •Automatic refresh setting : Set a device on a QCPU to store the following data to. •Digital output from Q64AD •Max./min. value of Q64AD •Error code (Set data in automatic refresh settings is stored to the intelligent function module parameter on a QCPU.) Use GX Configurator compatible with the intelligent function module. Device initial value Writes set data in device initial settings of intelligent function modules to the intelligent function modules at the following timings. •At power-on of a QCPU •At reset •At switch from STOP to RUN FROM/TO instruction Executes data read/write to buffer memory on an intelligent function module. Intelligent function module device (U G ) Directly treats buffer memory on an intelligent function module as a device of a QCPU. Unlike "FROM/TO instruction", this requires only one instruction for processing data that is read from an intelligent function module. Specify as a device in a sequence program. Dedicated instructions used to simplify programming for using the functions of intelligent function modules Use this instruction in a sequence program. Intelligent function module dedicated instruction 7-4 Use GX Developer to specify the range for intelligent function module devices (U G ). Use this instruction in a sequence program. 7.3.2 Using GX Configurator for communication This section describes the procedure of using GX Configurator for communication with intelligent function modules. In the example operation below, Q64AD module/SW D5C-QADU is used. Start Install a module Install an A/D conversion module on a specified slot. Wiring Connect external devices to an A/D conversion module. Switch settings for intelligent function module Use GX Developer for this setting. Use the default setting range Use the user range settings? Use the user range Offset/gain setting Offset/gain settings are necessary to use the user range settings. NO Use GX Configurator? YES Initial setting, automatic refresh setting Use GX Configurator to simplify programs. Programming, debug Create and check sequence programs. 7-5 7.3.3 Data created by GX Configurator The following data/files can be created with the GX Configurator package and also used in GX Developer. Refer to the following figure to know in which operation each data/file is needed. QCPU GX Developer/QADU Q25HCPU Project MODE. RUN. ERR. A Project 1) Read/ save USER. BAT. BOOT. Disk 3) Write A 2) A Read/ save Personal computer USB B RS-232 A: Shows intelligent function module parameters B: Shows data stored at text file creation. <Parameter of intelligent function module> (a) This parameter data is created in the auto refresh settings and stored to the intelligent function module parameter file in a GX Developer-created project. Project Program Parameter PLC parameter Network parameter Intelligent function module parameter (b) For how to perform 1) to 3) on the above figure, refer to the followings. 1) Use GX Developer as follows. [Project] [Open project]/[Save]/[Save as] 2) Open the GX Configurator’s screen for selecting a module on which parameter settings are to be made. [File] [Open file]/[Save as] 3) Use GX Developer as follows. [Online] [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC] "Intelligent function module parameters" Or, open the GX Configurator’s screen for selecting a module on which parameter settings are to be made. [Online] [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC] <Text files> (a) These files are text format files created using Text file creation operation in the initial settings, auto refresh settings and the monitor/test screen. Use these files to create user’s documents. 7-6 7.4 Exercise System of Intelligent Function Module Use an A/D or D/A conversion module to convert analog signals/digital data that are input with the volume or digital switch on the demonstration machine. D/A conversion module A/D conversion module Q61P -A1 QX QY Q64 Q62 42P AD DA QCPU QCPU* 42 (No.1) (No.2) (64 (64 (16 (16 points) points) points) points) X0 to X3F Y40 X/Y80 X/Y90 to to to Y7F X/Y8F X/Y9F (Channel 1) V * Not used in this document (Keep them at stop) (Channel 1) V (Input D/A output value) (A/D conversion value (Value to be D/A converted is displayed) is displayed) I/O panel Digital display Digital display (Y5F to Y50) (Y4F to Y40) Digital switch (X2F to X20) 1 4 0 2 Voltmeter for input voltage Voltmeter for output voltage Input volume 7-7 7.5 7.5.1 Q64AD Analog/Digital Conversion Module Names of parts Part names of Q64AD are given below together with descriptions. For details, refer to the User’s Manual. Q64AD Q64AD 1) RUN 2) ERROR V+ V- C H 1 I+ SLD V+ V- C H 2 I+ SLD V+ V- C H 3 I+ SLD V+ V- C H 4 I+ SLD A.G. (FG) A/D 0-±10V 0-20mA No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name and Descriptions appearance Indicates operation status of an A/D conversion module. ON: 1) RUN LED In normal operation Flicker: In offset/gain setting mode OFF: 5V power failure or watchdog timer error occurred Indicates errors and status of an A/D conversion module. 2) ERROR LED ON: Error occurred OFF: In normal operation Flicker: Switch settings error occurred Values other than 0 has been set to the switch 5 on an intelligent function module. 7-8 A/D conversion characteristics (1) A/D conversion characteristics on voltage inputs (when in a standard resolution mode with analog input range set to –10 to 10V) 2004 2003 - 4000 - 10V 0 2001 2000 5.0000V 0 2002 10V 2.5mV 5.0025V Digital output Digital output value 4000 Input voltage Analog input voltage Figure 7.12 A/D conversion characteristics (voltage input) Analog-digital conversion modules convert analog values input from other devices to digital quantity so that CPUs can operate those values. On voltage inputs, for example, they convert - 10V to digital quantity of – 4000 and 10V to 4000. This means that the modules convert input voltage of 2.5mV to digital quantity of 1, and abandon values smaller than 2.5mV. (2) A/D conversion characteristics on current inputs (when in a standard resolution mode with analog input range set to 0 to 20mA) - 4000 - 20mA 0 20mA 5 A 10.005mA 0 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000 10.000mA Digital output 4000 Digital output value 7.5.2 Input current Analog input current Figure 7.13 A/D conversion characteristics (current input) The modules convert current input of 0mA to 0 for output, and 20mA to 4000. This means that the modules convert input current of 5μA to digital quantity of 1, and abandon values smaller than 5μA. REMARK A voltage/current value (max. resolution) that becomes digital value of 1 through A/D conversion differs depending on the settings of the resolution mode (1/4000, 1/20000, 1/60000) or the output range. 7-9 7.5.3 Intelligent function module switch settings Q series uses the I/O assignment settings of GX Developer to configure the switch settings for intelligent function modules. The intelligent function module switch settings provide switch 1 to 5, and use 16-bitdata. When the intelligent function module switch settings are not configured, values of switch 1 to 5 are set to, which is 0. (1) Setting items for module switches Setting items Input range setting Analog output range Setting value for output range 4 to 20mA 0H 0 to 20mA 1H 1 to 5V 2H 0 to 5V 3H Switch 1 H CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Input range setting -10 to 10V 4H 0 to 10V 5H User range setting FH Switch 2 H CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 Switch 3 Vacant Switch 4 H 00H : Temperature drift compensation 01 - FFH : No temperature drift compensation 0H : Standard resolution mode 1 - FH : High resolution mode : Standard mode (A/D conversion) 0H : Offset/gain setting mode 1 - FH Switch 5 fixed to 0 REMARK The settings for the offset/gain setting mode differ between the function version A and function version B. Explanations in this section are made based on the function version B. For details, refer to the User’s Manual. 7 - 10 (2) Setting module switches The demonstration machine incorporates two CPUs, so it is necessary to perform the parameter settings for multi-CPU system. (if there is only one CPU incorporated, the parameter settings mentioned is not required.) For how to perform the parameter setting, refer to the multi-CPU setting of parameters in Section 3.2. 1) Click the "I/O assignment" tab in the PLC parameter settings. 1) Click! 2) Set! 3) Click! 2) Perform I/O assignment on the slot "3(*-3)" where Q64AD is installed. Type: "Intelli" (required) Model name: "Q64AD" Points: "16points" StartXY: "80" (Hexadecimal) 3) Click the Switch setting button. The Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module dialog box appears. 4) The following is an example of the intelligent function module switch settings of Q64AD. The default value of each switch is "0". Switch 4) Enter! 5) Click! Set Value Item Description of setting 1 3 Input range CH1: 0 to 5V 2 (Do not input) Input range Default value 3 (Do not input) Vacant Default value 4 (Do not input) (Drift compensation mode selection) Default value 5 (Do not input) fixed to 0 Default value 5) Click the End button. 6) Click the End button on the Qn(H) Parameter dialog box to terminate the intelligent function switch settings. 6) Click! 7 - 11 7.5.4 Setting with GX Configurator 1) Activate GX Developer, and click [Tools], [Intelligent function utility], and [Start] sequentially. 1) Click! 2) GX Configurator starts up. Perform the settings of the A/D conversion module as follows. Start I/O No.: "80" Module type: "A/D Conversion Module" Module model name: "Q64AD" 3) Click the Initial setting button. 2) Set! 3) Click! 4) The Initial setting screen appears. In the following example, A/D conversion enable/disable settings from CH2 to CH4 are set to "Disable". (this means using only CH1) 5) Click the End setup button. 4) Set! 5) Click! 6) Click! 6) Click the (To next page) 7 - 12 Auto refresh button in GX Configurator. (From previous page) 7) Set "D10" in the PLC side Device area on the "CH1 Digital output values" row of Setting item. 8) Click the End setup button. 7) Set! 8) Click! 9) Confirm that "Available" is set in the Initial setting and Auto refresh column of Q64AD. 9) Confirm! 10) After the setting is completed, click [Intelligent function module parameter] and then click [Save parameter]. 11) Click the 10) Click! 11) Click! 7 - 13 Exit button. 7.5.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine (1) Sequence program The sequence program performs a sampling processing on analog voltages input to Q64AD from CH1, and then converts the analog values to digital values. Path name A: SCHOOL Project name Q64AD Program name MAIN AD module READY AD conversion complete flag 0 X3 X80 X8E >= D10 K0 BCD D10 K4Y50 Displays digital conversion value of CH2 on LED END 9 X80: Module READY signal X8E: A/D conversion complete flag At power-on or reset of a PLC CPU, this flag turns on if A/D conversion is ready to be executed. A/D conversion is executed once this flag turned on. (2) Operation of the demonstration machine on the toolbar. Stop the CPU and click The Write to PLC dialog box opens. Click the Param + Prog button and then click the Execute button to write to a CPU. After that, activate a CPU and confirm the following items. Write only the parameter settings to a second CPU in the same way. (This is not necessary if there is only one CPU incorporated.) For how to how to write parameters to a second CPU, refer to Section 2.6. 1) Turn on X3, and change input voltages for an A/D conversion module by the volume on the demonstration machine. Analog values that were input to channel 1(CH1) on Q64AD are stored to buffer memory (in digital value). With the automatic refresh settings, a QCPU reads the stored digital values and stores them in its data register D10. 2) Whenever an analog value is smaller than "-1", 0 is set. 3) Analog-to-digital converted values appear on the digital display (Y50 to Y5F). 7 - 14 7.6 7.6.1 Q62DA Digital/Analog Conversion Module Names of parts Part names of Q62DA are given below together with descriptions. For details, refer to the User’s Manual. Q62DA Q62DA 1) RUN 2) ERROR V+ C COM H I+ 1 V+ C COM H 2 I+ IN 24VDC 3) (FG) D/A 0-±10V 0-20mA No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name and appearance Description Indicates operation status of a D/A conversion module. ON: 1) In normal operation Flicker: In offset/gain setting mode 5V power failure or watchdog timer error occurred RUN LED OFF: Indicates errors and status of an D/A conversion module. 2) ERROR LED ON: Error occurred OFF: In normal operation Flicker: Switch settings error occurred Values other than 0 has been set to the switch 5 on an intelligent function module. 3) External power supply A terminal for connecting 24VDC external power supply terminal 7 - 15 D/A conversion characteristics (1) D/A conversion characteristics on voltage outputs (when in a standard resolution mode with analog output range set to –10 to 10V) 0 - 10V - 4000 4000 0 Analog output voltage Analog output voltage 10V 5.0025V 5.0000V 2.5mV 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 Digital input Digital input value Figure 7.14 D/A conversion characteristics (current output) Digital/analog conversion modules convert digital quantity that is input from a QCPU to analog values, and then output it to exterior. For example, the modules convert digital quantity of -4000 to analog quantity of -10V and 4000 to 10V before output. This means that the modules convert the digital input value of 1 to analog quantity of 2.5mA, and abandon digital input values in decimal places. (2) D/A conversion characteristics on current outputs (when in a standard resolution mode with analog output range set to 0 to 20mA) 0 -20mA -4000 0 Digital input value 4000 Analog output current 20mA Analog output current 7.6.2 10.005mA 5 A 10.000mA 2000 2001 2002 2003 Input Figure 7.15 D/A conversion characteristics (current output) For current outputs, the modules convert 0 to 0mA and 4,000 to 20mA. This means that the modules convert the digital input value of 1 to analog quantity of 5μA, and abandon digital input values in decimal places. REMARK A voltage/current value (max. resolution) that becomes digital value of 1 through D/A conversion differs depending on the settings of the resolution mode (1/4000, 1/20000, 1/60000) or the output range. 7 - 16 7.6.3 Intelligent function module switch settings (1) Setting items for module switches Setting items Input range setting Switch 1 Analog output range Setting value for output range 4 to 20mA 0H H CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Input range setting Switch 2 H 0 to 20mA 1H 1 to 5V 2H 0 to 5V 3H -10 to 10V 4H User range setting FH CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 Switch 3 H CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 HOLD/CLEAR function setting 0H : CLEAR 1 to FH HOLD Switch 4 H 0H 01-FFH 0H 1-FH 0H 1-FH Switch 5 :Standard mode (Asynchronous) :Synchronous output mode :Standard resolution mode :High resolution mode :Standard mode (D/A conversion) :Offset/gain setting mode Fixed to 0 REMARK The settings for the offset/gain setting mode differ between the function version A and function version B. Explanations in this section are made based on the function version B. For details, refer to the User’s Manual. 7 - 17 (2) Setting module switches The demonstration machine incorporates two CPUs, so it is necessary to perform the parameter settings for multi-CPU system. (if there is only one CPU incorporated, the parameter settings mentioned is not required.) For how to perform the parameter setting, refer to the multi-CPU setting of parameters in Section 3.2. 1) Click the "I/O assignment" tab in the PLC parameter settings. 1) Click! 2) Set! 3) Click! 2) Perform I/O assignment on the slot "4(*-4)" on which Q62DA is installed. Type: "Intelli" (required) Model name: "Q62DA" Points: "16points" StartXY: "90" (Hexadecimal) 3) Click the Switch setting button. The Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module dialog box appears. 4) The following is an example of the intelligent function module switch settings of Q62DA. The default value of each switch is "0". Switch 4) Enter! 5) Click! Description of setting Set Value Item 1 3 Output range CH1: 0 to 5V 2 (Do not input) Vacant Default value 3 (Do not input) HOLD/CLEAR Default value 4 (Synchronous/asynchronous Default value (Do not input) mode selection) 5 (Do not input) fixed to 0 Default value 5) Click the End button. 6) Click the End button on the Qn(H) Parameter dialog box to terminate the intelligent function module switch settings. 6) Click! 7 - 18 7.6.4 Setting with GX Configurator 1) Activate GX Developer, and click [Tools], [Intelligent function utility], and [Start] sequentially. 1) Click! 2) Set D/A conversion module as follows. Start I/O No.: "90" Module type: "D/A Conversion Module" Module model name: "Q62DA" After the settings are completed, click the Initial setting button. 2) Set! 3) In the following example, "CH1 D/A conversion enable/disable setting" is set to "Enable" . (this means using only CH1) After the setting is completed, click the End button. 3) Set! 4) Click the 4) Click Auto refresh button in GX Configurator. 5) Set "D30" in the PLC side Device area on the "CH1 Digital output value" row of Setting item. After the setting is completed, click the End setup button. 5) Set! (To next page) 7 - 19 (From previous page) 6) Confirm that "Available" is set in the Initial setting and Auto refresh column of Q62DA. 6) Confirm! 7) After the setting is completed, click [Intelligent function module parameter] and then click [Save parameter]. 8) Click the 7) Click! 8) Click! 7 - 20 Exit button. 7.6.5 Exercise with the demonstration machine (1) Sequence program The sequence program converts values of the digital switches to analog signals. 0 2 X2 X90 DA module READY Path name A: SCHOOL Project name Q62DA Program name MAIN Y91 > K4X20 H4000 <= K4X20 H4000 >= K4X20 H0 D/A CH1 output enable MOV K4000 D30 Set values exceeding 4,000 are treated as 4,000. BIN K4X20 D30 Read the digital switch value (D30). BCD D30 K4Y40 Displays D30 value on the digital display (Y40 to Y4F). END 23 X90: Module READY signal At power-on or reset of a PLC CPU, this signal turns on if D/A conversion is ready to be executed. D/A conversion is executed once this signal turned on. Y91: CH.1 output enable/disable flag Turning this flag on or off selects on each channel whether to output D/A converted values or offset values. ON: D/A converted value OFF: Offset value (2) Operation of the demonstration machine Stop the CPU and click on the toolbar. The Write to PLC dialog box opens. Click the Param + Prog button and then click the Execute button to write to a CPU. After that, activate a CPU and confirm the following items. Write only the parameter settings to a second CPU in the same way. (This is not necessary if there is only one CPU incorporated.) For how to write parameters to second CPU, refer to Section 2.6. 1) 2) 3) Turn on X2 to enable D/A CH1 outputs. Convert digital values set in the digital switches (X20 to X2F) to analog values. Whenever the set value of the digital switch is outside the range of 0≤X≤4000, 4000 is D/A converted to be output. The digital value to be converted to an analog value appears on the digital display (Y40 to 4F). The D/A OUTPUT voltmeter displays the voltage value that the D/A conversion module outputs. 7 - 21 MEMO 7 - 22 CHAPTER 8 USING THE LOGIC TEST FUNCTION (GX SIMULATOR) Offline debugging is possible by adding the logic test function (GX Simulator) to a computer in which GX Developer is installed. With the logic test function (GX Simulator), which allows sequence programs to be developed and debugged on a single computer, checking a modified sequence program is easier and quicker. With the logic test function (GX Simulator) substituting a PLC CPU, ladder monitoring, device tests, etc. can be performed without a PLC CPU. (1) Functions supported by the logic test function (GX Simulator) The functions supported by the logic test function (GX Simulator) include functions executed from the logic test function (GX Simulator) menu and functions executed from the GX Developer menu. For functions from the GX Developer menu, it is necessary to use them together with the logic test function (GX Simulator). Functions Ladder monitor, Device monitor Device test Functions executed from the GX Developer menu Write to PLC PLC diagnostics Skip execution the logic test function (GX Simulator) menu Forcibly rewrites device values of the logic test function (GX Simulator) during monitoring. Writes parameter files and program files to the logic test function (GX Simulator). Checks the logic test function (GX Simulator) status and errors. Skips (does not execute) program execution in the range between two designated steps. Executes the part of the program in a designated step or pointer range. Step execution Executes the sequence program one step at a time. Remote operation Operates the logic test function (GX Simulator) execution status. Monitor test executed from Monitors the operation status of the logic test function (GX Simulator). Partial execution Program monitor list Functions Meaning Monitors the program execution status and number of executions as a table, and starts and stops the program execution in the table. Conducts testing by monitoring the device memory status, forcing the devices ON/OFF, and changing present values. I/O system settings Simulates the operation of external devices by simple settings. Tools Saves and reads the device memory and buffer memory. Function equivalent to Issues a WDT error if a sequence program is written in such a way that it WDT runs an infinite loop. Error detail display function Displays detailed error information at occurrence of an error. Unsupported instruction Lists the instructions which are not supported by the logic test function list display function (GX Simulator) if they are included in a sequence program. 8-1 8.1 Operating Procedure of Logic Test Function (GX Simulator) This section describes how to use the logic test function (GX Simulator) for debugging. Exercise this function with the program Project name QLLT . 1) Confirm that the project is open, and then click button. the 1) Click! 2) The logic test function (GX Simulator) starts up. Once the logic test function (GX Simulator) has started up, the parameter and program is automatically written to the logic test function (GX Simulator). (This is equivalent to the write to PLC function.) 2) The logic test function (GX Simulator) starts up! 3) Click the window of GX Developer to activate it (select it). The selected screen in Windows switches from GX Simulator to GX Developer. 3) Click to activate! (To next page) 8-2 (From previous page) 4) Ladder monitoring is executed without a PLC connected (with a PLC in an offline state). 5) Use the logic test function (GX Simulator) to monitor devices, change device values freely, simulate how I/O modules and special modules behave, etc. 5) Use the logic test function (GX Simulator)! Note that if you changed a sequence program according to debug results and intend to use the logic test function (GX Simulator) to do another debug, you need to stop the logic test function (GX Simulator) first and click the button, and then write the sequence program again. 6) After the debug is completed, click the button to terminate the logic test function (GX Simulator). 6) Click! When monitoring is in operation, terminate the monitor mode before terminating the logic test function (GX Simulator). 8-3 8.2 Monitoring Device Status and Testing Devices This section describes how to monitor device status, turn bit devices on/off forcibly, change word device values, etc. Exercise this function with the program Project name QLLT . (1) Turning bit devices on or off forcibly In the example operation below, bit device "X" is monitored and "X0" is forcibly turned on. 1) On the logic test function (GX Simulator) [Monitor Function] window, click [Start] [Device Memory Monitor] menu. 1) Click! 2) Check the Host Station and click the OK button on the Transfer setup window. 2) Click! 3) Set! 3) Set X0 in the Device column on the Device Memory Monitor window. 4) Click the Start monitor button. 5) Status of bit device "X0" is displayed. Monitor the status of "X0" in this window. 4) Click! 5) Monitor screen for "X0" is displayed! (To next page) 8-4 (From previous page) 6) Double-click a device No. you wish to turn on/off forcibly. (In this example, "X0" is double-clicked.) 6) Double click! 7) Set X0 in the Device column of the Bit device column on the Device write window. 7) Set! 8) Click the Force ON button. 1) Click! 9) Reflected! 9) The result of the device being turned on is reflected on the ladder monitoring display. Click the Force OFF button on the Device write window to turn the device off. 8-5 (2) Changing word device values In the example operation below, word device "C (current value)" is monitored and "C0" is changed to "5". 1) On the logic test function (GX Simulator) window, click [Start] [Monitor Function] [Device Memory Monitor] menu. 1) Click! 2) Check the Host Station and click the OK button on the Transfer setup window. 2) Click! 3) Set! 3) Set C0 in the Device column on the Device Memory Monitor window. 4) Click the 4) Click! (To next page) 8-6 Start monitor button. (From previous page) 5) Status of bit device "C(current value)" is displayed. Monitor the status of "C(current value)" in this window. 5) Monitor screen for "C(current value)" is displayed! Note that the change on the value of "C0" is visibly recognizable in the logic test function (GX Simulator) window and ladder monitoring screen. 6) Double-click! 6) Double-click the device No. to change its device value. (In this example, "C0" is double-clicked.) 7) Enter a value in the Setting value column of the Word device/Buffer memory column on the Device write window. 8) Click the Set button. 7) "5" is set! 8) Click! 9) The result of the device value being set to "5" is reflected on the ladder monitoring display. 9) Reflected! 8-7 8.3 I/O System Settings Function The I/O system settings function allows GX Simulator to simulate how external devices behave. The following two setting methods are available for performing I/O system settings. • Device value input: Specifies a device value that is to be set the set time after the conditions are fulfilled. • Timing chart input: Sets a timing chart that is followed once the conditions are fulfilled. Use the following example for exercise. <<Example program>> 0 X0 Project name QLLT X1 Y70 Y70 4 6 11 M0 Y71 K9999 C0 SM412 SM400 MOV C0 K4Y80 END 14 <<Signal timing>> M0 X0 X1 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 T [Time unit: 10ms] <<Operations to simulate>> (1) The lamp Y71 on the demonstration machine lights when M0 turns on during the device test by GX Developer. (2) An exterior person confirms the lamp Y71 lighting, turns on X0, and then turns it off. (T = 200) (T = 400) (3) Confirm that the self-maintaining ladder in the sequence program is in operation, and then turn on X1 to reset the maintaining status. After that, turn off X1 again. (T = 600) (T = 800) (4) Turn off M0. (T = 1000) In the example operation below, settings listed in the following table are made. Signal name Setting method M0 Device value input X0, X1 Timing chart input 8-8 8.3.1 Device value input In the example operation below, a simulation where M0 turns off 10 s after M0 turns on is set. 1) Click [Start] and then [I/O System Settings] in the window of the logic test function (GX Simulator). 1) Click! 2) Double-click "Device Value Input (No.1-No.25)" in the I/O System Settings tree. 2) Double-click! 3) Click the upper button in the No.1 area. 3) Click! 4) Set Device Name (M), Device Number (0), and Select ON/OFF (ON). 4) Set! 5) Click the 5) Click! (To next page) 8-9 OK button. (From previous page) 6) The set contents are displayed. Note that this can be set by directly typing "M0=ON" on a keyboard. 6) Set content is displayed! 7) Enter "1000" (10 s) in the text box of "Time". 7) Enter! 8) Click the upper button in the Input No. area. 8) Click! 9) Set Device Name (M) and Device Number (0). 9) Set! 10) Click the Add 11) Click the OK button. button. 10) Click! 11) Click! 12) The set contents are displayed. 12) Set content is displayed! Note that this can be set by directly typing "M0" on a keyboard. 13) Click the "OFF" radio button. 13) Click! 14) Check! 14) Click the Enable checkbox to enable the settings. 8 - 10 8.3.2 Timing chart value input In the example operation below, the following simulation is set. X0 turns ON 2 s later, and turns OFF 4 s later. M0 turns ON X1 turns ON 6 s later, and turns OFF 8 s later 1) Click [Start] and then [I/O System Settings] in the window of the logic test function (GX Simulator). 1) Click! 2) Double-click "Timing Chart Input" in the I/O System Settings tree. 2) Double-click! 3) Click the upper button in the No. area. 3) Click! 4) Set Device Name (M), Device Number (0), and Select ON/OFF (ON). 4) Set! 5) Click the OK button. 5) Click! 6) The set contents are displayed. Note that this can be set by directly typing "M0=ON" on a keyboard. 6) Set content is displayed! (To next page) 8 - 11 (From previous page) 7) Click the Edit-Timing Chart Format button. The Timing Chart Format Input dialog box appears. 7) Click! 8) Click [Device] and then click [Enter Device]. 8) Click! 9) Set Device Name (X) and Device Number (1). 10) Click the "OFF" radio button. 11) Click the Enter button. X1 is registered. 12) Follow the procedures 9) to 11) again to register "X0" (default: OFF). 13) Click the Close button. 9) Set! 10) Click! 11) Click! 13) Click! 14) The registered device is displayed. 14) The registered device is displayed! 15) Click the button to display 20th scan. 16) Click 20th scan of the X0 line to specify it. 17) Click! 17) Click , or click [Edit], [Bit Device], and [Device ON] sequentially. 16) Click! 15) Click! (To next page) 8 - 12 (From previous page) 18) The timing at which X0 turns on is set. 18) When to turn on is set! 19) Click the button to display 40th scan. 20) Click 40th scan of the X0 line to specify it. 21) Click , or click [Edit], [Bit Device], and [Device OFF] sequentially. 20) Click! 21) Click! 19) Click! 22) The timing at which X0 turns off is set. 23) Click 60th scan of the X1 line to specify it. 24) Click , or click [Edit], [Bit Device], and [Device ON] sequentially to set the timing at which X1 turns ON. 23) Click! 22) Click! (To next page) 8 - 13 (From previous page) 25) Click the button to display 80th scan. 26) Click 80th scan of the X1 line to specify it. 27) Click! 27) Click , or click [Edit], [Bit Device], and [Device OFF] sequentially to set the timing at which X1 turns off. 26) Click! 28) Click! 25) Click! 28) Click the OK button. 29) The set timing chart is displayed in green. 30) Click the Enable checkbox to enable the settings. 29) Displayed in green! 30) Check! 31) After the settings are complete, click [File] and then [Save as] to save the I/O system settings. 31) Click! 32) Enter a file name. "A: SCHOOL LLT LLT.LIM" is entered here as an example. 32) Enter a file name! 33) Click! 33) Click the 8 - 14 Open button. 8.3.3 Executing the I/O system settings 1) Click on the icon line of the I/O SYSTEM SETTINGS dialog box or click [File] and [Execute I/O System Settings] sequentially. 1) Click! 2) Click the OK button. 3) Click the OK button. 2) Click! 3) Click! 4) Click the window. 4) Click (To next page) 8 - 15 button in the GX Developer (From previous page) 7) Enter! 7) Enter "M0". 8) Click! 9) Click! 8) Click the FORCE ON 9) Click the Close button. button. 10) The simulation set in the I/O system settings starts. To do this, refer to <<Signal timing>> at the beginning of Section 8.3. (1) X0 turns on 2 s after M0 turned ON. X0 turns off 4 s after M0 turned ON. (While X0 is ON, the self-maintaining ladder operates and Y70 stays ON.) Self-maintaining circuit (1) Turns on 2 seconds after M0 turned on Turns off 4 seconds after M0 turned on (2) X1 turns ON 6 s after M0 turned on. X1 turns OFF 8 s after M0 turned on. Y70 turns on (While X1 is ON, Y70 in the self-maintaining ladder stays OFF.) Bit device output Self-maintaining circuit (3) M0 turns OFF 5 s after it turned ON. (2) Turns on 6 seconds after M0 turned on Turns off 8 seconds after M0 turned on Bit device output Y70 turns off Self-maintaining circuit Bit device output (3) Turns off 10 seconds after M0 turned on REFERENCE The logic test function (GX Simulator) takes 100ms to execute one scan. Time taken for one scan is the set time for constant scan. (Default is set to 100ms.) This is designed to operate user-created sequence programs equally regardless of the performance of personal computers. To change the default time of 100ms, configure the parameter setting in GX Developer and set any value as time for constant scan. (QCPU must be operating to do this.) 8 - 16 CHAPTER 9 9.1 MAINTENANCE Typical Troubles The following bar graph shows the ratio of faulty parts and causes of PLC errors. [Source: Inspection made by JEMA (The Japan Electrical Manufacture’s Association)] Figure 9.1 Faulty parts on PLCs (multiple answers allowed) (%) 80 Collected from 223 factories 73.1 60 40 34.1 20.6 20 19.3 14.3 9.4 2.7 0 I/O Power supply CPU Peripheral Commudevices nication Memory Other 0.9 No answer Figure 9.2 Causes of PLC faults (multiple answers allowed) (%) 50 40 Collected from 223 factories 40.4 30 26.0 24.7 24.2 19.3 20 12.6 12.1 10 6.3 1.3 0 Unknown cause Noise Short of load No Vibration Manufacture Other Poor Incorrect shock answer connection programming 9-1 Maintenance To keep PLCs in the best operating condition, conduct the following daily inspection and periodic inspection. (1) Daily inspection The items that must be inspected daily are listed in table 9.1. Table 9.1 Daily inspection Item Inspection item 1 Installation of base unit 2 Installation of I/O module 3 4 Connecting conditions Module indication LED 9.2 Inspection Check that fixing screws are not loose and the cover is not dislocated. Check that the module is not dislocated and the unit fixing hook is engaged securely. Judgment criterion Remedy The module fixing hook must be engaged and Retighten the screws. installed securely. The module fixing hook Securely engage the must be engaged and unit fixing hook. Or installed securely. tighten with the screw. Check for loose terminal screws. Screws should not be loose. Retighten the terminal screws. Check for distance between solderless terminals. The proper clearance should be provided between Solderless terminals. Correct. Check the connector part of the cable. Connections should no be loose. Retighten the connector fixing screws. Power supply Check that the LED is module "POWER" ON. LED*1 The LED must be ON. (Abnormal if the LED is OFF) CPU module "RUN" LED Check that the LED is ON in RUN status. The LED must be ON. (Abnormal if the LED is OFF) CPU "ERROR" LED Check that the LED is OFF. The LED must be Off. (Abnormal if the LED is ON or flickering.) CPU module "BAT.ARM" LED Check that the LED is OFF. The LED must be Off. (Abnormal if the LED is ON) Check that the LED turns ON and OFF. The LED must be ON when the input power is turned ON. The LED must be extinguished when the Refer to QCPU (Q mode) User’s Manual input power is turned OFF. (Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above.) Check that the LED turns ON and OFF. The LED must be ON when the input power is turned ON. The LED must be extinguished when the input power is turned OFF. (Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above.) Input LED Output LED 9-2 (2) Periodic inspection The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed below. Also perform this inspection when following changes are made; the equipment is moved or modified, layout of the wiring is changed, the power supply module is changed, etc. Table 9.2 Periodic Inspection 3 4 5 Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Ambience Power voltage Installation 2 Connection 1 Inspection item Ambient environment Item Looseness, rattling Inspection Judgment criterion Remedy When the sequencer is 0 to 55 °C Measure with a used in the board, the thermometer and a ambient temperature in 5 to 95%RH*1 hygrometer. the board becomes the Corrosive gas must not Measure corrosive gas. ambient temperature. be present. Measure a voltage across the terminals of 100/200VAC and 24VDC. Move the module to check for looseness and rattling. Adhesion of dirt Check visually. and foreign matter 85 to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC Change the power supply. The module must be installed fixedly. Retighten the screws. If the CPU, I/O, or power supply module is loose, fix it with screws. Dirt and foreign matter must not be present. Remove and clean. Looseness of terminal screws. Try to further tighten screws with a screwdriver. Screws must not be loose. Retighten the terminal screws. Proximity of solderless terminals to each other. Check visually. Solderless terminals must be positioned at proper intervals. Correct. Looseness of connectors Check visually. Screws must not be loose. Retighten the connector fixing screws. Check on the monitor mode of the GX Developer that M51 or SM52 is turned OFF. (Preventive maintenance) Even if the lowering of a battery capacity is not shown, replace the battery with a new one if a specified service life of the battery is exceeded. Install the product on and the actual PLC. Operation must meet the specifications. Use the normal product on the actual PLC as a spare product. Battery Spare product 6 7 Check on stored program Compare the stored program with the running program. The two programs must Correct if there are be identical. differences. 8 Fan (heat exchanger) filter Rotational status Rotational sound Clogging Rotation must be without sounds or clogging. Exchange and clean if any abnormality is found. Analog I/O Check the offset/gain value. The value must be identical with the specifications (design value). Correct if there are differences. 9 *1: When AnS Series Module is included in the system, the judgment criteria will be from 10 to 90 % RH. 9.3 Consumable Products Backup batteries on PLCs are consumable products. 9-3 Service Life of Output Relay The relays of modules relaying on contacts to output are subject to consumption due to the switching operation. When a relay that is directly mounted on the print board of an output module is consumed, it is necessary to replace the output module itself. 1000 500 200 100 Limit number of switching (unit: 10,000) 9.4 50 20 10 DC30V t=0ms 5 DC100V t=7ms AC100V COS φ =0.7 AC200V COS φ =0.7 AC100V COS φ =0.35 DC24V t=7ms 2 1 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 Switching current (unit: A) AC200V COS φ =0.35 5 Figure 9.3 Life characteristics of output relay's contact 9-4 10 9.5 Spare Products Alternative products are easily purchased through the Mitsubishi service centers or local Mitsubishi representatives in Japan. So the purchasing documents can be prepared even after an accident. Note, however, that for foreign-related products such as exported products it is necessary to send alternative products beforehand. To ease maintenance, refer to the following tips at design work. (1) Module type easily replaced The building block type modules feature easy replacement. Their structures make it possible to replace just the faulty module to complete the replacement. (2) Memory type To use the standard RAMs or SRAM memory cards, the backup battery is required. The standard ROMs, Flash cards, and ATA cards do not require the battery for use, and besides, they prevent unintentional program changes due to human-related mistakes. They are recommended to be employed especially in products for export. (3) Reducing the number of module types Reducing the number of module types is an efficient way for reducing the umber of spare product types. (4) Reserving some I/O points By not using all the I/O points on 16-, 32-, and 64-point I/O modules but reserving 10% to 20% of them, it is possible to just make changes on wiring and programs (I/O signals) instead of replacing the faulty module with a spare module. This is efficient when there are no spare modules. (5) Creating a document The fact that PLC programs are easily modified may lead to inconsistency between an operating program and documents (i.e. ladder diagram, program list). Keep updating the document. To do this, using a printer is efficient. (6) Being experienced in peripheral devices Being experienced in DOS/V personal computers, PUs, printers, etc. helps quick recovery from an accident. 9-5 (7) Spare products Table 9.3 Spare products No. Product Quantity Remark name Storage lives of lithium batteries are about 5 years. So it 1 Battery One or two is recommended not to keep the stock all the time but to purchase them when needed. However, keep stock of 1 or 2 for accidental situation. 2 Floppy disk As required Backup FDs for the startup software and FDs for user Note that I/O modules tend to have an error during test 3 I/O module One per operation. module type Also note that the contacts of relay output modules are subject to consumption in long-term use. 4 5 CPU One used module model Memory One used card model Power 6 supply module 7 Peripheral devices CPU modules and memory cards are the core parts of a PLC. This means that an error on them causes the system to go down. Same as above. As power supply modules are highly One used subject to temperature rise, their service lives tend to be model shorter than supposed in a high ambient temperature environment. As required 9-6 A PU is recommended as a spare of DOS/V personal computer. 9.6 Using Maintenance Supporters The following shows examples of maintenance supporters, which are devices that automatically notify an operator or maintenance person faults or operation status of PLC-used systems or devices. Error indication by commercial lamp 1. Connect an error LED lamp to the output module of a PLC so that the lamp flashes at an error occurrence. Lamp flicker Output module (Y50 to Y6F) Error indication lamp Control panel SM1 SM412 Y50 (Error detection) (1 second clock) 2. Lamp (Y50) flashes when an error is detected Displaying an error code on a commercial digital display Connect the digital display to the output module of a PLC so that the error code number of the detected error is indicated on the digital display. Display in numerical values Error Code Output module (Y70 to Y8F) Error indication lamp error code 0 0 error code 3 Control panel SM1 BCD (Error detection) SD0 K2Y70 (error code) Display an error code number on the digital display when an error is detected 9-7 2 3. Displaying the description of a detected error on the screen The details of an error occurred on a PLC can be displayed on an external CRT screen, plasma screen, liquid crystal screen, etc. Displaying on a screen Starting first step in progress Arm Conveyer Error occurrence! *00070 MELSEC-Q supports a wide variety of GOTs (Graphic Operation Terminals). In addition to the error display function, GOTs feature a lot of useful functions such as the graphic monitoring, ladder monitoring, device monitoring, touch-panel switch, and printing function. (Refer to the catalogs for details.) 9-8 APPENDIX Appendix 1 I/O Control Mode The CPU supports two types of I/O control modes; the direct mode and refresh mode. Appendix 1.1 Direct mode In the direct mode, input signals are imported to a PLC every time they are input and treated it as input information. The operation results of a program are output to the output data memory and the output modules. The following diagram shows the flow of I/O data in the direct mode. CPU module CPU (Operation processing) Data memory for inputs (X) 2) Test operation using GX Developer Rink refresh of MELSECNET/H Write from serial communication modules, etc. 3) 1) Input module X0 4) Data memory for outputs (Y) Y75 Y70 5) Executes the OUT instruction in the sequence program. Test operation using GX Developer Writes from the serial communication modules, etc. Output module • When the input contact instruction is performed: An OR operation is performed in the input information 1) from the input module and input information 2) in the data memory. Then this data is used as input information 3) at sequence program execution. • When the output contact instruction is performed: Output information 4) is read from the output (Y) data memory, and a sequence program is executed. • When the OUT instruction is performed: The sequence program's operation result 5) is output to the output module, and is stored in the output (Y) data memory. • When the QCPU performs I/O in the direct mode, a sequence program uses DX for inputs and DY for outputs. App - 1 Appendix 1.2 Refresh mode In the refresh mode, all changes occurred to an input module are imported to the input data memory in a PLC CPU at a time before each time a scan is performed. The data memory is used when performing the operation. The operation results made in a program for output (Y) are stored to the output data memory each time the operation is made. All the data stored in the output data memory is batch-output to the output module after the execution of the END instruction. The following diagram shows the flow of I/O data in the refresh mode. CPU module CPU (Operation processing) 3) Data memory for input (X) X0 When inputs are refreshed 1) Input module 4) Y75 Y70 5) Data memory for output (Y) When outputs are refreshed 2) Output module • Input refresh Input data in the input module is batch-read 1) before the execution of 0 step, and stored to the data memory for input (X). • Output refresh Data 2) in the data memory for output (Y) is batch-output to the output module before the execution of 0 step. • When the input contact instruction is performed: Input data is read from the input (X) data memory 3), and a sequence program is performed. • When the output contact instruction has been performed: Output data 4) is read from the output (Y) data memory, and a sequence program is performed. • When the output OUT instruction is performed: The sequence program operation result 5) is stored in the output (Y) data memory. App - 2 Appendix 1.3 Comparisons between the direct mode and refresh mode In the example ladder given below, input X0 turning on leads to output Y70 turning on. Item Direct mode Refresh mode DX0 X0 1, Ladder example Y70 Y70 Program is performed Program is performed Input instruction (LD DX0) Input instruction (LD X0) Output instruction (OUT Y70) Output instruction (OUT Y70) 0 2. Response lag END when output is accordingly 0 0 0 END Minimum delay X0 Internal input Delay (Execution time of the instruction) Y70 END 0 Input refresh Output refresh Delay (1 scan) Maximum delay Maximum delay X0 Y70 0 END Minimum delay X0 from when input Y70 is changed to changed 0 X0 Internal input Delay (1 scan) Y70 Delay (2 scans) • The delay time ranges from 0 scan (only 3. Execution time execution time of the instruction) to 1 scan. • The delay time ranges from 1 scan to 2 scans. • The delay can be anywhere from 0 to 1 scan. • The delay 1 to 2 scans. • Longer time than the refresh mode is needed as • Generally, only short time is needed as a PLC of the I/O a PLC accesses I/O modules in the direct instructions mode. 4. Scan time accesses data memory. • The longer of the execution time of the I/O • The shorter of the execution time of the I/O instruction is, the longer the scan time is. instruction is, the shorter the scan time is. • The actual scan time is the time of program execution. • The actual scan time is the total time of program execution, input transfer, and output transfer. App - 3 Appendix 2 Instruction Table Appendix 2.1 For SFC-related instructions, refer to QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC) SH-080023 . Sequence instructions Symbol Processing details • Starts logic operation (Starts a contact logic LD operation) • Starts logical NOT operation (Starts b contact logic LDI Contact Execution condition Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category (1) Contact instruction operation) AND • Logical product (a contact series connection) ANI • Logical product NOT (b contact series connection) OR • Logical sum (a contact parallel connection) ORI • Logical sum NOT (b contact parallel connection) LDP • Starts leading edge pulse operation LDF • Starts trailing edge pulse operation ANDP • Leading edge pulse series connection ANDF • Trailing edge pulse series connection ORP • Leading edge pulse parallel connection ORF • Trailing edge pulse parallel connection 1 3 2 3 REMARK 1) 1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device being used. Device Number of Steps Internal device, file register (R0 to R32767) 1 Direct access input (DX) 2 Devices other than above 3 2) 2: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU Internal device, file register (R0 to R32767) 1 1 Direct access input (DX) 2 2 Devices other than above 3 3 3) 3: The subset is effective only with QCPU. App - 4 Symbol ANB ORB MPS Connection between logical blocks) • OR between logical blocks (Series connection ORB MPP Execution condition • AND between logical blocks (Series connection ANB MRD Processing details 1 between logical blocks) • Memory storage of operation results MPS MRD MPP • Read of operation results stored with MPS instruction 1 • Read and reset of operation results stored with MPS instruction INV • Inversion of operation result 1 • Conversion of operation result to leading edge MEP pulse • Conversion of operation result to trailing edge MEF 1 pulse EGP Vn EGF Vn • Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse (Stored at Vn) • Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse (Stored at Vn) App - 5 1 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category (2) Connection instructions Symbol Processing details Output OUT Execution condition • Device output SET SET D • Set device RST RST D • Reset device PLS PLS D PLF PLF D FF FF D DELTA DELTA D DELTAP DELTAP D Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category (3) Output instructions *1 *2 *2 *1 *1 • Generates 1 cycle program pulse at leading edge of input signal 2 • Generates 1 cycle program pulse at trailing edge of input signal • Reversal of device output 2 • Pulse conversion of direct output 2 REMARK 1) 2) *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device being used. For details of the number of steps, refer to a page having the explanation of each instruction. *2: The execution condition applies only when an annunciator (F) is in use. Shift Symbol Processing details SFT SFT D SFTP SFTP D • 1-bit shift of device App - 6 Execution condition 2 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category (4) Shift instructions Master MC control MCR Symbol Processing details MC n D MCR n Execution condition • Starts master control 2 • Resets master control 1 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category (5) Master control instructions Symbol Processing details Program FEND FEND • Termination of main program end END • Termination of sequence program END Execution condition Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category (6) Termination instructions 1 Symbol Processing details Execution condition • Terminates sequence operation after input condition has been met Stop STOP • Sequence program is executed by placing STOP 1 the RUN/STOP key switch back in the RUN position NOP Ignored NOPLF PAGE • Ignored (For program deletion or space) • Ignored (To change pages during Ignored NOPLF PAGE printouts) n • Ignored (Subsequent programs will be controlled from step 0 of page n) App - 7 1 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category (7) Other Instructions Appendix 2.2 Basic instructions Instruction symbol LD S1 S2 AND S1 S2 OR S1 S2 AND S1 S2 S1 S2 AND S1 S2 OR S1 S2 AND S1 S2 S1 S2 AND S1 S2 3 • Conductive status when (S1) ≠ (S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1) = (S2) 3 • Conductive status when (S1) > (S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1) ≤ (S2) 3 • Conductive status when (S1) ≤ (S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1) > (S2) 3 • Conductive status when (S1) < (S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1) ≥ (S2) 3 S1 S2 LD S1 S2 AND S1 S2 OR • Non-conductive status when (S1) ≠ (S2) S1 S2 LD OR • Conductive status when (S1) = (S2) S1 S2 LD OR Execution condition S1 S2 LD 16-bit data Processing details S1 S2 LD OR comparisons Symbol • Conductive status when (S1) ≥ (S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1) < (S2) 3 S1 S2 App - 8 Subset Category Number of basic steps (1) Comparison operation instruction LDD D S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2 D S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2 D S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2 ORD ORD 32-bit data comparisons Symbol ORD D S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2 D S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2 D S1 S2 LDD D S1 S2 ANDD D S1 S2 D S1 S2 ORD ORD ORD Processing details Execution condition Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) *1 • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ (S2+1, S2) *1 • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) *1 • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ (S2+1, S2) *1 • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) *1 • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ (S2+1, S2) *1 • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) REMARK *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K8, and which use no index modification. • Constant : No limitations Devices other than above Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU 5 3 3 QCPUs need the increased number of steps but provide faster processing speed. App - 9 LDE E S1 S2 ANDE E S1 S2 E S1 S2 LDE E S1 S2 ANDE E S1 S2 E S1 S2 LDE E S1 S2 ANDE E S1 S2 E S1 S2 LDE E S1 S2 ANDE E S1 S2 E S1 S2 LDE E S1 S2 ANDE E S1 S2 E S1 S2 LDE E S1 S2 ANDE E S1 S2 ORE ORE Real number ORE data comparisons Symbol ORE ORE ORE E S1 S2 Processing details Execution condition • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ 3 (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≠ (S2+1, S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) = 3 (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ 3 (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≤ (S2+1, S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) > 3 (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ 3 (S2+1, S2) • Conductive status when (S1+1, S1) ≥ (S2+1, S2) • Non-conductive status when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) App - 10 3 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category LD$ $ S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 LD$ $ S1 S2 AND$ $ S1 S2 $ S1 S2 OR$ OR$ Character Symbol OR$ string data comparisons LD$ AND$ OR$ OR$ OR$ Processing details • Compares character string S1 and character string S2 one character at a time. * • Conductive status when (character string S1) = (character string S2) • Non-Conductive status when (character string S1) ≠ (character string S2) • Compares character string S1 and character string S2 one character at a time. * • Conductive status when (character string S1) ≠ (character string S2) • Non-Conductive status when (character string S1) = (character string S2) • Compares character string S1 and character string S2 one character at a time. * • Conductive status when (character string S1) > (character string S2) • Non-Conductive status when (character string S1) ≤ (character string S2) • Compares character string S1 and character string S2 one character at a time. * • Conductive status when (character string S1) ≤ (character string S2) • Non-Conductive status when (character string S1) > (character string S2) • Compares character string S1 and character string S2 one character at a time. * • Conductive status when (character string S1) < (character string S2) • Non-Conductive status when (character string S1) ≥ (character string S2) • Compares character string S1 and character string S2 one character at a time. • Conductive status when (character string S1) ≥ (character string S2) • Non-Conductive status when (character string S1) < (character string S2) Execution condition Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category 3 3 3 3 3 3 REMARK 1) *: The conditions under which character string comparisons can be made are as shown below. • Match: All characters in the strings must match • Larger string: If character strings are different, determines the string with the largest number of character codes If the lengths of the character strings are different, determines the longest character string • Smaller string: If the character strings are different, determines the string with the smallest number of character codes If the lengths of the character strings are different, determines the shortest character string App - 11 Block data Symbol Processing details BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n BKCMP BKCMP S1 S2 D n comparisons BKCMP P BKCMP • Compares n points of data from S1 with n points of data from S2 in 1-word units, and stores the results of the comparison at n points from the bit device designated by (D). 5 BKCMP P S1 S2 D n P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n BKCMP BKCMP P P S1 S2 D n BKCMP P BKCMP P S1 S2 D n BKCMP BKCMP P P S1 S2 D Execution condition n App - 12 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category Instruction symbol Symbol + + S D +P +P S D BIN 16-bit + addition and +P Processing details + S1 S2 D +P S1 S2 D S D subtraction operations P P addition D+ D+ S D D+P D+P S D and D+P D+ S1 S2 D D+P S1 S2 D D S D D P S D subtraction D operations D P D D D P D S1 S2 D P BIN 16-bit P tion and / P S1 S2 D operations /P /P S1 S2 D BIN 32-bit D D S1 S2 D D P D P S1 S2 D D/ D/ S1 S2 D D/P S1 S2 D multiplication and division operations D/P 4 • (D) (S) (D) 3 • (S1) (S2) (D) 4 • (D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D) *1 • (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *2 • (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D) *1 • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *2 • (S1) (S2) (D+1,D) *3 S1 S2 D / division • (S1)+(S2) (D) S1 S2 D S1 S2 D multiplica- 3 S1 S2 D P BIN 32-bit D+ • (D)+(S) (D) S D S1 S2 D P Execution condition • (S1)/(S2) Quotient (D), Remainder (D+1) 4 • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 4 • (S1+1,S1)/(S2+1,S2) Quotient (D+1,D), Remainder (D+3,D+2) App - 13 4 Subset Category Number of basic steps (2) Arithmetic operation instruction REMARK 1) *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K8, and which use no index 5 modification. • Constant : No limitations Devices other than above 2) 3 3 *2: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K8, and which use no index 6 modification. • Constant : No limitations Devices other than above 3) 4 4 *3: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K4, and which use no index 3 modification. • Constant : No limitations Devices other than above 4 App - 14 4 BCD Instruction symbol Symbol B+ B+ S D B+P B+P S D Processing details B+ B+ S1 S2 D addition B+P B+P S1 S2 D and B B S D B P B P S D 4-digit subtraction operations BCD B B S1 S2 D B P B P S1 S2 D DB+ DB+ S D DB+P DB+P S D DB+ DB+ S1 S2 D addition DB+P DB+P S1 S2 D and DB DB S D DB P DB 8-digit subtraction operations BCD 4-digit multiplication and division operations BCD 8-digit multiplication and division operations P Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Category • (D)+(S) (D) 3 • (S1)+(S2) (D) 4 • (D) (S) (D) 3 • (S1) (S2) (D) 4 • (D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 • (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 4 • (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 S D DB DB S1 S2 D DB P DB P S1 S2 D B B S1 S2 D B P B P S1 S2 D B/ B/ S1 S2 D B/P B/P S1 S2 D DB DB S1 S2 D DB P DB P S1 S2 D DB/ DB/ S1 S2 D DB/P DB/P S1 S2 D • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 4 • (S1) (S2) (D+1,D) 4 • (S1)/(S2) Quotient (D), Remainder (D+1) 4 • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D) 4 • (S1+1,S1)/(S2+1,S2) Quotient (D+1,D), Remainder (D+3,D+2) App - 15 4 Floating decimal Symbol E+ E+ S D E+P E+P S D Processing details E+ E+ S1 S2 D addition E+P E+P S1 S2 D and E E S D E P E point data subtraction operations E Floating decimal point data P S1 S2 D E P E P S1 S2 D * E P * E S1 S2 D E P S1 S2 D E/ S1 S2 D E/P S1 S2 D Multiplica- E/ • (D+1,D)+(S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 • (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 4 • (D+1,D) (S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 S D E E Execution condition • (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 4 • (S1+1,S1) * (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) 3 • (S1+1,S1)/(S2+1,S2) Quotient (D+1,D) tion and division 4 E/P operations BIN block $+ addition and subtrac- $+ S D $+P S D character string designated with (D), and $+P $+ $+ S1 S2 D $+P S1 S2 D tion BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n BK+P BK+P S1 S2 D n BK BK S1 S2 D n BK P BK string data combinations P S1 S2 D n 3 stores the result from (D) onward. • Links character string designated with (S2) to character string designated with (S1), and operations $+P Character • Links character string designated with (S) to 4 stores the result from (D) onward. • Adds data of n points from (S1) and data of n points from (S2) in batch. 5 • Subtracts data of n points from (S1) and data of n points from (S2) in batch. App - 16 5 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category Symbol Processing details INC INC D INCP INCP D DINC DINC D BIN data DINCP DINCP D increment DEC DEC D DECP DECP D DDEC DDEC D DDECP DDECP D Execution condition • (D)+1 (D) Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category 2 • (D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D) *1 • (D) 1 (D) 2 • (D+1,D) 1 (D+1,D) *1 REMARK *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K8, and which use no index 3 modification. • Constant : No limitations Devices other than above 2 App - 17 2 Instruction symbol BCD Symbol Processing details BCD S D BCD BCDP BCDP S D conversion DBCD DBCD S D DBCDP BIN DBCDP S D BIN S D BIN BINP BINP S D conversion DBIN DBIN S D DBINP Conversion from BIN to floating decimal point Conversion from floating decimal point to BIN Conversion between BIN 16-bit and 32-bit from BIN to gray code BCD conversion (D) 3 BIN(0 to 9999) · (S+1, S) BCD conversion (D+1, D) BIN(0 to 99999999) · (S) BIN conversion (D) · (S+1, S) BIN conversion (D+1, D) BCD(0 to 99999999) S D FLT S D Conversion to floating point · (S+1, S) (D) FLTP FLTP S D BIN(-32768 to 32767) DFLT DFLT S D DFLTP S D INT S D FLT DFLTP INT INTP INTP S D DINT DINT S D DINTP DINTP S D DBL S D DBLP DBLP S D WORD WORD S D WORDP S D GRY S D GRYP GRYP S D DGRY DGRY S D DGRYP S D DBL WORDP DGRYP 3 3 BCD(0 to 9999) DBINP GRY Conversion · (S) Execution condition 3 3 Conversion to floating point · (S+1, S) (D+1, D) 3 Real number(-2147483648 to 2147483647) · (S+1, S) BIN conversion (D) Real number(-32768 to 32767) · (S+1, S) BIN conversion (D+1, D) Real number(-2147483648 to 2147483647) · (S) Conversion (D+, 1) BIN(-32768 to 32767) · (S+1, S) Conversion (D) BIN(-32768 to 32767) 3 3 3 3 Conversion to gray code · (S) (D) 3 BIN(-32768 to 32767) Conversion to gray code · (S+1, S) (D+1, D) Real number(-2147483648 to 2147483647) App - 18 3 Subset Category Number of basic steps (3) Data conversion instructions Conversion from gray code to BIN Symbol GBIN GBIN Processing details S D GBINP GBINP S D DGBIN DGBIN S D DGBINP DGBINP S D NEG D NEG NEGP NEGP D Complement DNEG DNEG D to 2 Block DNEGP DNEGP D ENEG ENEG D ENEGP ENEGP D BKBCD BKBCD S D n BKBCDP BKBCDP S D n BKBIN S D n BKBINP S D n conversions BKBIN BKBINP Execution condition Conversion to gray code · (S) (D) Gray code(-32768 to 32767) Conversion to gray code · (S+1, S) (D+1, D) 3 3 Gray code(-2147483648 to 2147483647) · (D) (D) 2 BIN data · (D+1, D) · (D+1, D) (D+1, D) BIN data 2 (D+1, D) Real number data 2 • Batch converts BIN data n points from (S) to BCD data and stores the result from (D) 4 onward. • Batch converts BCD data n points from (S) to BIN data and stores the result from (D) onward. App - 19 4 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category Symbol MOV MOV S D MOVP MOVP S D DMOV DMOV S D DMOVP DMOVP S D EMOV EMOV S D EMOVP EMOVP S D Character $MOV string data $MOVP transfer $MOV S D $MOVP S D 16-bit data negation transfer 32-bit data negation transfer CML CML S D CMLP CMLP S D DCML DCML S D DCMLP DCMLP S D Block transfer BMOV BMOV S D n BMOVP BMOVP S D n FMOV S D n 16-bit data transfer 32-bit data transfer Floating decimal point data transfer Multiple FMOV transfers of same FMOVP block 16-bit data exchange 32-bit data exchange Block data exchange ⋅ (S) (D) 1 ⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 (D+1, D) · (S+1, S) Real number data 3 • Transfers character string designated by (S) to device designated by (D) onward. ⋅ (S) S D n XCH XCH S D XCHP XCHP S D DXCH DXCH S D DXCHP DXCHP S D BXCH BXCH S D n BXCHP BXCHP S D n SWAP D SWAPP D 3 (D) 1 ⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 (S) (D) n ⋅ (S) 4 (D) (S) FMOVP Exchange SWAP of upper and lower SWAPP bytes Execution condition Processing details Subset Instruction symbol Category Number of basic steps (4) Data conversion instructions n 4 (D) 3 ⋅ (S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 (S) (D) n (S) 4 b15 to b8 b7 to b0 8 bits 8 bits 3 b15 to b8 b7 to b0 8 bits 8 bits (D) App - 20 2 REMARK *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K4, and which use no index 2 modification. • Constant : No limitations Devices other than above 3 *2: The subset is effective only with QCPU. App - 21 3 Jump Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details CJ CJ Pn SCJ SCJ Pn JMP JMP Pn GOEND Execution condition • Jumps to Pn when input conditions are met 2 • Jumps to Pn from the scan after the meeting 2 of input condition • Jumps unconditionally to Pn 2 • Jumps to END instruction when input GOEND Subset Category Number of basic steps (5) Program branch instructions 1 condition is met Disable interrupts Enable interrupts Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details DI DI EI EI Execution condition • Prohibits the running of an interrupt program Subset Category Number of basic steps (6) Program execution control instructions 1 • Resets interrupt program execution 1 prohibition Interrupt disable/ enable IMASK IMASK S • Prohibits or permits interrupts for each 2 interrupt program setting Return IRET IRET • Returns to sequence program following an 1 interrupt program I/O refresh Instruction symbol RFS Symbol RFS Processing details D n • Refreshes the relevant I/O area during scan App - 22 Execution condition 3 Subset Category Number of basic steps (7) I/O refresh instructions Instruction symbol Symbol Execution condition Processing details (S)+0 UDCNT1 UDCNT1 S D n Up/down (S)+1 4 (S)+0 UDCNT2 timer Up Down Cn contact counter Teaching Up Cn current value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -2 -1 0 UDCNT2 S D n (S)+1 Cn current value 0 1 Cn contact 4 2 3 4 5 · (ON time of TTMR) n TTMR TTMR 4 3 2 1 0 -1 (D) 3 D n n=0:1, n=1:10, n=2:100 • The 4 points from the bit device designated by (D) operate as shown below, depending. Special timer on the ON/OFF status of the input conditions STMR STMR S n D for the STMR instruction: 3 (D)+0: Off delay timer output (D)+1: One shot after off timer output (D)+2: One shot after on timer output (D)+3: On delay timer output Nearest path • Rotates a rotary table with n1 divisions from ROTC ROTC S n1 n2 D control Ramp signal the stop position to the position designated 5 by (S+1) by the nearest path. RAMP RAMP n1 n2 D1 n3 D2 • Changes device data designated by D1 from n1 to n2 in n3 scans. 6 • Counts the pulse input from the device Pulse density SPD SPD S n D designated by (S) for the duration of time designated by n, and stores the count in the 4 device designated by (D). Pulse output PLSY PLSY n1 n2 D · (n1)Hz (D) Output n2 times Pulse width modulati n1 PWM PWM n2 n1 n2 D input 4 (D) on Matrix 4 • Store 16 times of n lows in the device MTR MTR S D1 D2 n specified by (S) to the device specified by (D2) in sequence. App - 23 5 Subset Category Number of basic steps (8) Other convenient instructions Appendix 2.3 Application instructions Instruction symbol Symbol Execution condition Processing details WAND WAND S D WANDP WANDP S D ⋅ (D) (S) Subset Category Number of basic steps (1) Logical operation instruction (D) 3 WAND WAND S1 S2 D WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1) (S2) (D) 4 Logical DAND DAND S D product DANDP DANDP S D ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) *2 (D+1,D) *1 DAND DAND S1 S2 D DANDP DANDP S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *1 BKAND BKAND BKANDP BKANDP S1 S2 D n (S1) S1 S2 D n WOR WOR S D WORP WORP S D WOR WOR S1 S2 D WORP WORP S1 S2 D (S2) (D) 5 n ⋅ (D) ⋅ (S1) (D) (S) *2 3 (D) (S2) 4 Logical DOR DOR S D sum DORP DORP S D ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) *2 (D+1,D) *1 DOR DOR S1 S2 D DORP DORP S1 S2 D ⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *1 BKOR BKOR S1 S2 D n BKORP BKORP S1 S2 D n (S1) (S2) *2 (D) 5 n REMARK *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K8, and which use no index modification. • Constant : No limitations Devices other than above *2: The subset is effective only with QCPU. App - 24 Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU 6 4 4 Instruction symbol Symbol WXOR WXOR S D WXORP WXORP S D WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D Exclusive DXOR DXOR S D OR DXORP S D NON DXORP DXOR DXOR S1 S2 D DXORP DXORP S1 S2 D BKXOR BKXOR BKXORP BKXORP S1 S2 D n logical WXNR S D WXNRP WXNRP S D WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D sum DXNRP ⋅ (D) (S) DXNR S D DXNRP S D DXNR DXNR S1 S2 D DXNRP DXNRP S1 S2 D BKXNOR BKXNOR BKXNORP BKXNORP S1 S2 D n (D) 3 ⋅ (S1) (S2) (D) 4 ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) *2 (D+1,D) *1 ⋅ (S1+1,S1) (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *1 (S1) S1 S2 D n WXNR exclusive DXNR Execution condition Processing details Number of basic steps Subset Category (S2) (D) 5 n ⋅ (D) ⋅ (S1) (D) (S) *2 3 (D) (S2) 4 ⋅ (D+1,D) (S+1,S) *2 (D+1,D) *1 ⋅ (S1+1,S1) S1 S2 D n (S2+1,S2) (D+1,D) *1 (S1) (S2) *2 (D) 5 n REMARK *1: The number of steps may vary depending on the device and type of CPU module being used. Device Number of Steps QCPU QnACPU • Word device: Internal device (except for file register ZR) • Bit device: Devices whose device Nos. are multiples of 16, whose digit designation is K8, and which use no index modification. • Constant : No limitations 6 Devices other than above 4 *2: The subset is effective only with QCPU. App - 25 4 Category Instruction symbol ROR Symbol ROR Execution condition Processing details D n b15 (D) b0 Number of basic steps Subset (2) Rotation instructions SM700 3 Right rotation RORP RORP D n Rotates n bits to the right RCR RCR D n b15 (D) b0 SM700 3 RCRP RCRP D n Rotates n bits to the right ROL ROL D n SM700 b15 (D) b0 3 Left rotation ROLP ROLP D n RCL RCL D n RCLP RCLP D n DROR DROR D n DRORP DRORP D n Rotates n bits to the right DRCR DRCR D n (D+1) (D) b31 to b16 b15 to b0 Rotates n bits to the left SM700 b15 (D) b0 3 Right rotation Rotates n bits to the left (D+1) (D) b31 to b16 b15 to b0 SM700 3 SM700 3 DRCRP DRCRP D n Rotates n bits to the right DROL DROL D n SM700 (D+1) (D) b31 to b16 b15 to b0 3 Left rotation DROLP DROLP D n DRCL DRCL D n Rotates n bits to the left SM700 (D+1) (D) b31 to b16 b15 to b0 3 DRCLP DRCLP D n Rotates n bits to the left App - 26 Category Instruction symbol SFR Symbol SFR Execution condition Processing details D n b15 b15 bn Number of basic steps Subset (3) Shift instructions b0 3 n-bit shift b0 SM700 SFRP SFRP D n SFL SFL D n b15 SM700 b15 0 to 0 bn b0 3 1-bit shift SFLP SFLP D n BSFR BSFR D n BSFRP BSFRP D n BSFL BSFL D n BSFLP BSFLP D n DSFR DSFR D n b0 0 to 0 n (D) 3 SM700 0 n (D) SM700 3 0 n (D) 3 1-word shift DSFRP DSFRP D n DSFL DSFL D n 0 n (D) 3 DSFLP DSFLP D n 0 Category Instruction symbol BSET Bit set/ reset Symbol BSET Processing details D n BSETP BSETP D n BRST BRST D n BRSTP BRSTP D n (D) b15 bn b0 Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (4) Bit processing instructions 3 1 (D) b15 bn b0 0 App - 27 3 Instruction symbol TEST Symbol TEST Execution condition Processing details S1 S2 D (S1) b15 to b0 Number of basic steps Subset Category (D) 4 TESTP TESTP S1 S2 D DTEST DTEST S1 S2 D DTESTP DTESTP S1 S2 D Bit tests Bit designated in (S2) (S1) b31 to b0 (D) 4 Batch reset of bit devices BKRST BKRST BKRSTP S n BKRSTP Bit designated in (S2) (S) (S) ON OFF Reset n 3 OFF OFF ON ON S n OFF OFF Category Instruction symbol SER Data searches Symbol SER Execution condition Processing details S1 S2 D n SERP SERP S1 S2 D n DSER DSER S1 S2 D n (S2) (S1) n 5 (D) : Match No. (D+1): No. of matches 32 bits (S1) (S2) n DSERP Bit checks DSERP S1 S2 D n SUM SUM S D SUMP SUMP S D DSUM DSUM S D DSUMP DSUMP S D Number of basic steps Subset (5) Data processing instructions 5 (D) : Match No. (D+1): No. of matches b15 (S) b0 3 (D): No. of 1s (S+1) (S) 3 DECO DECO S D n Decode (D):No. of 1s Decode of 8 to 256 (D) (S) Decode 2n bits DECOP DECOP S D n ENCO ENCO S D n Decode of 256 to 8 (S) Encode (D) S D n 2n bits n Encode ENCOP ENCOP n App - 28 4 4 Instruction symbol 7-segment SEG decode SEGP Symbol SEG Processing details S D b3 to b0 (S) SEGP S D DIS DIS S D n DISP DISP S D n UNI UNI S D n UNIP UNIP S D n NDIS NDIS S1 D S2 NDISP NDISP S1 D S2 7SEG (D) NUNI NUNI S1 D S2 NUNIP NUNIP S1 D S2 WTOB WTOB S D n WTOBP WTOBP S D n BTOW BTOW S D n BTOWP BTOWP S D n MAX MAX S D n MAXP MAXP S D n MIN MIN S D n MINP MINP S D n DMAX DMAX S D n DMAXP DMAXP S D n Search DMIN DMIN S D n DMINP DMINP S D n 4 points from (D). (n) ≤ (4) • Links the lower 4 bits of n points from the device designated by (S) and stores at the and linking 3 • Separates 16-bit data designated by (S) into 4-bit units, and stores at the lower 4 bits of n Separating Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Category 4 device designated by (D). (n) ≤ (4) • Separates the data at the devices below that designated by (S1) into bits designated below (S2) and stores in sequence from the device designated by (D). • Links the data at the devices below that 4 designated by (S1) in the bits designated below (S2) and stores in sequence from the device designated by (D). • Breaks n-points of 16-bit data from the device designated by (S) into 8-bit units, and stores in sequence at the device designated by (D). • Links the lower 8 bits of 16-bit data of 4 n-points from the device designated by (S) into 16-bit units, and stores in sequence at the device designated by (D). • Searches the data of n-points from the device designated by (S) in 16-bit units, and stores the maximum value at the device designated by (D). • Searches the data of n-points from the 4 device designated by (S) in 16-bit units, and stores the minimum value at the device designated by (D). • Searches the data of 2 n-points from the device designated by (S) in 32-bit units, and stores the maximum value at the device designated by (D). • Searches the data of 2 n-points from the device designated by (S) in 32-bit units, and stores the minimum value at the device designated by (D). App - 29 4 Instruction symbol Symbol S1 n S2 D1 D2 SORT SORT Processing details · S2: Number of comparisons made during one run · D1: Device to turn ON when sort is completed · D2: For system use Sort DSORT DSORT WSUM • Sorts data of n-points from device designated by (S1) in 16-bit units. (n (n-1)/2 scans required) 6 S1 n S2 D1 D2 · S2: Number of comparisons made during one run · D1: Device to turn ON when sort is completed · D2: For system use WSUM Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Category S D n • Sorts data of 2 n-points from device designated by (S1) in 32-bit units. (n (n-1)/2 scans required) • Adds 16 bit BIN data of n-points from the device designated by (S), and stores it in Total value calculations WSUMP WSUMP S D n the device designated by (D). 4 DWSUM DWSUM S D n • Adds 32 bit BIN data of n-points from the device designated by (S), and stores it in DWSUMP DWSUMP S D n the device designated by (D). App - 30 Category Instruction symbol Symbol FOR Number of repeats Processing details FOR NEXT NEXT BREAK BREAK D Pn BREAKP BREAKP D Pn CALL CALL CALLP Pn S1 to Sn CALLP Pn S1 to Sn RET Sub n RET FCALL FCALL Pn S1 to Sn FCALLP FCALLP Pn S1 to Sn routine program ECALL calls ECALLP ECALL Pn S1 to Sn : Program name ECALLP Pn S1 to Sn : Program name EFCALL EFCALL Pn S1 to Sn : Program name EFCALLP EFCALLP Pn S1 to Sn : Program name COM IX COM IX S • Forcibly ends the execution of the FOR to NEXT cycle and jumps pointer to Pn. 2 1 3 • Executes sub-routine program Pn when input condition is met. (S1 to Sn are arguments sent to subroutine program. 0 ≤ (n) ≤ (5) *1 • Returns from sub-routine program 1 • Performs non-execution processing of sub-routine program Pn if input conditions have not been met. • Executes sub-routine program Pn from within designated program name when input conditions have not been met. (S1 to Sn are arguments sent to subroutine program. 0 ≤ (n) ≤ (5) • Performs non-execution processing of sub-routine program Pn from within designated program name if input conditions have not been met. 2 + n *1 2 + n *2 3 + n *2 3 + n • Performs link refresh and general data processing. 1 • Conducts index modification for 2 individual devices used in device Device modification ladder IXEND • Executes n times between FOR and NEXT . Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (6) Structure creation instructions modification ladder. IXEND 1 Fixed index modification IXDEV IXDEV • Stores modification value used for index 1 modification performed between IX IXSET Pn D IXSET Modification value designation and IXEND in the device below that designated by (D). 3 *1: n indicates number of arguments for sub-routine program. *2: n indicates the total of the number of arguments used in the sub-routine program and the number of program name steps. The number of program name steps is calculated as "number of characters in the program / 2". (decimal fraction is rounded up). App - 31 Category Instruction symbol FIFW Symbol FIFW Processing details S D (S) (D) Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (7) Data table operation instructions Pointer+1 Pointer 3 FIFWP FIFWP S D FIFR FIFR S D Device of pointer+1 (S) Pointer (D) Pointer-1 3 FIFRP FIFRP S D FPOP FPOP S D (S) Pointer Pointer-1 (D) Data table processing 3 FPOPP FPOPP S D FINS FINS S D n FINSP FINS S D n FDEL FDEL S D n FDELP FDELP S D n Device of pointer+1 (S) (D) Pointer Pointer+1 4 Designate using n (S) Pointer Pointer-1 (D) 4 Designate using n App - 32 Category Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details FROM FROM n1 n2 D n3 Data FROMP FROMP n1 n2 D n3 read DFRO DFRO n1 n2 D n3 DFROP DFROP n1 n2 D n3 TO TO n1 n2 S n3 Data TOP TOP n1 n2 S n3 write DTO DTO n1 n2 S n3 DTOP DTOP n1 n2 S n3 Execution condition • Reads data in 16-bit units from special Number of basic steps Subset (8) Buffer memory access instructions 5 function module. • Reads data in 32-bit units from special 5 function module. • Writes data in 16-bit units to special function 5 module. • Writes data in 32-bit units to special function 5 module. Category Instruction symbol Symbol PR With SM701 off S D PR Processing details Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (9) Display instructions • Outputs ASCII code of 8 points (16 characters) from device designated by (S) to output module. ASCII print PR With SM701 on S D PR • Outputs ASCII code from device designated by (S) to 00H to output module. 3 • Converts comments from device designated PRC PRC S D by (S) to ASCII code and outputs to output module. • Displays ASCII code of 8 points (16 LED LED S characters) from the device designated by (S) at the LED display device on the front of the CPU module. Display 2 • Displays the comments from the device LEDC LEDC S designated by (S) at the LED display device on the front of the CPU module. Reset LEDR LEDR • Resets annunciator and display unit display. App - 33 1 Category Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (10) Debugging and failure diagnosis instructions • CHK instruction is executed when CHKST is executable. CHKST CHKST • Jumps to the step following the CHK instruction when CHKST is in a non-executable status. 1 • During normal conditions SM80: OFF, Check CHK CHK SD80: 0 • During abnormal conditions SM80: ON, Check condition SD80: Failure No. CHKCIR Status latch Sampling trace Program CHKCIR CHKEND CHKEND SLT SLT SLTR SLTR STRA STRA STRAR STRAR PTRA PTRA PTRAR PTRAR PTRAEXE PTRAEXE PTRAEXEP PTRAEXEP trace • Starts update in ladder pattern being checked by CHK instruction. • Ends update in ladder pattern being 1 checked by CHK instruction. • Executes status latch. • Resets status latch to enable 1 re-execution. • Applies trigger to sampling trace. • Resets sampling trace to enable 1 re-execution. • Applies trigger to program trace. • Resets program trace to enable 1 re-execution. • Executes program trace. App - 34 1 Category Instruction symbol BINDA BIN to Symbol BINDA Processing details S D BINDAP BINDAP S D DBINDA DBINDA S D decimal ASCII BIN to DBINDAP DBINDAP S D BINHA BINHA S D BINHAP BINHAP S D DBINHA DBINHA S D hexadecimal ASCII BCD to DBINHAP DBINHAP S D BCDDA BCDDA S D BCDDAP BCDDAP S D DBCDDA DBCDDA S D decimal ASCII DBCDDAP DBCDDAP S D DABIN DABIN S D Decimal DABINP ASCII to DABINP S D BIN DDABIN DDABIN S D DDABINP DDABINP S D HABIN HABIN Hexadecimal ASCII to BIN S D HABINP HABINP S D DHABIN DHABIN S D DHABINP DHABINP S D Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (11) Character string processing instructions • Converts 1-word BIN value designated by (S) to a 5-digit, decimal ASCII value, and stores it at the word device designated by 3 (D). • Converts 2-word BIN value designated by (S) to a 10-digit, decimal ASCII value, and stores it at word devices following the word 3 device number designated by (D). • Converts 1-word BIN value designated by (S) to a 4-digit, hexadecimal ASCII value, and stores it at word devices following the 3 word device number designated by (D). • Converts 2-word BIN value designated by (S) to a 8-digit, hexadecimal ASCII value, and stores it at word devices following the 3 word device number designated by (D). • Converts 1-word BCD value designated by (S) to a 4-digit, decimal ASCII value, and stores it at word devices following the word 3 device number designated by (D). • Converts 2-word BCD value designated by (S) to an 8-digit, decimal ASCII value, and stores it at word devices following the word 3 device number designated by (D). • Converts a 5-digit, decimal ASCII value designated by (S) to 1-word BIN value, and stores it at a word device number 3 designated by (D). • Converts a 10-digit, decimal ASCII value designated by (S) to 2-word BIN value, and stores it at a word device number 3 designated by (D). • Converts a 4-digit, hexadecimal ASCII value designated by (S) to 1-word BIN value, and stores it at a word device number 3 designated by (D). • Converts an 8-digit, hexadecimal ASCII value designated by (S) to 2-word BIN value, and stores it at a word device number designated by (D). App - 35 3 DABCD Decimal DABCDP Symbol Processing details DABCD S D DABCDP S D DDABCD S D ASCII to BCD DDABCD DDABCDP Device comment read operation Character string length detection COMRD DDABCDP S D COMRD S D • Converts a 4-digit, decimal ASCII value designated by (S) to 1-word BCD value, and stores it at a word device number COMRDP S D LEN LEN S D • Converts an 8-digit, decimal ASCII value designated by (S) to 2-word BCD value, and stores it at a word device number LENP S D 3 designated by (D). • Stores comment from device designated by 3 • Stores data length (number of characters) in character string designated by (S) at a LENP 3 designated by (D). (S) at a device designated by (D). COMRDP Execution condition 3 device designated by (D). • Converts a 1-word BIN value designated by STR STR S1 S2 D (S2) to a decimal character string with the total number of digits and the number of decimal fraction digits designated by (S1) BIN to STRP STRP S1 S2 D decimal and stores them at a device designated by (D). character string 4 • Converts a 2-word BIN value designated by DSTR DSTR S1 S2 D (S2) to a decimal character string with the total number of digits and the number of decimal fraction digits designated by (S1) DSTRP DSTRP S1 S2 D 4 and stores them at a device designated by (D). VAL • Converts a character string including VAL S D1 D2 decimal point designated by (S) to a 1-word BIN value and the number of decimal Decimal character VALP VALP S D1 D2 DVAL DVAL S D1 D2 string to BIN fraction digits, and stores them into devices designated by (D1) and (D2). • Converts a character string including decimal point designated by (S) to a 2-word BIN value and the number of decimal DVALP 4 DVALP S D1 D2 fraction digits, and stores them into devices designated by (D1) and (D2). App - 36 4 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category Symbol Processing details Execution condition Floating decimal ESTR ESTR S1 S2 D • Converts floating decimal point data point to designated by (S1) to character string, and character stores them in a device designated by (D). ESTRP ESTRP S1 S2 D 4 string Character string to EVAL EVAL S D decimal point Hexadecimal EVALP ASC ASC S D S D n • Converts 1-word BIN values of the device number and later designated by (S) to ASCII, and stores only n characters of them ASCP ASCP S D n HEX HEX S D n Hexadecimal BIN HEXP 3 stores them in a device designated by (D). EVALP BIN to ASCII ASCII to • Converts character string designated by (S1) to floating decimal point data, and floating at the device number designated by (D). • Converts only n ASCII characters of the device number and later designated by (S) to BIN values, and stores them at the device HEXP S D n 4 number designated by (D). App - 37 4 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details RIGHT RIGHT S D n RIGHTP RIGHTP S D n LEFT LEFT S D n LEFTP LEFTP S D n MIDR MIDR S1 D S2 MIDRP MIDRP S1 D S2 Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Category • Stores n characters from the end of a character string designated by (S) at the device designated by (D). • Stores n characters from the beginning of a 4 character string designated by (S) at the Character string processing MIDW MIDW S1 D S2 MIDWP MIDWP S1 D S2 INSTR INSTR S1 S2 D n INSTRP INSTRP S1 S2 D n device designated by (D). • Stores the designated number of characters in the character string designated by (S1) from the position designated by (S2) at the device designated by (D). • Stores the designated number of characters in the character string designated by (S1) from the position designated by (S2) at the device designated by (D). • Searches character string (S1) from the nth character of character string (S2), and Floating decimal point to BCD BCD to floating decimal point EMOD EMOD S1 S2 D EMODP EMODP S1 S2 D EREXP EREXP S1 S2 D EREXPP EREXPP S1 S2 D 4 5 stores matched positions at (D). • Converts floating decimal point data (S1) to BCD data with number of decimal fraction digits designated by (S2), and stores at 4 device designated by (D). • Converts BCD data (S1) to floating decimal point data with the number of decimal fraction digits designated by (S2), and stores at device designated by (D). App - 38 4 Category Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details SIN SIN S D SINP SINP S D COS COS S D COSP COSP S D TAN TAN S D TANP TANP S D decimal ASIN ASIN S D point ASINP ASINP S D ACOS ACOS S D ACOSP ACOSP S D ATAN ATAN S D ATANP ATANP S D RAD RAD S D RADP RADP S D DEG DEG S D DEGP DEGP S D Square SQR SQR S D root SQRP SQRP S D EXP EXP S D EXPP EXPP S D LOG LOG S D LOGP LOGP S D Trigonometric functions (Floating data) Conversion between angles and radians Exponent operations Natural logarithm Random RND series update 3 ⋅ Cos(S+1,S) (D+1,D) ⋅ Tan(S+1,S) (D+1,D) 3 3 ⋅ Sin 1(S+1,S) (D+1,D) ⋅ Cos 1(S+1,S) 3 (D+1,D) 3 ⋅ Tan 1(S+1,S) · (D+1,D) (D+1,D) (S+1,S) 3 Conversion from angles to radians · (D+1,D) (S+1,S) 3 Conversion from radians to angles ⋅ (S+1,S) 3 (D+1,D) 3 ⋅ e(S+1,S) (D+1,D) ⋅ Log e(S+1,S) 3 (D+1,D) RND D RNDP D SRND D • Generates a random number (from 0 to less than 32767) and stores it at the device generation RNDP number (D+1,D) 3 number Random ⋅ Sin(S+1,S) Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (12) Special function instructions SRND designated by (D). • Updates random number series according to the 16-bit BIN data stored in the device SRNDP SRNDP D designated by (S). App - 39 2 Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details BSQR BSQR S D Square BSQRP BSQRP S D root BDSQR BDSQR S D BDSQRP BDSQRP S D BSIN BSIN S D BSINP BSINP S D BCOS BCOS S D BCOSP BCOSP S D BTAN BTAN S D Trigonometric BTANP BTANP S D function BASIN BASIN S D BASINP BASINP S D BACOS BACOS S D BACOSP BACOSP S D BATAN BATAN S D BATANP BATANP S D · · · · · · · · (S) (S+1, S) Sin(S) Cos(S) Tan(S) Sin-1(S) Cos-1(S) Tan-1(S) App - 40 (D)+0 +1 Integral part (D)+0 +1 Integral part (D)+0 +1 +2 Sign (D)+0 +1 +2 Sign (D)+0 +1 +2 Sign (D)+0 +1 +2 Sign (D)+0 +1 +2 Sign (D)+0 +1 +2 Sign Decimal fraction Decimal fraction Integral part Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Category 3 3 3 Decimal fraction Integral part 3 Decimal fraction Integral part 3 Decimal fraction Integral part 3 Decimal fraction Integral part 3 Decimal fraction Integral part Decimal fraction 3 Category Instruction symbol Symbol Execution condition Processing details Number of basic steps Subset (13) Data control instructions • When (S3)<(S1) LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D ................Store value of (S1) at (D) • When (S1) ≤ (S2) ≤ (S3) ................Store value of (S3) at (D) Upper LIMITP LIMITP S1 S2 S3 D and controls • When (S2)<(S3) ................Store value of (S2) at (D) lower limit DLIMIT • When ((S3)+1, (S3))<((S1)+ 1, S1) DLIMIT S1 S2 S3 D .... Store value of ((S1)+1, (S1)) at ((D)+1, (D)) • When ((S1)+1, (S1)) ≤ ((S3)+1, (S3))<(S2+1, S2) .... Store value of ((S3)+1, (S3)) at ((D)+1, (D)) DLIMITP DLIMITP S1 S2 S3 D • When ((S2), (S2)+1)<((S3), (S3)+1) BAND BAND S1 S2 S3 D • When (S1) ≤ (S3) ≤ (S2) ... 0 (D) BANDP BANDP S1 S2 S3 D DBAND DBAND S1 S2 S3 D Dead band .... Store value of ((S2)+1, (S2)) at ((D)+1, (D)) • When (S3)<(S1) ............... (S3)-(S1) (D) ((S2)+1, (S2)) .................... 0 (D)+1, (D)) • When ((S3)+1, (S3))<((S1)+1, (S1)) DBANDP DBANDP S1 S2 S3 D ZONE ZONE S1 S2 S3 D ZONEP ZONEP S1 S2 S3 D DZONE DZONE S1 S2 S3 D ((D)+1, (D)) DZONEP S1 S2 S3 D 5 • When ((S2)+1, (S2))<((S3)+1, (S3)) ...((S3)+1, (S3)) - ((S2)+1, (S2)) ((D)+1, (D)) • When (S3)=0...................... 0 (D) • When (S3)>0 ..................... (S3)+(S2) (D) 5 • When (S3)<0 .................... (S3)-(S1) (D) • When ((S3)+1, (S3))=0 ...... 0 ((D)+1, (D)) • When ((S3)+1, (S3))>0 ...((S3)+1, (S3))+((S2)+1, (S2)) ((D)+1, (D)) DZONEP 5 • When (S2)<(S3) ............... (S3)-(S2) (D) ...((S3)+1, (S3)) - ((S1)+1, (S1)) controls 5 • When ((S1)+1, (S1)) ≤ ((S3)+1, (S3)) ≤ controls Zone 5 • When ((S3)+1, (S3))<0 ...((S3)+1, (S3)) + ((S1)+1, (S1)) ((D)+1, (D)) App - 41 5 Category Instruction symbol Block RSET Symbol RSET S RSETP S • Converts extension file register block number designations RSETP QDRSET QDRSET Execution condition Processing details 2 number to number designated by (S). *2 File name • Sets file names used as file registers. QDRSETP QDRSETP File name QCDSET QCDSET + n File set *2 File name • Sets file names used as file registers. QCDSETP Number of basic steps Subset (14) Switching instructions + QCDSETP File name n * :n ([number of file name characters] / 2) indicates a step. (decimal fraction is rounded up) Instruction symbol Symbol DATERD Read/ write DATERD DATERDP D DATEWR DATEWR S DATEWRP DATE+ Clock data DATE+P · (Clock element) (D)+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 DATERDP D clock data DATEWRP S DATE+ Execution condition Processing details S1 S2 D DATE+P S1 S2 D DATE S1 S2 D · (D)+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 2 Day of week (Clock element) Year Month Day Hour Min. Sec. 2 Day of week (S1) (S2) Hour Min. Sec. Year Month Day Hour Min. Sec. + (D) Hour Min. Sec. Hour Min. Sec. 4 addition/ subtraction DATE DATE Clock data transaction P DATE P S1 S2 D SECOND SECOND S D SECONDP SECONDP S D HOUR HOUR S D HOURP HOURP S D (S1) (S2) Hour Min. Sec. - (S) Hour Min. Sec. 4 (D) Hour Min. Sec. (S) Sec. (lower) Sec. (upper) App - 42 (D) Hour Min. Sec. Sec. (lower) Sec. (upper) (D) Hour Min. Sec. 3 Subset Category Number of basic steps (15) Clock instructions Category Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (16) Peripheral device instructions • Stores message designated by (S) at Input/ output to MSG MSG S QnACPU. 2 This message is displayed at the peripheral device. peripheral devices PKEY PKEY D • Data input from the peripheral device is 2 stored at device designated by (D). Category Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details PSTOP PSTOP Program name PSTOPP PSTOPP Program name POFF POFF Program name POFFP POFFP Program name PSCAN PSCAN Program name PSCANP PSCANP Program name PLOW PLOW Program name PLOWP PLOWP Program name Program control instructions • Places designated program in standby status. • Turns OUT instruction coil of designated Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset (17) Program control instructions *2 + n *2 program OFF, and places program in + standby status. n • Registers designated program as scan execution type. • Registers designated program as low speed execution type. *2 + n *2 + n *: n ([number of file name characters] / 2) indicates a step. (decimal fraction is rounded up). App - 43 Category WDT reset Timing clock Instruction symbol Symbol WDT WDT WDTP WDTP DUTY • Resets watchdog timer during sequence program. (D) DUTY Execution condition Processing details n1 scan n1 n2 D n2 scan Number of basic steps Subset (18) Other instructions 1 4 SM420 to SM424, SM430 to SM434 ZRRDB ZRRDB 0 1 2 3 n n D ZRRDBP ZRRDBP n D ZRWRB ZRWRB n S Lower 8 bits Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Higher 8 bits 8 bits ZR0 3 ZR1 (D) Direct read/write 0 1 2 3 n (S) operations in 1-byte ZRWRBP ZRWRBP n ADRSET ADRSET S Lower 8 bits Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Higher 8 bits ZR0 ZR1 3 8 bits units ADRSETP ADRSETP S D Numerical key input from save of index register Batch recovery of index register (D) Indirect address of designated device 3 Device name • Takes in ASCII data for 8 points of input KEY KEY S n D1 D2 keyboard Batch (S) S D module designated by (S), converts to hexadecimal value following device number 5 designated by (D1), and stores. ZPUSH ZPUSH D • Saves the contents of index registers Z0 to Z15 to a location starting from the device ZPUSHP ZPUSHP D designated by (D). 2 ZPOP ZPOP D • Reads the data stored in the location starting from the device designated by (D) ZPOPP ZPOPP D to index registers Z0 toZ15. Batch write EROMWR EROMWR S D1 n D2 operation • Writes a batch of data to E2PROM file to 2 E PROM file register register. EROM WRP EROMWRP S D1 n D2 App - 44 5 Category Instructions for data link Instruction symbol Symbol J.ZCOM Network refresh Processing details Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Appendix 2.4 Jn JP.ZCOM Jn ZCOM Refreshes the designated network. 5 G.ZCOM Un GP.ZCOM Un J.READ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) G.READ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) instruction: JP.READ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Reading GP.READ Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) data from J.SREAD Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) G.SREAD Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) JP.SREAD Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) GP.SREAD Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) QnA link READ another station 9 10 Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) G.WRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) instruction: JP.WRITE Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) Writing GP.WRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) data to J.SWRITE Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) other G.SWRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) JP.SWRITE Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) GP.SWRITE Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) (D3) stations station to host station. SREAD J.WRITE QnA link Reads the word device data of another WRITE 10 Writes the data of host station to the word device of other stations. 11 SWRITE QnA link J.SEND Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) instruction: G.SEND Un (S1) (S2) (D1) JP.SEND Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) GP.SEND Un (S1) (S2) (D1) QnA link J.RECV Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) instruction: G.RECV Un (S1) (S2) (D1) Receives data (message) sent to the host JP.RECV Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) station. GP.RECV Un (S1) (S2) (D1) Sending data Receiving RECV data QnA link instruction: Transient requests from other stations Sends data (message) to other stations. SEND J.REQ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) G.REQ Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) JP.REQ Jn (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) GP.REQ Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2) REQ Sends a transient request to other stations and executes it. App - 45 8 8 8 Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Category QnA link instruction: Reading JP.ZNFR Jn S1 S2 D1 data from special function Reads data from the special function ZNFR modules at remote I/O stations. 8 modules at remote GP.ZNFR Un S1 S2 D1 J.ZNTO Jn S1 S2 D JP.ZNTO Jn S1 S2 D I/O stations QnA link instruction: Writing data to special function ZNTO modules Writes data from the special function modules at remote I/O stations. G.ZNTO Un S1 S2 D GP.ZNTO Un S1 S2 D 8 at remote I/O stations A-series compatible J.ZNWR link Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2) instruction: Writing Writes the data of host station to the word ZNWR device of other stations. device data to JP.ZNWR Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2) J.ZNRD Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2) 32 other stations A-series compatible link instruction: Reading Reads the word device data of another ZNRD station to host station. device data from JP.ZNRD Jn n1 (D1) (S) n2 (D2) other stations App - 46 32 Instruction symbol Symbol Processing details Execution condition Number of basic steps Subset Category A-series compatible link G.RFRP instruction: Un n1 D1 n2 D2 Reading data from special Reads data from the special function RFRP modules at remote I/O stations. 11 function modules GP.RFRP Un n1 D1 n2 D2 at remote I/O stations A-series compatible link G.RTOP Un n1 D1 n2 D instruction: Writing data to special Writes data from the special function RTOP modules at remote I/O stations. 11 function modules GP.RTOP Un n1 D1 n2 D at remote I/O stations Reading routing information Registering routing information Z.RTREAD n D ZP.RTREAD n D Z.RTWRITE n S ZP.RTWRITE n S RTREAD RTWRITE Reads data set at routing parameters. Writes routing data to the area designated by routing parameters. App - 47 7 8 Reading Instruction symbol UNIRD Symbol Processing details • Reads the module information stored in the UNIRD n1 D n2 area starting from the I/O No. designated by module (n) by the points designated by (n2), and information stores it in the area starting from the device UNIRDP Execution condition UNIRDP n1 D n2 4 designated by (d). • Stores the trace data set with peripheral Trace set TRACE TRACE device, by the number of times set when SM800, SM801and SM802 turn on, to the 1 sampling trace file in the IC memory card. Trace reset TRACER TRACER • Resets the data set by TRACE instruction. 1 • Writes data to the designated file. 11 • Reads data from the designated file. 11 Writing data to SP.FW designated RITE SP.FWRITE U0 S0 D0 S1 S2 D1 file Reading data from designated SP.FREAD SP.FREAD U0 S0 D0 S1 S2 D1 file Loading program from • Transfers the program stored in a memory PLOADP PLOADP S D memory card or standard memory (other than drive 0) to drive 0 and places the program in 3 standby status. Unloading program from program PUNLO ADP PUNLOADP S D • Deletes the standby program stored in standard memory (drive 0). 3 memory • Deletes standby program stored in standard memory (drive 0) designated by (S1). Then, Load + unload PSWAPP PSWAPP S1 S2 D transfers the program stored in a memory card or standard memory (other than drive 4 0) designated by (S2) to drive 0 and places it in standby status. High-speed block transfer of file register RBMOV RBMOV S D n • Transfers n points of 16-bit data from the device designated by (S) to the location RBMOVP RBMOVP S D n starting from the device designated by (D). App - 48 4 Subset Category QCPU instructions Number of basic steps Appendix 2.5 Symbol Processing details Execution condition Write to host S.TO S.TO n1 n2 n3 n4 D station the shared memory area of the host station CPU shared • Writes the device data of the host station to 5 CPU module. S.TOP S.TOP n1 n2 n3 n4 D FROM FROM n1 n2 D n3 memory Read from another station memory area of another station CPU CPU shared • Reads device data from the CPU shared FROMP 5 module to the host station. FROMP n1 n2 D n3 memory Automatic • Performs the automatic refresh of the refresh of CPU shared memory COM COM intelligent function module, general data processing, and the automatic refresh of the CPU shared memory. App - 49 1 Subset Instruction symbol Number of basic steps Category Appendix 3 Special Relay List Special relays, SM, are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the PLC. For this reason, they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays. However, they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU and remote I/O modules. The headings in the list that follows have the following meanings. Item Function of item • Indicates the number of the special relay. • Indicates the name of the special relay. • Indicates the contents of the special relay. • Contains detailed information about the contents of the special relay. • Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and when setting is performed if it is set by the system. <Set by> S: Set by system U: Set by user (in sequence program or test operation at a peripheral device) S/U: Set by both system and user <When set> Set by indicated only if setting is done by system. (When set) Each END: Set during each END processing Initial: Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or when going from STOP to RUN) Status change: Set only when there is a change in status Error occurrence: Set when error is generated Instruction execution: Set when instruction is executed Request: Set only when there is request from a user(through SM, etc.) Correspondi • Indicates special relay (M9 ) corresponding to the ACPU. ng ACPU (Indicates as "Change" when there has been a change in contents) M9 • Items indicated as "New" have been newly added for Q/QnACPU Indicates the applicable CPU type name. + Rem: Indicates all the CPU and MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules. : Indicates all types of CPU Applicable QCPU: Indicates the Q-series CPU CPU QnA: Indicates the QnA series and Q2ASCPU. Remote: Indicates the MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules. Each CPU type name: Indicates the relevant specific CPU module. (Example: Q4ARCPU, Q3ACPU) No. name Meaning Explanation For details on the following items, refer to these manuals: • Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) • Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network) • For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual • SFC QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC) • Networks POINT (1) SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU. These relays are vacant with QCPU. (2) SM1500 or later is exclusively used for Q4ARCPU. App - 50 Special Relay List Name Meaning SM0 Diagnostic errors OFF: No error ON: Error SM1 Self-diagnostic error OFF: No self-diagnosis errors ON: Self-diagnosis SM5 SM16 SM50 OFF: No error common information ON: Error common information OFF: No error common Error individual information information ON: Error common information ON: Error reset OFF Error reset Error common information SM51 Battery low latch OFF: Normal ON: Battery low SM52 Battery low OFF: Normal ON: Battery low SM53 AC DOWN detection OFF: AC DOWN not detected ON: AC DOWN detected SM54 MINI link errors OFF: Normal ON: Error SM56 Operation errors OFF: Normal ON: Operation error SM60 Fuse blown detection OFF: Normal ON: Module with fuse blown SM61 I/O module OFF: Normal verification error ON: Error SM62 Annunciator detection SM80 CHK detection SM90 SM91 SM92 SM93 SM94 SM95 SM96 SM97 SM98 SM99 OFF: ON: OFF: ON: Not detected Detected Not detected Detected Startup of watchdog timer OFF: Not started (watchdog timer for step transition reset) (Enabled only ON: Started (watchdog when SFC timer started) program exists) Detection of SM120 external power supply OFF OFF: Normal ON: There is a module whose external power supply is OFF. Explanation Set by (When set) • ON if diagnosis results show error occurrence (Includes the S (Error annunciator being ON and detecting an error by CHK instruction) occurrence) • Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored • Comes ON when an error occurs as a result of self-diagnosis. (excludes the annunciator being ON and detecting an error by CHK S (Error instruction) occurrence) • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. New M9008 • When SM0 is ON, ON if there is error common information S (Error occurrence) New • When SM0 is ON, ON if there is error individual information S (Error occurrence) New U New S (Error occurrence) M9007 S (Error occurrence) M9006 S (Error occurrence) M9005 • Performs error reset operation • ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below rated value. Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. • Synchronizes with the BAT. ALARM/BAT. LED. • Same as SM51, but goes OFF subsequently when battery voltage returns to normal. • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply module. Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module. Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module. Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. • Goes ON if MINI (S3) link error is detected at even one of the installed MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master modules. Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. • ON when operation error is generated • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. • Comes ON even if there is only one output module with a fuse blown, and remains ON even after return to normal • Fuse blown state is checked even for remote I/O station output modules. • Comes ON if there is a discrepancy between the actual I/O modules and the registered information when the power is turned on, and remains ON even after return to normal. • I/O module verification is also performed for remote I/O station modules. • Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON. + Rem QCPU QnA S (Error occurrence) M9004 S (Error occurrence) M9011 S (Error occurrence) M9000 QnA + Rem S (Error occurrence) S (Instruction execution) S (Instruction execution) • Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction. • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. Corresponds to SD90 Corresponds to SD91 Corresponds to SD92 Corresponds to SD93 • Goes ON when measurement of step transition watchdog timer is commenced. Corresponds to SD94 U Corresponds to SD95 • Resets step transition watchdog timer when it goes OFF. Corresponds to SD96 Corresponds to SD97 Corresponds to SD98 Corresponds to SD99 • Goes ON when at least one module is in the status where the external power supply is OFF. Remains ON even after return to S (Error normal. occurrence) *Applicable only for Q-series module. (For future use) App - 51 Corresponding CPU No. Corresponding ACPU M9 (1) Diagnostic information M9002 M9009 New M9108 M9109 M9110 M9111 M9112 M9113 M9114 New New New New QCPU remote Special Relay List SM202 Name LED OFF command Meaning OFF ON: LED OFF Explanation • When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the LEDs corresponding to the individual bits at SD202 go off SM203 STOP contact STOP status • Goes ON at STOP status SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status • Goes ON at PAUSE status SM205 STEP-RUN contact STEP-RUN status • Goes ON at STEP-RUN status OFF: PAUSE disabled • If this relay is ON when the remote PAUSE contact goes ON, the ON: PAUSE enabled PAUSE state is entered. OFF: Device test not yet Device test request executed • Comes ON when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer. acceptance status ON: Device test executed • When this relay goes from OFF to ON and after END instruction Clock data set OFF: Ignored execution of subsequent scan, clock data stored in SD210 to SD213 request ON: Set request are written to the CPU module. OFF: No error • ON when error is generated in clock data (SD210 to SD213) value, Clock data error ON: Error and OFF if no error is detected. • Displays clock data as month, day, hour, minute, and second at the OFF: Ignored LED display at front of CPU module.(Enabled only for Q3ACPU and Time data display ON: Display Q4ACPU) Clock data read OFF: Ignored • When this relay is ON, clock data is read to SD210 through SD213 as request ON: Read request BCD values. OFF: No. 1 CPU reset • Goes OFF when reset of the No. 1 CPU is canceled. • Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is resetting (including the case where cancel No. 1 CPU reset the PLC is removed from the base). ON: No. 1 CPU flag The other PLCs are also put in reset status. resetting OFF: No. 2 CPU reset • Goes OFF when reset of the No. 2 CPU is canceled. • Comes ON when the No. 2 CPU is resetting (including the case where cancel No. 2 CPU reset the PLC is removed from the base). ON: No. 2 CPU flag The other PLCs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: 7000). resetting OFF: No. 3 CPU reset • Goes OFF when reset of the No. 3 CPU is canceled. • Comes ON when the No. 3 CPU is resetting (including the case where cancel No. 3 CPU reset the PLC is removed from the base). ON: No. 3 CPU flag The other PLCs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: 7000). resetting OFF: No. 4 CPU reset • Goes OFF when reset of the No. 4 CPU is canceled. • Comes ON when the No. 4 CPU is resetting (including the case where cancel No. 4 CPU reset the PLC is removed from the base). flag ON: No. 4 CPU The other PLCs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error code: 7000). resetting OFF: No. 1 CPU normal • Goes OFF when the No. 1 CPU is normal (including a continuation No. 1 CPU error error). ON: No. 1 CPU during flag • Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is during a stop error. stop error OFF: No. 2 CPU normal • Goes OFF when the No. 2 CPU is normal (including a continuation No. 2 CPU error error). ON: No. 2 CPU during flag • Comes ON when the No. 2 CPU is during a stop error. stop error OFF: No. 3 CPU normal • Goes OFF when the No. 3 CPU is normal (including a continuation No. 3 CPU error ON: No. 3 CPU during error). flag stop error • Comes ON when the No. 3 CPU is during a stop error. OFF: No. 4 CPU normal • Goes OFF when the No. 4 CPU is normal (including a continuation No. 4 CPU error error). ON: No. 4 CPU during flag • Comes ON when the No. 4 CPU is during a stop error. stop error Max. loaded I/O OFF: Ignored • When this relay goes from OFF to ON, maximum loaded I/O number is read ON: Read read to SD250. • By turning this relay ON after setting the head I/O number of the replaced I/O module to SD251, the I/O module can be replaced online (with power on). (Only one module can be replaced for each setting.) OFF: No replacement • Turn this relay ON in the test mode of the program or peripheral device I/O change flag for an I/O module change during RUN, or in the test mode of the ON: Replacement peripheral device for an I/O change during STOP. • Do not execute a RUN/STOP mode change until I/O module change is finished. OFF: Replacement prohibited • Goes ON when I/O replacement is OK. I/O change OK ON: Replacement enabled OFF: Refresh arrival • Effective for the batch refresh (also effective for the low speed cyclic) station All stations refresh • Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or to receive all slave command ON: Refresh all stations. stations PAUSE enable coil SM206 SM210 SM211 SM212 SM213 SM240 SM241 SM242 SM243 SM244 SM245 SM246 SM247 SM250 SM251 SM252 SM254 App - 52 Set by (When set) U New S (Status change) S (Status change) S (Status change) Corresponding CPU No. Corresponding ACPU M9 (2) System information M9042 M9041 M9054 U M9040 S (Request) New U M9025 remote S M9026 (Request) Q3A Q4A Q4AR + Rem U M9027 U M9028 S (Status change) New QCPU function Ver. B U New + Rem U (END) M9094 S (END) New U (Every END processing) New Q2A(S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR QCPU Name SM255 MELSECNET/10 module 1 SM256 information SM257 SM260 MELSECNET/10 module 2 SM261 information SM262 SM265 MELSECNET/10 SM266 module 3 information SM267 SM270 MELSECNET/10 module 4 SM271 information SM272 SM280 CC-Link error SM320 Presence/absence of SFC program SM321 Start/stop SFC program SM322 SFC program start status SM323 Presence/absence of continuous transition for entire block Continuous SM324 transition prevention flag SM325 Output mode at block stop SM326 SFC device clear mode SM327 Output during end step execution Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) • Goes ON for standby network (If no designation has been made concerning active or standby, active S (Initial) is assumed.) OFF: Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not read read from the link module. OFF: Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not write write to the link module. • Goes ON for standby network OFF: Operative network (If no designation has been made concerning active or standby, active S (Initial) ON: Standby network is assumed.) OFF: Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not read read from the link module. OFF: Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not write write to the link module. OFF: Operative network • Goes ON for standby network (If no designation has been made S (Initial) ON: Standby network concerning active or standby, active is assumed.) OFF: Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not read read from the link module. OFF: Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not write write to the link module. • Goes ON for standby network OFF: Operative network (If no designation has been made concerning active or standby, active S (Initial) ON: Standby network is assumed.) ) OFF: Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not read read from the link module. OFF: Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.), designate whether to U ON: Does not write write to the link module. • Goes ON when a CC-Link error is detected in any of the installed S (Status QJ61QBT11. Goes OFF when normal operation is restored. change) OFF: Normal ON: Error • Goes ON when a CC-Link error is detected in any of the installed S (Error A(1S)J61QBT11. Stays ON even after normal operation is restored. occurrence) OFF: SFC programs not used • Turns ON when an SFC program is registered S (Initial) ON: SFC programs • OFF when an SFC program is not registered. used • Initial value is set at the same value as SM320. (Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present.) OFF: SFC programs S (Initial) • Turn this relay OFF before the SFC program processing to suspend stop U SFC program. ON: SFC programs • Turn this relay from OFF to ON to start program execution. start • Turn this relay from ON to OFF to stop program execution. • Initial value can be ON or OFF by setting the parameter. • Turns this relay off to clear execution status of SFC program when SFC program is stopped. The block which received a start request S (Initial) OFF: Initial Start starts from its initial step. U ON: Continue • Turn this relay on to make the execution block restart from the execution step that was suspended when SFC program was stopped. (ON is valid only when Continue is specified in the parameter.) • SM902 is not automatically latch-specified. • Turn this relay off to make all the blocks take 1 step per 1 scan. OFF: Continuous • Turn this relay on to make all the blocks take steps continuously at 1 transition not U scan. effective • For specifying blocks, the continuous transition bit takes priority. ON: Continuous transition effective (Specification is checked when a block is started.) OFF: When transition is • OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode, and ON S during continuous transition or when continuous transition is not executed (Instruction executed. ON: When no execution) • Always ON during operation in the no continuous transition mode. transition Selects the operational outputs of the active steps at the time of a block S (Initial) stop. OFF: OFF U • All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF. ON: Preserves • Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON. Selects the device status when the stopped CPU restarts running after OFF: Clear device the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the U ON: Preserves device SFC program exists. Selects operation output of held steps when terminating a block by end step execution. S (Initial) OFF: OFF • All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF. U ON: Hold • Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON. OFF: Operative network ON: Standby network App - 53 Corresponding CPU No. Corresponding ACPU M9 Special Relay List (Continued) New New New New New New New New New New New New New QCPU remote New QnA M9100 M9101 format change M9102 format change M9103 M9104 M9196 New New Set by (When set) U (END) New S (Status change) New Set by (When set) • Always ON S(Every END processing) M9036 • Always OFF S(Every END processing) M9037 S(Every END processing) M9038 S(Every END processing) M9039 S(Every END processing) New S(Every END processing) New S (Status change) New Meaning Explanation • Asynchronous mode Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution type program is performed continuously within the excess Operation mode for low OFF: Asynchronous time. SM330 speed execution type mode • Synchronous mode program ON: Synchronous mode Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution type program is not performed continuously and operation is performed from the next scan even if there is excess time. • The status of the intelligent function module access instruction executed immediately before is stored. ON indicates completion (This data is overwritten when the intelligent function SM390 Access execution flag of intelligent function module access module access instruction is executed again.) • Used by the user in a program as a completion bit. Corresponding CPU Name Corresponding ACPU M9 No. Corresponding ACPU M9 Special Relay List (Continued) QCPU No. Name SM400 Always ON SM401 Always OFF Meaning ON OFF ON OFF SM402 After RUN, ON for 1 scan only ON OFF 1 scan SM403 OFF for 1 scan only after RUN ON OFF 1 scan ON OFF 1 scan ON OFF 1 scan ON for 1 scan only after SM404 low speed execution type program RUN OFF for 1 scan only after low speed SM405 execution type program RUN SM409 0.01 second clock SM410 0.1 second clock SM411 0.2 second clock SM412 1 second clock SM413 2 second clock SM414 2n second clock SM415 2n (ms) clock SM420 SM421 SM422 SM423 SM424 SM430 SM431 SM432 SM433 SM434 User timing clock No. 0 User timing clock No. 1 User timing clock No. 2 User timing clock No. 3 User timing clock No. 4 User timing clock No. 5 User timing clock No. 6 User timing clock No. 7 User timing clock No. 8 User timing clock No. 9 0.005 sec. Explanation • After RUN, ON for 1 scan only • This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only. • After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only • This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only. • After RUN, ON for 1 scan only • This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only. • After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only • This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only. • Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5-ms interval. • When turned OFF or reset, goes from OFF to start. 0.005 sec. 0.05 sec. 0.05 sec. S (Status change) n sec. • Alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of seconds specified in SD414. S (Status change) n(ms) • Alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of the time (unit: ms) specified in SD415. S (Status change) New S (Every END processing) M9020 M9021 M9022 M9023 M9024 S (Every END processing) New 0.1 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 1 sec. n(ms) • Relay repeats ON/OFF switching at fixed scan intervals. • When turned ON or reset, goes from OFF to start. • The ON/OFF intervals are set with the DUTY instruction. n2 scan n2 scan DUTY n1 n2 SM420 n1 scan • For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs App - 54 M9031 M9032 M9033 1 sec. n sec. QCPU M9030 • Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each designated time interval. • When turned OFF or reset, goes from OFF to start. Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program.) 0.1 sec. Corresponding CPU (3) System clocks/counters M9034 format change QCPU Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU M9 Name S(Every END processing) New U New Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU M9 No. Corresponding CPU (4) Scan information • ON when memory card is ready for use by user. S (Initial) New • Goes ON when memory card protect switch is ON. S (Initial) New • Turns ON when the mounted memory card is RAM. S (Initial) New • Turns ON when the mounted memory card is ROM. S (Initial) New • Goes ON when memory card is in use. S (Initial) New U New U/S New S (Initial) New QCPU Meaning Explanation SM510 Low speed program execution flag OFF: Completed or not executed ON: Execution under way • Goes ON when low speed execution type program is executed. SM551 Reads module service interval OFF: Ignored ON: Read • When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the module service interval designated by SD550 is read to SD551 through 552. + Rem No. Name Memory card usable flag Memory card protect SM601 flag SM600 SM602 Drive 1 flag SM603 Drive 2 flag Memory card in-use SM604 flag Memory card SM605 remove/insert prohibit flag Memory card SM609 remove/insert enable flag Meaning OFF: ON: OFF: ON: OFF: ON: OFF: ON: OFF: ON: OFF: Not available Available No protect Protect No drive 1 Drive 1 No drive 2 Drive 2 Not used In use Remove/insert enabled ON: Remove/insert prohibited OFF: Remove/insert disabled ON: Remove/insert enabled Explanation • Goes ON when memory card cannot be inserted or removed. • Turned ON by user to enable the removal/insertion of memory card. • Turned OFF by the system after the memory card is removed. • Always ON SM620 SM621 Memory card B usable OFF: Not available flag ON: Available Memory card B protect OFF: No protect flag ON: Protect SM622 Drive 3 flag SM623 Drive 4 flag SM624 Memory card B in-use flag Memory card B SM625 remove/insert prohibit flag Corresponding CPU (5) Memory cards • ON when memory card B is ready for use by user. S (Initial) New Q2A (S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR • Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU • Goes ON when memory card B protect switch is ON. S (Initial) New Q2A (S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR • Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU • Goes ON when drive 3 (card 2 RAM area) is present. S (Initial) New Q2A (S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR • Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU • Goes ON when drive 4 (card 2 ROM area) is present. S (Initial) New OFF: Not used ON: In use • Goes ON when memory card B is in use. S (Initial) New OFF: Remove/insert enabled ON: Remove/insert prohibited • Goes ON when memory card B cannot be inserted or removed. U New OFF: No drive 3 ON: Drive 3 OFF: No drive 4 ON: Drive 4 App - 55 Q2A (S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR SM640 File register use SM650 Comment use SM660 Boot operation Memory card A file SM672 register access range flag Memory card B file SM673 register access range flag OFF: File register not used ON: File register in use OFF: Comment not used ON: Comment in use OFF: Internal memory execution ON: Boot operation in progress OFF: Within access range ON: Outside access range OFF: Within access range ON: Outside access range Set by (When set) • Goes ON when file register is in use. S (Status change) New • Goes ON when comment file is in use. S (Status change) New • Goes ON while boot operation is in process. • Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF. S (Status change) New S/U New Explanation • Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range of file register R of memory card A. (Set within END processing.) • Reset at user program. • Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range of file register R of memory card B. (Set within END processing.) • Reset at user program. S/U New Set by (When set) S (Instruction execution) M9012 Corresponding CPU Meaning Corresponding ACPU M9 Name Corresponding ACPU M9 No. Q2A (S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR No. Name SM700 Carry flag SM701 Number of output characters selection SM702 Search method SM703 Sort order SM704 Block comparisons Selection of real SM707 number instructions processing type SM710 SM711 SM712 SM714 SM715 SM720 SM721 SM722 Meaning OFF: Carry OFF ON: Carry ON OFF: Outputs until NUL ON: 16 characters output OFF: ON: OFF: ON: OFF: ON: Search next 2-part search Ascending order Descending order Non-match found All match OFF: Speed oriented ON: Accuracy oriented CHK instruction priority OFF: Conditions priority ranking flag ON: Pattern priority OFF: Other than during divided Divided transmission processing status ON: During divided processing OFF: Batch processing Transmission ON: Divided processing selection processing OFF: Communication request to remote terminal module Communication request enabled registration area BUSY ON: Communication signal request to remote terminal module disabled 0: During DI EI flag 1: During EI OFF: Comment read not completed Comment read ON: Comment read completion flag completed OFF: File not accessed File being accessed ON: File being accessed BIN/DBIN instruction OFF: Error OK error disabling flag ON: Error NG Explanation • Carry flag used in application instruction • When SM701 is OFF, output conducted until NUL (00H) code is encountered. U • When SM701 is OFF, 16 characters of ASCII code are output. • Designates method to be used by search instruction. U • Data must be arranged for 2-part search. • The sort instruction is used to designate whether data U should be sorted in ascending order or in descending order. • Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for the S (Instruction BKCMP instruction. execution) • When SM707 is OFF, real number instructions are processed at high speed. U • When it is ON, real number instructions are processed with high accuracy. • Remains as originally set when OFF. S (Instruction • CHK priorities updated when ON. execution) Corresponding CPU (6) Instruction-related special relays M9049 New New New New Q4AR New • In processing of AD57(S1), goes ON when canvas screen is S (Instruction divided for transfer, and goes OFF when split processing is execution) completed. M9065 • In processing of AD57(S1), goes ON when canvas screen is S (Instruction divided for transfer. execution) M9066 QnA • Used to determine whether communications requests to S (Instruction remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32-S3 execution) can be executed or not. M9081 S (Instruction execution) New • Turns on only during one scan when the processing of the COMRD or PRC instruction is completed. S (Status change) New • Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S.FWRITE, S. FREAD, COMRD, PRC, or LEDC instruction. S (Status change) New • Turned ON when "OPERATION ERROR" is suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction. U New • ON when EI instruction is being executed. App - 56 QCPU BUSY signal for CCLink SM730 communication request registration area PKEY instruction SM736 execution in progress flag Keyboard input SM737 reception flag for PKEY instruction SM738 MSG instruction reception flag SM774 PID bumpless processing Selection of link refresh SM775 processing during COM instruction execution SM776 Enable/disable local device at CALL Enable/disable local SM777 device in interrupt program SM780 CC-Link dedicated instruction executable Meaning OFF: Request for communication wit intelligent device station enabled ON: Request for communication wit intelligent device station disabled OFF: Instruction not executed ON: Instruction execution OFF: Keyboard input reception enabled ON: Keyboard input reception disabled OFF: Instruction not executed ON: Instruction execution OFF: Forces match ON: Does not force match OFF: Performs link refresh ON: Performs no link refresh OFF: Local device disabled ON: Local device enabled OFF: Local device disabled ON: Local device enabled OFF: CC-Link dedicated instruction executable ON: CC-Link dedicated instruction not executable Set by (When set) Corresponding CPU Name Corresponding ACPU M9 No. S (Instruction execution) New QnA • ON when PKEY instruction is being executed. S (Instruction Goes OFF when CR is input, or when input character string execution) reaches 32 characters. New • Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted. Goes OFF when keyboard input has been stored at the CPU. S (Instruction execution) New • Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed. S (Instruction execution) New • Specify whether the set value (SV) will be matched with the process value (PV) in the manual mode. U New • Select whether link refresh processing will be performed or not when only general data is processed at the execution of the COM instruction. U New • Set whether the local device of the subroutine program called at execution of the CALL instruction is valid or invalid. U (Status change) New • Set whether the local device at execution of the interrupt program is valid or invalid. U (Status change) New • Switches ON when the number of the CC-Link dedicated instructions that can be executed simultaneously reaches 32. Switches OFF when the number goes below 32. U (Status change) New Set by (When set) Explanation • Used for determination whether to enable or disable the communication request for the intelligent device station connected with A(1S)J61QBT11. QnA Name Trace preparation SM800 Sampling trace preparation Trace start SM801 Sampling trace start Trace execution in progress SM802 Sampling trace execution in progress Meaning OFF: Not ready ON: READY OFF: Suspend ON: Start OFF: Suspend ON: Start Trace trigger OFF SM803 ON: Start Sampling trace trigger After trace trigger SM804 After sampling trace trigger OFF: Not after trigger ON: After trigger Explanation • Switches ON when the trace preparation is completed. • Switches ON when the sampling trace preparation is completed. • Trace started when this goes ON. • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF) • Sampling trace started when this goes ON. • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF) • Switches ON during execution of trace. • Switches ON during execution of sampling trace. • Trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF to ON. (Identical to TRACE instruction execution status) • Sampling trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF to ON. (Identical to STRA instruction execution status) • Switches After trace is triggered. • Switches After sampling trace is triggered. App - 57 Corresponding CPU No. Corresponding ACPU M9 (7) Debug New QCPU New QnA U M9047 QCPU U M9047 QnA M9046 QCPU M9046 QnA U M9044 QCPU U M9044 QnA New QCPU New QnA S (Status change) S (Status change) S (Status change) S (Status change) S (Status change) S (Status change) Trace completed SM805 SM806 Sampling trace completed Status latch preparation • Switches ON at completion of trace. S (Status change) M9043 QCPU • Switches ON at completion of sampling trace. S (Status change) M9043 QnA • Goes ON when status latch is ready. S (Status change) New Meaning OFF: Not completed ON: End OFF: Not ready ON: READY SM807 Status latch command OFF Status latch completion Set by (When set) Corresponding CPU Name Corresponding ACPU M9 No. ON: Latch Explanation • Runs status latch command OFF: Not ready ON: Ready • Goes ON when program trace is ready. SM809 Status latch clear OFF • Enable next status latch Program trace SM810 preparation OFF: Not ready ON: READY SM811 Start program trace SM808 ON: Clear U New S (Status change) M9055 U New • Goes ON when program trace is ready. S (Status change) New OFF: Suspend ON: Start • Program trace started when this goes ON. • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF) S (Status change) New Program trace SM812 execution under way OFF: Suspend ON: Start • ON when program trace execution is underway. U New SM813 Program trace trigger OFF • Program trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF to ON. (Identical to PTRA instruction execution status) S (Status change) New ON: Start SM814 After program trace trigger OFF: Not after trigger ON: After trigger • Goes ON after program trace trigger. S (Status change) New SM815 Program trace completion OFF: Not completed ON: End • Goes ON at completion of program trace. S (Status change) New SM820 Step trace preparation OFF: Not ready ON: READY • Goes ON after step trace is registered and ready. U New SM821 Step trace starts OFF: Suspend ON: Start • When this goes ON, step trace is started. • Suspended when OFF (Related special M all OFF) S (Status change) M9182 format change OFF: Suspend ON: Start • Goes ON when step trace execution is underway. • Goes OFF at completion or suspension. S (Status change) M9181 S (Status change) New S (Status change) New • Goes ON at step trace completion. • Goes OFF when step trace is started. S (Status change) M9180 • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace. S (Status change) New • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of sampling trace. S (Status change) New SM822 Step trace execution underway • Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being OFF: Not after trigger SM823 After step trace trigger executed is triggered. ON: Is after first trigger • Goes OFF when step trace is started. • Goes ON if all blocks within the step trace being executed OFF: Is not after all triggers SM824 After step trace trigger are triggered. ON: Is after all triggers • Goes OFF when step trace is started. SM825 Step trace completed Trace error SM826 QCPU SM827 Status latch error OFF: Normal ON: Errors • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of status latch. S (Status change) New SM828 Program trace error OFF: Normal ON: Errors • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of program trace. S (Status change) New Set by (When set) Corresponding CPU OFF: Normal ON: Errors Corresponding ACPU M9 Sampling trace error OFF: Not completed ON: End QnA S/U (Status change) New QnA S (Instruction execution) New QnA (8) Latch area No. Name Meaning Explanation SM900 Power cut file OFF OFF: No power cut file • Goes ON if a file being accessed is present when power is ON: Power cut file present disconnected. SM910 RKEY registration flag OFF: Keyboard input not registered ON: Keyboard input registered • Goes ON at registration of keyboard input. OFF if keyboard input is not registered. App - 58 (9) A to Q/QnA conversion correspondences Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q/QnA conversion. These special relays are all set by the system, and cannot be set by the user program. To turn them ON/OFF by the user program, change the special relays in the program into those of QCPU/QnACPU. However, some of SM1084 and SM1200 to SM1255 (corresponding to M9084 and M9200 to M9255 before conversion) can be turned ON/OFF by the user program, if they could be turned ON/OFF by the user program before conversion. For details on the ACPU special relays, see the user's manuals for the individual CPUs, and MELSECNET or MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference Manuals. POINT The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with the QCPU. Uncheck "A-series CPU compatibility setting" within the PC system setting in GX Developer parameters when converted special relays are not used. REMARK The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column. 1) When a special relay for modification is provided, the device number should be changed to the provided QCPU/QnACPU special relay. 2) When is provided, the converted special relay can be used for the device number. 3) When is provided, the device number does not work with QCPU/QnACPU. Special Special ACPU Relay for Special Relay after Relay Conversion Modification Name Meaning M9000 SM1000 –––– Fuse blown OFF: Normal ON: Module with blown fuse M9002 SM1002 –––– I/O module verification error OFF: Normal ON: Error M9004 SM1004 –––– MINI link error OFF: Normal ON: Error M9005 SM1005 –––– AC DOWN detection OFF: AC DOWN not detected ON: AC DOWN detected M9006 SM1006 –––– Battery low OFF: Normal ON: Battery low M9007 SM1007 –––– Battery low latch OFF: Normal ON: Battery low M9008 SM1008 Self-diagnostic error OFF: No error ON: Error SM1 Details • Turned on when there is one or more output modules of which fuse has been blown, and remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. Output modules of remote I/O stations are also checked fore fuse condition. • Turned on if the status of I/O module is different form entered status when power is turned on, and remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. I/O module verification is also performed for remote I/O station modules. Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to SD1123 are reset. • Goes ON if MINI (S3) link error is detected at even one of the installed MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master modules, and remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply module. Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module. Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module. Reset when power is switched OFF, then ON. • Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the specified, and turns OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. • Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the specified, and remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. • Turned on when error is found as a result of self-diagnosis. App - 59 Corresponding CPU Special Relay List QnA Special Special ACPU Relay for Special Relay after Relay Conversion Modification Name Meaning OFF: No F number detected ON: F number Detected M9009 SM1009 SM62 Annunciator detection M9011 SM1011 SM56 Operation error OFF: No error flag ON: Error M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag OFF: Carry OFF ON: Carry ON M9016 SM1016 Data memory clear flag OFF: Ignored ON: Output cleared M9017 SM1017 Data memory clear flag OFF: Ignored ON: Output cleared M9020 SM1020 –––– M9021 SM1021 –––– M9022 SM1022 –––– User timing clock No. 0 User timing clock No. 1 User timing clock No. 2 User timing clock No. 3 User timing clock No. 4 Details • Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is executed. Switched off when SD1124 data is zeroed. • Turns on when operation error occurs during execution of application instruction, and remains ON even if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. n2 scan • Carry flag used in application instruction n2 scan • Clears the data memory including the latch range (other than special relays and special registers) in remote run mode from computer, etc. when SM1016 is on. • Clears the unlatched data memory (other than special relays and special registers) in remote run mode from computer, etc. when SM1017 is on. • Relay which repeats on/off at intervals of predetermined scan. • When power is turned on or reset is per-formed, the clock starts with off. • Set the intervals of on/off by DUTY instruction. n1 scan M9023 SM1023 –––– M9024 SM1024 –––– M9025 SM1025 –––– Clock data set request M9026 SM1026 –––– Clock data error OFF: Ignored ON: Set request present used OFF: No error ON: Error M9027 SM1027 –––– Time data display OFF: Ignored ON: Display M9028 SM1028 –––– Clock data read request OFF: Ignored ON: Read request Batch OFF: Batch processing not processing of conducted data ON: Batch processing communication conducted s requests M9029 SM1029 M9030 SM1030 –––– 0.1 second clock 0.05 sec. 0.05 sec. M9031 SM1031 –––– 0.2 second clock 0.1 sec. 0.1 sec. M9032 SM1032 –––– 1 second clock 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. M9033 SM1033 –––– 2 second clock 1 sec. 1 sec. M9034 SM1034 –––– 1 minute clock 30 sec. 30 sec. M9036 SM1036 –––– Always ON M9037 SM1037 –––– Always OFF M9038 SM1038 –––– ON for 1 scan only after RUN M9039 SM1039 –––– M9040 SM1040 SM206 M9041 SM1041 SM204 RUN flag (After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only) PAUSE enable coil PAUSE status contact Corresponding CPU Special Relay List (Continued) • 0.1 second, 0.2 second, 1 second and 2 second, clocks are generated. • Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even during scan if corresponding time has elapsed. • Starts with off when power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed. 1 scan 1 scan OFF: ON: OFF: ON: • Writes the clock data stored in SD1025 to SD1028 to the CPU module after the END instruction is executed in the scan in which SM1025 turned from OFF to ON. • Switched ON by clock data (SD1025 to SD1028) error, and OFF if no error is detected. • Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month, day, hour, minute and minute are indicated on the CPU module front LED display. • Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when SD1028 is on. • The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program to process all data communication requests accepted during one scan in the END processing of that scan. • The batch processing of the data communication requests can be turned on and off during running. • The default is OFF (processed one at a time for each END processing in the order in which data communication requests are accepted).) PAUSE disabled PAUSE enabled PAUSE not in effect PAUSE in effect • Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application instruction in sequence program. • SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without regard to position of key switch on CPU module front. SM1038 and SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN status except when the key switch is at STOP position, and turned off and on. Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position. SM1038 is on for one scan only and SM1039 is off for one scan only if the key switch is not in STOP position. • When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or pause contact has turned on and if SM204 is on, PAUSE mode is set and SM206 is turned on. App - 60 ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Relay Conversion Modification M9042 M9043 SM1042 SM1043 STOP status contact SM805 OFF: Sampling trace in progress Sampling trace ON: Sampling trace completed completed SM1044 M9045 SM1045 M9046 SM1046 SM802 M9047 SM1047 SM801 M9049 SM1049 SM701 M9051 SM1051 M9052 SM1052 M9054 SM1054 SM205 M9055 SM1055 SM808 M9056 SM1056 M9057 SM1057 M9058 SM1058 M9059 SM1059 M9060 SM1060 M9061 SM1061 M9065 SM1065 SM1066 M9070 SM1070 Meaning SM203 M9044 M9066 Name SM803 OFF→ON: Same as STRA execution Sampling trace ON→OFF: Same as STRAR execution Watchdog timer (WDT) reset SM712 OFF: Does not reset WDT ON: Resets WDT OFF: Trace not in progress ON: Trace in progress OFF: Sampling trace Sampling trace suspended preparations ON: Sampling trace started Selection of OFF: Output until NUL number of encountered characters ON: 16 characters output output CHG instruction OFF: Enabled execution ON: Disable disable Sampling trace SEG instruction switch SM711 OFF: STOP not in effect ON: STOP in effect OFF: 7SEG segment display ON: I/O partial refresh OFF: STEP RUN not in effect ON: STEP RUN in effect Status latch OFF: Not completed completion flag ON: Completed OFF: Other than when P, I Main side P, I set being requested set request ON: P, I set being requested OFF: Other than when P, I Sub side P, I set being requested set request ON: P, I set being requested Main side P, I Momentarily ON at P, I set set request completion Sub program Momentarily ON at P, I set P, I set completion completion OFF: Other than when P, I Sub program 2 set being requested P, I set request ON: P, I set being requested OFF: Other than when P, I Sub program 3 set being requested P, I set request ON: P, I set being requested OFF: Divided processing Divided not underway execution ON: During divided detection processing Divided OFF: Batch processing processing ON: Divided processing request flag A8UPU/A8PUJ OFF: Read time not required shortened search time ON: Read time shortened STEP RUN flag Details Corresponding CPU Special Relay List (Continued) • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP position. • Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed the number of times preset by parameter after STRA instruction is executed. Reset when STRAR instruction is executed. • Turning on/off SM803 can execute STRA / STRAR instruction. (SM803 is forcibly turned on/off by a peripheral device.) When switched from OFF to ON: STRA instruction When switched from ON to OFF: STRAR instruction The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace. At scanning, at time Time (10 ms unit) • The SM1045 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when the ZCOM instruction and data communication request batch processing are executed. (used when the scan time exceeds 200 ms) • Switched on during sampling trace. • Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned ON. Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF. • When SM701 is OFF, characters up to NULL (00H) code are output. • When SM701 is ON, ASCII codes of 16 characters are output. • Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction. • Switched ON when program transfer is requested. Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete. • When SM1052 is ON, the SEG instruction is executed as an I/O partial refresh instruction. When SM1052 is OFF, the SEG instruction is executed as a 7-SEG display instruction. • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN position. QnA • Turned on when status latch is completed. Turned off by reset instruction. • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other program (for example subprogram when main program is being run) is complete during run. Automatically switched off when P, I setting is complete. • Turned ON once when the P, I set has been completed, and then turned OFF again. • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other program (for example subprogram when main program is being run) is complete during run. Automatically switched off when P, I setting is complete. • Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57(S1)/AD58 is done by divided processing, and turned off at completion of divided processing. • Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57(S1)/AD58 is done by divided processing. • Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU/A8PUJ. (In this case, the scan time is extended by 10 %.) * A8UPU and A8PUJ are not used with QCPU/QnACPU. App - 61 QnA ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Relay Conversion Modification M9081 SM1081 SM714 Name OFF: Empty spaces in communication Communication request registration request area registration area ON: No empty spaces in BUSY signal communication request registration area OFF: Error check executed ON: No error check SM1084 Error check M9091 SM1091 Operation error OFF: No error details flag ON: Error M9094 SM1094 SM251 I/O change flag OFF: Replacement ON: No replacement M9100 SM1100 SM320 Presence/ absence of SFC program OFF: SFC programs not used ON: SFC programs used M9101 SM1101 SM321 Start/stop SFC program OFF: SFC programs stop ON: SFC programs start M9102 SM1102 SM322 SFC program start status OFF: Initial Start ON: Continue M9103 SM1103 SM323 Presence/ absence of continuous transition OFF: Continuous transition not effective ON: Continuous transition effective M9104 SM1104 SM324 Continuous transition suspension flag OFF: When transition is completed ON: When no transition SM1108 SM90 M9109 SM1109 SM91 M9110 SM1110 SM92 M9111 SM1111 SM93 • Indication of communication enable/disable to remote terminal modules connected to the MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master module, A2C or A52G. QnA Meaning M9084 M9108 Details Corresponding CPU Special Relay List (Continued) • It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not when the END instruction is processed (to set the END instruction processing time). • Check for breakage of fuse • Collation check of I/O module • Check of battery • Turns ON when the detail factor of the operation error is stored into SD1091. Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter. • The I/O module can be changed online (with power on) when SM251 is turned ON after the head I/O number of the I/O module is set to SD251. (One module only is allowed to be changed by one setting.) • To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU RUN. To be switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU STOP. • RUN/STOP mode must not be changed until I/O module change is complete. • Turned on if the SFC program is registered. Turned off if it is not. • Turned on by user to start SFC program. Turned OFF to stop SFC program by disabling operational outputs of execution steps. • Selects a start step of restarting SFC program with SM322. ON: Makes the execution block restart from the execution step that was suspended when SFC program was stopped. OFF: Clears execution status of SFC program when SFC program is stopped. The block 0 starts from its initial step. • Once turned on, this relay remains on even if power supply is cut by latch with system. To start with the initial step of blocks at power-on, turn this relay off with the sequence block. • Set whether continuous transition will be performed in 1 scan for all the steps on which transition conditions are met. ON: Transits continuously (continuous transition enabled). OFF: Transits 1 step at 1 scan (continuous transition disabled). • ON when continuous transition is not executed during operation in the continuous transition mode, and OFF when transition of 1 step is completed. By writing AND condition as the transition condition of SM324, continuous transition can be prevented from being performed on the corresponding step. Step transition watchdog timer start (equivalent of SD90) Step transition watchdog timer start (equivalent of • Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition OFF: Watchdog timer reset SD91) watchdog timer is started. ON: Watchdog timer reset Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition watchdog Step transition start timer. watchdog timer start (equivalent of SD92) Step transition watchdog timer start (equivalent of SD93) App - 62 QnA Special Special ACPU Relay for Special Relay after Relay Conversion Modification M9112 SM1112 SM94 Name Step transition watchdog timer start (equivalent of SD94) Step transition watchdog timer start (equivalent of SD95) Step transition watchdog timer start (equivalent of SD96) Active step sampling trace completion flag Meaning Details OFF: Watchdog timer reset ON: Watchdog timer reset start • Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition watchdog timer is started. Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition watchdog timer. OFF: Trace start ON: Trace completed • Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is completed. Reset when sampling trace is started. • Set when sampling trace is being executed. Reset when sampling trace is completed or suspended. M9113 SM1113 SM95 M9114 SM1114 SM96 M9180 SM1180 SM825 M9181 SM1181 SM822 Active step sampling trace execution flag OFF: Trace not being executed ON: Trace execution underway OFF: Trace disable/suspend ON: Trace enable OFF: Coil output OFF ON: Coil output ON M9182 SM1182 SM821 Active step sampling trace permission M9196 SM1196 SM325 Operation output at block stop M9197 SM1197 Switch between blown fuse and I/O verification error display M9198 SM 1198 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON SM1198 M9199 SM1199 M9200 SM1200 M9201 SM 1197 SM1201 –––– –––– Data recovery of online sampling trace/status latch ZNRD instruction (LRDP instruction for ACPU) completion ZNRD instruction (LRDP instruction for ACPU) completion I/O numbers to be displayed X/Y 0 to 7F0 X/Y 800 to FF0 X/Y 1000 to 17F0 X/Y 1800 to 1FF0 Corresponding CPU Special Relay List (Continued) • Selects sampling trace execution enable/disable. ON: Sampling trace execution is enabled. OFF: Sampling trace execution is disabled. Sampling trace execution is disabled. If turned off during sampling trace execution, trace is suspended. • Selects the operation output when block stop is executed. ON: Retains the ON/OFF status of the coil being used by using operation output of the step being executed at block stop. OFF: All coil outputs are turned off. (Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON/OFF status of M9196.) Switches I/O numbers in the fuse blow module storage registers (SD1100 to SD1107) and I/O module verify error storage registers (SD1116 to SD1123) according to the combination of ON/OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198. OFF: Data recovery disabled ON: Data recovery enabled • Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU module at restart when sampling trace/status latch is executed. • SM1199 should be ON to execute again. (Unnecessary when writing the data again from peripheral devices.) OFF: Not accepted ON: Accepted • Depends on whether or not the ZNRD (word device read) instruction has been received. • Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD instruction. • Use the RST instruction to reset. OFF: Not completed ON: End • Depends on whether or not the ZNRD (word device read) instruction execution is complete. • Used as a condition contact for resetting SM1202 and SM1203 after the ZNRD instruction is complete. • Use the RST instruction to reset. QnA App - 63 Appendix 4 Special Register List Special registers, SD, are internal relays with fixed applications in the PLC. For this reason, it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way that normal registers are used. Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary. Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary. The heading descriptions in the following special register lists are shown in the following table. Item Number Function of item • Indicates the number of special register. Name • Indicates the name of the special register. Meaning • Indicates the contents of the special register. Explanation • Indicates the detailed contents of the special register. Set by (When set) • Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user, and if it is set by the system, when setting is performed. <Set by> S : Set by system U : Set by user (Sequence program or test operations at a peripheral device) S/U : Set by both system and user <When set> indicated only for registers set by system. Each END : Set during each END processing Initial : Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or when going from STOP to RUN) Status change : Set only when there is a change in status Error : Set when error occurs Instruction execution : Set when instruction is executed Request : Set only when there is a user request (through SM, etc.) Corresponding ACPU D9 • Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU (When the contents are changed, the special register is represented as changed) • New indicates the special register newly added to the QnACPU or Q series CPU module. For details on the following items, refer to the following manuals: • Networks • Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) • Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H • QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual • SFC QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC) POINT (1) SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU. These relays are vacant with QCPU. (2) SM1500 or later is exclusively used for Q4ARCPU. App - 64 (1) Diagnostic information Number SD0 Name Diagnostic errors Meaning Diagnosis error code Explanation • Error codes for errors found by diagnosis are stored as BIN data. • Contents identical to latest fault history information. Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 S (Error) D9008 format change S (Error) New Corresponding CPU • Year (last two digits) and month that SD0 data is updated is stored as BCD 2-digit code. SD1 SD2 Clock time for diagnosis error occurrence Clock time for diagnosis error occurrence SD3 B15 to B8 B7 to B0 Year (0 to 99) Month (1 to 12) (e.g.) Oct. 1995 H9510 • The day and hour that SD0 is updated is stored as BCD 2-digit code. B15 to B8 B7 to B0 Day (1 to 31) Hour (0 to 23) (e.g.) 25th, 10 o'clock H2510 • The minute and second that SD0 data was updated is stored as BCD 2-digit code. B15 to B8 B7 to B0 Min. (1 to 59) Sec. (0 to 59) (e.g.) 35, 48 H3548 Category codes which help indicate what type of error information is being stored in the common information areas (SD5 through SD15) and the individual information areas (SD16 through SD26) are stored here. B15 to B8 B7 to B0 Rem Individual info category code Common info category code SD4 Error information categories Error information category code • The common information category codes store the following codes: 0 : No error 1 : Unit/module No./ PLC No. * 2 : File name/Drive name 3 : Time (value set) 4 : Program error location 5 : Switch cause (for Q4AR only) For a multiple CPU system, the module number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred. (Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored. ) PLC No. 1: 1, PLC No. 2: 2, PLC No. 3: 3, PLC No. 4: 4 • The individual information category codes store the following codes: 0 : No error 1 : (Vacancy) 2 : File name/Drive name 3 : Time (value actually measured) 4 : Program error location 5 : Parameter number 6 : Annunciator F number 7 : CHK instruction malfunction number App - 65 S (Error) New Special Register List (Continued) Number SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 Name Meaning Explanation Corresponding ACPU D9 S (Error) New Corresponding CPU • Common information corresponding to the error codes (SD0) is stored here. • The following four types of information are stored here: 1) Unit/module No. Number SD9 SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Set by (When set) Contents Slot No./PLC No.* 1 * 2 I/O No. (Vacancy) *1 : For a multiple CPU system, the slot number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred. Slot 0 in the multiple CPU system is the one on the slot on the right of the rightmost CPU module. (Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored. ) PLC No. 1: 1, PLC No. 2: 2, PLC No. 3: 3, PLC No. 4: 4 *2 : If a fuse blown or I/O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station, the network number is stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits. Use the I/O No. to check the module where the fuse blown or I/O verify error occurred. 2) File name/Drive name Number Contents SD5 Drive SD6 SD7 File name SD8 (ASCII code: 8 characters) SD9 2EH (. ) SD10 Extension * 3 SD11 (ASCII code: 3 characters) SD12 SD13 (Vacancy) SD14 SD15 *3 For extensions, refer to REMARK at Appendix 66. App - 66 (e.g.) File name ABCDEFGH. IJK B15 to B8 B7 to B0 42H(B) 44H(D) 46 H(F) 48 H(H) 49H(I) 4BH(K) 41H(A) 43H(C) 45H(E) 47H(G) 2D H(. ) 4AH(B) Rem Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning SD5 Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 S (Error) New S (Error) New Corresponding CPU (Continued) 3) Time (value set) SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 4) Number Contents SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Time: In 1 μ s units (0 to 999 μ s) Time: In 1 ms units (0 to 65535 ms) (Vacancy) Program error location Number Contents SD5 SD6 File name SD7 (ASCII code: 8 characters) SD8 SD9 Extension * 3 2E H(. ) SD10 (ASCII code: 3 characters) SD11 Pattern * 4 SD12 Block No. SD13 Step No./Transition No. Sequence step No. (L) SD14 Sequence step No. (H) SD15 Error common information Error common information Rem *4: Contents of pattern data 15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 0 to 0 0 0 (Bit No.) SFC block designated (1)/not designated (0) (Not used) SFC step designated (1)/not designated (0) SFC transition designated (1)/not designated (0) 5) Switch cause Number Contents SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Switching factor (0: Auto/1: Manual) Switching direction (0: Standby to control/1: Control to standby) Tracking flag * 6 (Vacancy) *6: Tracking flag contents Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid. 15 14 0 0 to to 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 (Bit No.) Initial work data Disable (0)/Enable (1) (Not used) System data (SFC active step data) Disable (0)/Enable (1) Switching factor Disable (0)/Enable (1) *3 For extensions, refer to REMARK at Appendix 66. App - 67 Q4AR Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 S (Error) New Corresponding CPU • Individual information corresponding to error codes (SD0) is stored here. • The following six types of information are stored here: 1) File name/Drive name SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 Number SD21 SD16 Drive SD17 SD18 File name SD19 (ASCII code: 8 characters) SD20 2E H (. ) SD21 Extension*3 SD22 (ASCII code: 3 characters) SD23 SD24 (Vacancy) SD25 SD26 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 2) Contents B15 to B8 B7 to B0 42H(B) 44H(D) 46 H(F) 48 H(H) 49H(I) 4BH(K) 41H(A) 43H(C) 45H(E) 47H(G) 2D H(. ) 4AH(B) Time (value actually measured) 3) Number Contents SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Time: In 1 μ s units (0 to 999 μ s) Time: In 1 ms units (0 to 65535 ms) (Vacancy) Program error location Number Error individual information (e.g.) File name ABCDEFGH. IJK Error individual information Contents SD16 SD17 File name SD18 (ASCII code: 8 characters) SD19 SD20 Extension*3 2E H(. ) (ASCII code: 3 characters) SD21 Pattern*4 SD22 SD23 Block No. SD24 Step No./Transition No. Sequence step No. (L) SD25 Sequence step No. (H) SD26 *4: Contents of pattern data 15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 0 to 0 0 0 (Bit No.) SFC block designated (1)/not designated (0) (Not used) SFC step designated (1)/not designated (0) SFC transition designated (1)/not designated (0) 4) Parameter No. 5) Annunciator number /CHK instruction malfunction number 6) Intelligent function module parameter error (for QCPU only) Number Contents Number Contents Number SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Parameter No.*5 SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 No. SD16 SD17 *5: (Vacancy) (Vacancy) SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Contents Parameter No.* 5 Error code of intelligent function module (Vacancy) For details of the parameter numbers, refer to the user's manual of the CPU used. *3 For extensions, refer to REMARK at Appendix 66. App - 68 Rem Special Register List (Continued) Number SD50 SD51 Name Error reset Battery low latch Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 U New S (Error) New S (Error) New S (Error) D9005 S (Error) D9004 format change • Value stored here is the lowest station I/O number of the module with the blown fuse. S (Error) D9000 • The lowest I/O number of the module where the I/O module verification error took place. S (Error) D9002 Meaning Explanation Error number that performs error reset Bit pattern indicating where battery voltage drop occurred • Stores error number that performs error reset Corresponding CPU Rem • All corresponding bits go 1(ON) when battery voltage drops. • Subsequently, these remain 1(ON) even after battery voltage has been returned to normal. B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0<-------------------> CPU error Memory card A alarm Memory card A error Memory card B alarm Memory card B error • When the QCPU is used, the memory card B is standard and therefore the corresponding bits always remain OFF. SD52 Battery low SD53 AC DOWN detection SD54 MINI link errors Bit pattern indicating where battery voltage drop occurred Number of time for AC DOWN detection Error detection status • Same configuration as SD51 above • Turns to 0 (OFF) when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter. • When the QCPU is used, the memory card B is standard and therefore the corresponding bits always remain OFF. • Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85% (AC power)/65% (DC power) of the rating during operation of the CPU module, the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code. 1) When any of X(n+0)/X(n+20), X(n+6)/X(n+26), X(n+7)/X(n+27) and X(n+8)/X(n+28) of the mounted MINI(-S3) turns ON, the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON). 2) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted MINI (-S3) and CPU module cannot be made. B15 B9 B8 ······ 8th module 1st 8th module module SD60 SD61 I/O module verification error number SD62 Annunciator number Number of module with fuse blown I/O module verification error module number Annunciator number SD63 Number of annunciators Number of annunciators QnA 1st module Information of 1) Information of 2) Number of module with blown fuse B0 Rem • The first annunciator number (F number) to be detected is stored here. • Stores the number of annunciators searched. Rem S (Instruction execution) S (Instruction execution) D9009 D9124 REMARK Extensions are shown below. SD10 Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits SD11 Higher 8 bits 51H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 51 H 50 H 50 H 43 H 44 H 44 H 44 H 44 H 54 H 54 H 54 H 54 H 46 H 41 H 47 H 44 H 49 H 52 H 53 H 4C H 53 H 4C H 50 H 52 H 44 H App - 69 Extension name QPA QPG QCD QDI QDR QDS QDL QTS QTL QTP QTR QFD File type parameters Sequence program/SFC program Device comment Device initial value File register Simulation data Local device Sampling trace data (For QnA) Status latch data (For QnA) Program trace data (For QnA) SFC trace file Trouble history data Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET F , the F numbers which go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered. The F numbers turned OFF by RST F are deleted from SD64 - SD79, and the F numbers stored after the deleted F numbers are shifted to the preceding registers. Execution of the LEDR instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 up by one. (This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on the Q3A/Q4ACPU.) After 16 annunciators have been detected, detection of the 17th will not be stored from SD64 through SD79. SD64 SD65 SD66 SD67 SD68 SD69 SD70 SD71 SD72 F50 F25 Annunciator detection numbers SD62 0 SD63 SD64 SD65 SD66 SD74 SD67 SD68 SD69 SD75 SD70 SD71 SD76 SD72 SD73 SD77 SD74 SD75 SD76 SD78 SD77 SD78 SD79 SD79 CHK number CHK number 99 ··· (Detected No.) 0 1 8 ··· (No. of detected annunciators) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 210 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 2 Corresponds to SM91 SD94 SD95 SD96 SD97 Corresponds to SM92 F number for timer set value and time over error Corresponds to SM94 4 5 6 7 D9128 D9129 D9130 8 9 S (Instruction execution) Corresponds to SM96 Corresponds to SM97 SD99 Corresponds to SM99 D9132 New New New New (Detected No.) New New New New S (Instruction execution) New D9108 • F number that will be turned ON when the step transition watchdog timer setting or watchdog timer time limit error occurs. B15 B8 B7 B0 D9109 D9110 D9111 Set F number Set time limit of timer (0 to 255) (1 to 255 sec.; (In 1 sec units)) Corresponds to SM95 Corresponds to SM98 SD120 D9127 Corresponds to SM93 SD98 SD105 3 • Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BCD code. SD91 SD93 D9126 D9131 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Corresponds to SM90 Step transition watchdog timer setting value (Enabled only when SFC program exists) Corresponding CPU F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LED R SD90 SD92 Corresponding ACPU D9 D9125 SET SET SET RET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET Table of detected annunciator numbers SD73 SD80 Set by (When set) Explanation D9112 U D9113 • Turning ON any of SM90 to SM99 during an active step starts the timer, and if the transition condition next to the corresponding step is not met within the timer time limit, the set annunciator (F) turns ON. xCH1 transmission speed setting (RS232) Stores the preset transmission speed when GX Developer is used. K3: 300bps, K6: 600bps, K24: 2400bps, K48: 4800bps K96: 9600bps, K192: 19.2kbps, K384: 38.4kbps K576: 57.6kbps, K1152: 115.2kbps Error No. for external power supply OFF Module No. which has external power supply error • Stores the lowest head No. of the module whose external power supply is OFF. * Applicable only for Q-series modules (For future use) D9114 New New New S New QCPU remote App - 70 S (Error occurrence) New Special Register List (2) System information Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU S (Always) New Remote New QCPU New QnA S (Status change) New QCPU S (Status change) New • The switch status of the remote I/O module is stored in the following format. B15 B4 B3 B0 1) Vacant 1) Remote I/O module switch status Always 1: STOP • The CPU switch status is stored in the following format: B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 3) Vacant 1) CPU switch status Status of switch 2) B0 S (Every END processing) 1) 0: RUN 1: STOP 2: L.CLR 2) Memory card switch 3) DIP switch SD200 B4 B3 Always OFF B8 through BC correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1. 0: OFF, 1: ON BD through BF are vacant. Status of CPU switch • The CPU switch status is stored in the following format: B15 B12B11 B8 B7 3) Vacant 1) CPU switch key status B4 B3 2) B0 S (Every END processing) 1) 0: RUN 1: STOP 2: L.CLR B4 corresponds to card A, and B5 corresponds to card B 0: OFF, 1: ON B8 through B12 correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1. B14 through B15 correspond to SW1 through SW2 of system setting switch 2. 0: OFF, 1: ON 2) Memory card switch 3) DIP switch • The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of the LEDs on the CPU module: • 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker. B15 8) SD201 LED Status Status of CPU-LED B12B11 7) B12B11 7) 1): RUN 2): ERROR 3): USER 4): BAT.ALARM Bit pattern of LED that is turned off 4) 3) 2) B0 1) 5): BOOT 6): Vacant 7): Vacant 8): MODE Mode bit patter 0: OFF 1: Green 2: Orange • The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of the LEDs on the CPU module: • 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker. 8) LED off 5) B4 B3 1): RUN 2): ERROR 3): USER 4): BAT.ALARM B15 SD202 6) B8 B7 6) B8 B7 5) 4) B4 B3 3) 2) B0 1) QnA 5): BOOT 6): CARD A (memory card) 7): CARD B (memory card) 8): Vacant • Stores bit patterns of LEDs turned off (Only USER and BOOT enabled) • Turned off at 1, not turned off at 0 App - 71 U New Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU S (Always) New Remote • The operating status of the remote I/O module is stored in the following format. B15 B4 B3 B0 1) 1) Remote I/O module operating status Always 2: STOP • The CPU operating state is stored as indicated in the following figure: B15 SD203 Operating state of CPU Operating state of CPU B12B11 B8 B7 2) 1) Operating status of CPU 2) STOP/PAUSE cause Note: Priority is earliest first SD206 Device test execution type Priorities 1 to 4 SD207 SD208 LED display priority ranking Priorities 5 to 8 Priorities 9 to 10 SD209 SD210 0: Test not yet executed 1: During X device test 2: During Y device test 3: During X/Y device test Time data Time data (year, month) B4 B3 B0 S(Every END processing) 1) 0: RUN 1: STEP-RUN 2: STOP 3: PAUSE 0: Key switch 1: Remote contact 2: Peripheral, computer link, or operation from some other remote source 3: Internal program instruction 4: Error D9015 format change • Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer. S (Request) • When error is generated, the LED display (flicker) is made according to the error number setting priorities. • The setting areas for priorities are as follows: B15 B8 B7 B12 B11 B4 SD207 4th priority 3rd priority 2nd priority SD208 8th priority 7th priority 6th priority 10th priority SD209 B3 B0 1st priority 5th priority 9th priority U SD207 = H4321 SD208 = H8765 SD209 = H00A9 • No display is made if "0" is set. However, even if "0" has been set, information concerning CPU module operation stop (including parameter settings) errors will be indicated by the LEDs without conditions. • The year (last two digits) and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below: ····· B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 Remote D9038 Default value B15 New D3039 format change New (e.g.) July. 1993 D9025 H9307 Year Month • The day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as shown below: SD211 Time data Time data (day, hour) B15 ·····B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) 31st, 10 o'clock D9026 H3110 Rem Day Hour • The minutes and seconds (after the hour) are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below: SD212 Time data Time data (minute, second) B15 ·····B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) 35, 48 H3548 S/U (Request) D9027 Min. Sec. • The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 as shown below: B15 SD213 Time data Time data (Higher digits of year, day of week) ·····B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 (e.g.) Friday H0005 Day of week 0 Later 2 digits of year (0 to 99) App - 72 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tues 3 Wed 4 Thur 5 Fri 6 Sat D9028 QCPU remote Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU S/U (Request) D9028 QnA S (When changed) New The base mode is stored. S (Initial) New • Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being installed. S (Initial) New S (Initial) New S (Initial) New S (Request END) New U D9094 Q2A(S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR QnA Meaning Explanation • The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 as shown below: B15 SD213 Time data ····· B12 B11 ····· B8 B7 ····· B4 B3 ····· B0 Time data (, day of week) Day of week B15 SD222 LED display data LED display data SD225 SD226 SD227 SD240 Base mode SD241 No. of extension bases SD242 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tues 3 Wed 4 Thur 5 Fri 6 Sat "0" must be set SD221 SD224 H0005 • LED display ASCII data (16 characters) stored here. SD220 SD223 (e.g.) Friday A/Q base differentiation 0: Automatic mode 1: Detail mode 0: Main only 1 to 7: Number of extension bases Base type differentiation 0: QA**B is installed (A mode) 1: Q**B is installed (Q mode) SD220 SD221 SD222 SD223 SD224 SD225 SD226 SD226 No. of base slots No. of base slots 11th character from right 12th character from right 10th character from right 7th character from right 8th character from right 5th character from right 6th character from right 3rd character from right 4th character from right 1st character from right 2nd character from right B2 B1 B0 to Main base 1st extension 2nd extension Fixed to 0 if no extension to B8 B7 B4 B3 SM243 Extension 3 Extension 2 Extension 1 SM244 Extension 7 Extension 6 B0 Main Extension 5 Extension 4 SD250 Loaded maximum I/O Loaded maximum I/O No. SD251 Head I/O No. for replacement Head I/O No. for replacement • Stores the upper two digits of the head I/O number of an I/O module that is removed/replaced in the online status. (Default value: 100H) SD253 RS422 baud rate RS422 baud rate Number of modules mounted I/O No. Network No. Group No. Station No. Standby information • Stores the baud rate of RS422. 0: 9600bps 1: 19.2kbps 2: 38.4kbps S (When changed) New • Indicates the number of mounted NET/10 modules. S (Initial) New SD254 SD255 SD256 SD257 SD258 SD259 SD260 to SD264 SD265 to SD269 SD270 to SD274 NET/10 information QCPU remote 7th extension • As shown above, each area stores the number of slots being installed. • When SM250 goes from OFF to ON, the upper 2 digits of the final I/O number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values. Information of 1st module SD244 B0 to 9th character from right B15 B12B11 SD243 B7 13th character from right 14th character from right B7 Fixed to 0 B8 to 15th character from right 16th character from right • Indicates I/O No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted. • Indicates network No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted. • Indicates group No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted. • Indicates station No. of the 1st NET/10 module mounted. • In the case of standby stations, the module number of the standby station is stored.(1 to 4) Information of 2nd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. Information of 3rd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. Information of 4th module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. App - 73 Rem Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU S (Error) New QCPU remote S (Error) New QnA 1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON). 2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module turns OFF, the bit of corresponding station turns to 1 (ON). 3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted CC-Link module and CPU module cannot be made. Information of 3) Information of 2) Information of 1) B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 Vacancy 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module SD280 CC-Link error Error detection status The above module Nos. n are in order of the head I/O numbers. (However, the one where parameter setting has not been made is not counted.) 1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON). 2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module turns OFF, the bit of corresponding station turns to 1 (ON). 3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted CC-Link module and CPU module cannot be made. Information of 3) Information of 2) Information of 1) B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 Vacancy 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module SD290 SD291 SD292 SD293 SD294 SD296 SD297 SD298 Device allocation (Same as parameter contents SD299 SD300 SD301 SD302 SD303 SD304 SD315 Time reserved for communication processing Number of SD340 modules mounted SD341 SD342 SD343 SD344 SD345 to SD346 SD347 Time reserved for communication processing Ethernet information Information of 1st module SD295 Number of points allocated for X Number of points allocated for Y Number of points allocated for M Number of points allocated for L Number of points allocated for B Number of points allocated for F Number of points allocated for SB Number of points allocated for V Number of points allocated for S Number of points allocated for T Number of points allocated for ST Number of points allocated for G Number of points allocated for D Number of points allocated for W Number of points allocated for SW I/O No. Network No. Group No. Station No. Vacant Vacant • Stores the number of points currently set for X devices Rem • Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices • Stores the number of points currently set for M devices • Stores the number of points currently set for L devices • Stores the number of points currently set for B devices Rem • Stores the number of points currently set for F devices • Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices • Stores the number of points currently set for V devices Rem S (Initial) New • Stores the number of points currently set for S devices • Stores the number of points currently set for T devices • Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices • Stores the number of points currently set for G devices • Stores the number of points currently set for D devices Rem • Stores the number of points currently set for W devices • Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX Developer or other units The greater the value is designated, the shorter the response time for communication with other devices (GX Developer, serial communication units) becomes. Setting range: 1 to 100 ms If the designated value is out of the range above, it is assumed to no setting. The scan time becomes longer by the designated time. • Number of modules mounted on Ethernet • Indicates Ethernet I/O No. of the 1st module mounted • Indicates Ethernet network No. of the 1st module mounted • Indicates Ethernet group No. of the 1st module mounted • Indicates Ethernet station No. of the 1st module mounted • Vacant (With QCPU, the Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is stored in buffer memory.) • Vacant (With QCPU, the Ethernet error code of the 1st module is read with the ERRORRD instruction.) App - 74 U(END processing) New S (Initial) New QCPU remote Special Register List (Continued) SD348 to SD354 SD355 to SD361 SD362 to SD368 SD340 SD341 Name Ethernet information • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. Information of 3rd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. Information of 4th module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. modules mounted Ethernet information Explanation Information from 2nd module Number of SD342 SD343 SD344 SD345 to SD346 SD347 SD348 to SD354 SD355 to SD361 SD362 to SD368 Meaning Information of 1st module Number I/O No. Network No. Group No. Station No. Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU S (Initial) New QCPU remote S (Initial) New QnA S (Initial) New • Number of modules installed on Ethernet • Indicates Ethernet I/O No. of the 1st module mounted • Indicates Ethernet network No. of the 1st module mounted • Indicates Ethernet group No. of the 1st module mounted. • Indicates Ethernet station No. of the 1st module mounted. IP address • Indicates Ethernet station No. of the 1st module mounted. Error Code • Indicates error code of the 1st module mounted. Information of 2nd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. Information of 3rd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. Information of 4th module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. B15 0 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 to 0 Reception status of channel 1 Not used Reception status of channel 2 Reception status of channel 3 Instruction reception status of 1st module SD380 Reception status of channel 4 Reception status of channel 5 Reception status of channel 6 Ethernet instruction reception status Reception status of channel 7 Reception status of channel 8 ON : Received (channel in use) OFF: Not received (channel not in use) SD381 Instruction reception status of 2nd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. SD382 Instruction reception status of 3rd module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. SD383 Instruction reception status of 4th module • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. SD392 Internal system software version QnA • Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code. SD395 Software version Multi CPU number High byte Low byte Stored in low byte Inconsistent value in high byte S (Initial) D9060 S (Error) New QCPU function Ver. B Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU Number of counts in 1-second units • Incremented by 1 for each second execution after the CPU module is set to RUN • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0 S (Status change) D9022 2n second clock units • Stores value n of 2n second clock (Default is 30) • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 U New 2nms clock units Number of counts in each scan • Stores value n of 2nms clock (Default is 30) • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 • Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to RUN.* • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0 • Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to RUN. • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0 • Used only for low speed execution type programs Multi CPU number "41H" is stored when using version "A" Note: The internal system software version may differ from the version indicated by the version symbol printed on the case. • In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU number of the host CPU is stored. PLC No. 1: 1, PLC No. 2: 2, PLC No. 3: 3, PLC No. 4: 4 (3) System clocks/counters Number SD412 SD414 SD415 Name 1 second counter 2n second clock setting 2nms clock setting SD420 Scan counter SD430 Low speed scan counter Meaning Number of counts in each scan U New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New QCPU *: Counting is not executed for scans by initial execution type program. App - 75 (4) Scan information Number SD500 SD510 Name Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Execution program No. Low speed program No. Program No. in execution • Program number of program currently being executed is stored as BIN value. S (Status change) New Low speed program in execution Current scan time (In 1 ms units) • Program number of low speed execution type program No. currently being executed is stored as BIN value. • Enabled only when SM510 is ON. S (Every END processing) S (Every END processing) SD520 Current scan time SD521 SD522 Initial scan time SD523 SD524 Minimum scan time SD525 Minimum scan time SD526 Maximum scan time SD527 SD528 SD529 SD532 SD533 SD534 SD535 SD540 SD541 SD542 SD543 SD544 SD545 Current scan time for low speed program Minimum scan time for low speed program Maximum scan time for low speed program END processing time Constant scan wait time Cumulative execution time for low speed programs SD546 Execution time for low speed programs SD547 Current scan time (In 100 s units) Initial scan time (In 1 ms units) Initial scan time (In 100 s units) Minimum scan time (In 1 ms units) Minimum scan time (In 100 s units) Maximum scan time (In 1 ms units) Maximum scan time (In 100 s units) Current scan time (In 1 ms units) Current scan time (In 100 s units) Minimum scan time (In 1 ms units) Minimum scan time (In 100 s units) Maximum scan time (In 1 ms units) Maximum scan time (In 100 s units) END processing time (In 1ms units) END processing time (In 100 s units) Constant scan wait time (In 1ms units) Constant scan wait time (In 100 s units) Cumulative execution time for low speed programs (In 1ms units) Cumulative execution time for low speed programs (In 100 s units) Execution time for low speed programs (In 1ms units) Execution time for low speed programs (In 100 s units) • The current scan time is stored. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • The current scan time is stored. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 (Example) When the current scan time is 23.6ms, the following values are stored. D520=23 D521=600 • Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the minimum value of the scan time. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stores the minimum value of the scan time. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st scan. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st scan. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the current scan time of a low speed program. (In 1 ms units) • Stores the current scan time of a low speed program. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the minimum value of the scan time of a low speed program. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stores the minimum value of the scan time of a low speed program. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st scan of a low speed program.. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of 1st scan of a low speed program.. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the time from the end of a scan program to the start of the next scan. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stores the time from the end of a scan program to the start of the next scan. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the wait time for constant scan setting. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stores the wait time for constant scan setting. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed program. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan. • Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed program. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan. • Stores the execution time of a low speed program during one scan. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stored every scan. • Stores the execution time of a low speed program during one scan. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stored every scan. App - 76 New D9017 format change S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) S (Every END processing) S (Every END processing) D9018 format change New D9019 format change New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New S (Every END processing) New Corresponding CPU Special Register List (Continued) Number SD548 Name Scan program execution time SD549 SD550 SD551 SD552 Service interval measureme nt module Service interval time Meaning Scan program execution time (In 1 ms units) Scan program execution time (In 100 s units) Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 • Stores the execution time of a scan program during one scan. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 • Stored every scan. • Stores the execution time of a scan program during one scan. (In 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 • Stored every scan. S(Every END processing) New U New Unit/module No. • Sets I/O number for module that measures service interval Module service interval (In 1 ms units) • When SM551 is ON, stores service interval for module designated by SD550. (In 1 ms units) • Range from 0 to 65535 Module service interval (In 100 s units) • When SM551 is ON, stores service interval for module designated by SD550. (in 100 s units) • Range from 000 to 900 App - 77 Corresponding CPU Rem S (Request) New Special Register List (5) Memory card Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU S (Initial and card removal) New QCPU S (Initial and card removal) New QnA New QCPU New QnA New QCPU New QnA New QCPU S (Status change) New QnA S (Initial) New QCPU • Indicates memory card A model installed B15 B8 B7 0<----------->0 B4 B3 B0 Drive 1 (RAM) type 0: Does not exist 1: SRAM 0: Does not exist SD600 Memory card A models Drive 2 (ROM) type Memory card A models (1: SRAM) 2: ATA FRASH 3: FLASH ROM • Indicates memory card A model installed B15 B8 B7 0<----------->0 B4 B3 B0 Drive 1 (RAM) type 0: Does not exist 1: SRAM 0: Does not exist Drive 2 (ROM) type 2: EEPROM 3: FLASH ROM SD602 SD603 Drive 1 (Standard RAM) capacity Drive 1 capacity Drive 2 (Standard ROM) capacity Drive 2 capacity • Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. • Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. • The use conditions for memory card (A) are stored as bit patterns. (In use when ON) • The significance of there bit patterns is indicated below: B8: B0: Boot operation (QBT) B1: Parameters (QPA) B9: CPU fault history B2: Device comments (QFD) (QCD) BA: SFC trace (QTS) B3: Device initial value (QDI) BB: Local device (QDL) B4: File register R (QDR) BC: B5: Trace (QTS) BD: B6: BE: B7: BF: SD604 Memory card A use conditions Memory card A use conditions • The use conditions for memory card (A) are stored as bit patterns. (In use when ON) • The significance of there bit patterns is indicated below: B8: Simulation data B0: Boot operation (QBT) (QDS) B1: Parameters (QPA) B9: CPU fault history B2: Device comments (QFD) (QCD) B10: SFC trace (QTS) B3: Device initial value (QDI) B11: Local device (QDL) B4: File R (QDR) B12: B5: Sampling trace (QTS) B13: B6: Status latch (QTL) B14: B7: Program trace (QTP) B15: S (Initial and card removal) S (Initial and card removal) S (Initial and card removal) S (Initial and card removal) S (Status change) • Indicates memory card B model installed B15 B8 B7 0<----------->0 SD620 Memory card B models Memory card B models B4 B3 B0 Drive 3 (RAM) type 0: Does not exist 1: SRAM 0: Does not exist Drive 4 (ROM) type (1: SRAM) 2: E2PROM 3: FLASH ROM Drive 4 is fixed for "3" since it incorporates a flash ROM. App - 78 Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU S (Initial) New Q2A(S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR S (Initial) New QCPU Q2A(S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR • Indicates memory card B model installed B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 0<----------->0 SD620 Memory card B models Memory card B models Drive 1 0: Does not exist (RAM) type 1: SRAM 0: Does not exist Drive 2 (ROM) type SD622 SD623 Drive 3 (Standard RAM) capacity Drive 4 (Standard ROM) capacity Drive 3/4 use conditions Drive 3 capacity Drive 4 capacity Drive 3/4 use conditions Memory card B use conditions Memory card B use conditions File register drive Drive number SD641 • Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. S (Initial) New • Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. S (Initial) New QCPU S (Initial) New Q2A(S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR S (Status change) New QCPU S (Status change) New Q2A(S1) Q3A Q4A Q4AR S (Status change) New S (Status change) New • Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. • The use conditions for drive 3/4 are stored as bit patterns. (In use when ON) • The significance of there bit patterns is indicated below: B8: B9: CPU fault history B0: Boot operation (QBT) (QFD) B1: Parameters (QPA) B2: Device comments (QCD) B10: SFC trace (QTS) B11: Local device B3: Device initial value (QDI) (QDL) B4: File R (QDR) B5: Trace (QTS) B12: B6: B13: B7: B14: B15: • The use conditions for memory card B are stored as bit patterns. (ON when in use) • The significance of there bit patterns is indicated below: B8: Simulation data B0: Boot operation (QBT) (QDS) B1: Parameters (QPA) B9: CPU fault history B2: Device comments (QFD) (QCD) B10: SFC trace (QTS) B3: Device initial value (QDI) B11: Local device (QDL) B4: File R (QDR) B12: B5: Sampling trace (QTS) B13: B6: Status latch (QTL) B14: B7: Program trace (QTP) B15: • Stores drive number being used by file register. • Stores file register file name (with extension) selected at parameters or by use of QDRSET Instruction as ASCII code. SD642 B15 SD643 3: FLASH ROM • Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 K byte units. (Fixed for "64" since Drive 3 incorporates 64 K bytes RAM.) SD624 SD640 2: EEPROM SD641 to B8 2nd character B7 to B0 1st character File register file name File register file name SD647 File register capacity File register capacity • Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register in 1 k word units. S (Status change) New SD648 File register block number File register block number • Stores the currently selected file register block number. S (Status change) D9035 SD650 Comment drive Comment drive number • Stores the comment drive number selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET Instruction in ASCII code. S (Status change) New SD644 SD645 SD646 4th character SD642 3rd character SD643 6th character 5th character 8th character SD644 7th character SD645 1st character of extension 2E H(. ) SD646 3rd character of extension 2nd character of extension App - 79 Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning SD652 SD654 B15 Comment file name Comment file name SD655 SD656 Boot designation file drive number SD660 SD661 SD662 SD663 SD664 Corresponding ACPU D9 S (Status change) New S (Initial) New S (Initial) New Explanation Set by (When set) Corresponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU • Stores file register file name (with extension) selected at the parameters or by use of QDRSET Instruction as ASCII code. SD651 SD653 Set by (When set) Explanation Boot operation designation file B8 to B7 to 2nd character SD651 B0 1st character 4th character SD652 3rd character SD653 6th character 5th character 8th character SD654 7th character SD655 1st character of extension 2E H(. ) SD656 3rd character of extension 2nd character of extension • Stores the drive number where the boot designation file (*.QBT) is being stored. • Stores the file name of the boot designation file (*.QBT). B15 File name of boot designation file SD665 SD666 SD661 B8 to B7 to 2nd character B0 1st character 4th character SD662 3rd character SD663 6th character 5th character 8th character SD664 7th character SD665 1st character of extension 2E H(. ) SD666 3rd character of extension 2nd character of extension (6) Instruction-related special registersNumber SD705 SD706 SD714 Name Meaning Mask pattern Mask pattern • During block operations, turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use the mask pattern being stored at SD705 (or at SD705 and SD706 if double words are being used) to operate on all data in the block with the masked values. U New Number of vacant communicati on request registration areas 0 to 32 • Stores the number of vacant blocks in the communications request area for remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32-S3. S (During execution) D9081 S (During execution) New SD717 S/U New IMASK instruction mask pattern QnA • Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the following manner: SD715 SD716 Corresponding CPU B11 B0 SD715 l15 to l1 l0 SD716 l31 to l17 l16 SD717 l47 to l33 l32 B15 Mask pattern SD718 Accumulator Accumulator • For use as replacement for accumulators used in A-series programs. SD720 Program No. designation for PLOAD instruction Program No. designation for PLOAD instruction Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by the PLOAD instruction when designated. Range: 1 to 124 U New QCPU SD730 Number of vacant CC-Link communicati on request registration areas 0 to 32 • Stores the number of vacant registration area for the request for communication with the intelligent device station connected to A(1S)J61QBT11. S (During execution) New QnA SD736 PKEY Input PKEY Input • Special register that temporarily stores keyboard data input by means of the PKEY instruction. S (During execution) New SD719 App - 80 Special Register List (Continued) Number Name Meaning SD738 Explanation B15 B8 to B7 S (During execution) New U New QCPU U New QnA S (During execution) New QCPU Corresponding CPU B0 to SD740 SD738 2nd character 1st character SD741 SD739 4th character 3rd character SD742 SD740 6th character 5th character SD743 SD741 8th character 7th character SD744 SD742 10th character 9th character SD743 12th character 11th character SD744 14th character 13th character SD745 16th character 15th character SD746 18th character 17th character SD747 20th character 19th character SD748 22th character 21th character SD749 24th character 23th character SD751 SD750 26th character 25th character SD752 SD751 28th character 27th character SD752 30th character 29th character SD753 32th character 31th character SD755 SD754 34th character 33th character SD756 SD755 36th character 35th character SD757 SD756 38th character 37th character SD757 40th character 39th character SD758 42th character 41th character SD759 44th character 43th character SD760 46th character 45th character SD761 48th character 47th character SD762 SD762 50th character 49th character SD763 SD763 52th character 51th character SD764 SD764 54th character 53th character SD765 SD765 56th character 55th character SD766 SD766 58th character 57th character SD767 SD767 60th character 59th character SD768 SD768 62th character 61th character SD769 64th character 63th character SD745 SD746 SD747 SD748 SD749 SD750 SD754 Corresponding ACPU D9 • Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction. SD739 SD753 Set by (When set) Message storage Message storage SD758 SD759 SD760 SD761 SD769 SD774 to SD775 PID Limit setting SD780 Remaining No. of simultaneou s execution of CC-Link dedicated instruction 0: Limit set 1: Limit not set 0 to 32 Designate the limit for each PID loop as follows: B15 B1 B0 SD774 Loop 16 to Loop 2 Loop 1 SD775 Loop 32 to Loop 18 Loop 17 • Stores the remaining number of simultaneous execution of the CC-Link dedicated instructions. • Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows: B15 B11 B0 SD781 to SD793 IMASK instruction mask pattern Mask pattern SD781 l63 to l59 l48 SD782 l79 to l65 l64 to SD793 l255 to App - 81 l241 l240 (7) A to Q/QnA conversion ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to Q/QnA special registers SD1000 to SD1255 after A to Q/QnA conversion. These special registers are all set by the system, and cannot be turned ON or OFF by the user program. To set data by the user program, correct the program for use of the Q/QnACPU special registers. However, some of SD1200 to SD1255 (corresponding to D9200 to 9255 before conversion) can be set by the user program if they could be set by the user program before conversion. For details on the ACPU special registers, refer to the user's manual for the corresponding CPU, and MELSECNET or MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference Manuals. REMARK Supplemental explanation on "Special Register for Modification" column 1) For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified, modify it to the special register for Q/QnACPU. is specified, special register after 2) For the device numbers for which conversion can be used. 3) Device numbers for which is specified do not function for Q/QnACPU. Special Register List ACPU Special Register D9000 Special Register after Conversion SD1000 Special Register for Modification Name Fuse blown Corresponding CPU Meaning Explanation Number of module with blown fuse When fuse blown modules are detected, the first I/O number of the lowest number of the detected modules is stored in hexadecimal. (Example: When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown, "50" is stored in hexadecimal) To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal. (Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0.) • Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I/O stations. • Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred. A0J2 I/O module D9001 SD1001 Fuse blown Extension base unit Setting switch Stored data Slot No. of base unit 0 1 0 5 1 2 1 6 2 3 2 7 3 4 3 8 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 Number of module with blown fuse Stored data • For the remote I/O station, the value of (module I/O No./10H) + 1 is stored. App - 82 Special Register List (Continued) ACPU Special Register D9002 Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification Name I/O module verificatio n error SD1002 Meaning I/O module verification error module number If I/O modules, of which data are different from data entered, are detected when the power is turned on, the first I/O number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in hexadecimal. (Storing method is the same as that of SD1000.) To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal. (Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0.) • I/O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote I/O stations. • Error status of the MINI(S3) link detected on loaded MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master module is stored. B15 8th B8 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st module module module module module module module module D9004 NIMI link error SD1004 Error detection status Corresponding CPU Explanation B7 8th B0 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st module module module module module module module module QnA On the PLC CPU and A(1S)J71PT32(S3) sides, the bit corresponding to A(1S)J71PT32(S3) with communication error turns on. The corresponding bit turns on when A(1S)J71PT32(S3)'s following signals turn on. · Hardware error (X0/X20) · MINI (S3) link error detected (X6/X26) · MINI (S3) link communication error (X7/X27) D9005 D9008 D9009 D9010 AC DOWN counter SD1005 SD1008 SD1009 SD1010 SD0 SD62 Self-diag nostic error Annuncia tor detection Error step D9011 SD1011 Error step D9014 SD1014 I/O control mode Number of time for AC DOWN Self-diag -nosis error number F number at which external failure has occurred Step number at which operation error has occurred. Step number at which operation error has occurred. I/O control mode number • When the AC power supply module is used, 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms.(The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON. • When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms. (The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON. • When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms. (The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON. • When error is found as a result of self-diagnosis, error number is stored in BIN code. • When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F , the F number, which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on, is stored in BIN code. • SD62 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction. If another F number has been detected, clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62. • When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by or OUT F SET F , the F number, which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on, is stored in BIN code. • SD62 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU module front to ON position. If another F number has been detected, clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62. • When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction, the step number, at which the error has occurred, is stored in BIN code. Thereafter, each time operation error occurs, the contents of SD1010 are renewed. • When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction, the step number, at which the error has occurred, is stored in BIN code. Since the step number is stored into SD1011 when SM1011 turns from OFF to ON, the data of SD1011 is not updated unless SM1011 is cleared by a user program. • The I/O control mode set is returned in any of the following numbers: 0: Both input and output in direct mode 1: Input in refresh mode, output in direct mode 3: Both input and output in refresh mode App - 83 QCPU QnA Special Register List (Continued) ACPU Special Register Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification Name Meaning Corresponding CPU Explanation • The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203. B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 Remote RUN/STOP by computer D9015 SD1015 SD203 Operatin g state of CPU Operating state of CPU 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 PAUSE * 1 B4 B3 B0 Key switch of CPU 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 PAUSE *1 3 STEP RUN Cannot be changed by remote RUN/STOP Status in program 0 Other than following 1 instruction execution STOP Remote RUN/STOP by parameter 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 PAUSE *1 *1: When the CPU module is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off, the CPU module remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode. Program number 0: Main program (ROM) 1: Main program (RAM) 2: Subprogram 1 (RAM) 3: Subprogram 2 (RAM) 4: Subprogram 3 (RAM) 5: Subprogram 1 (ROM) 6: Subprogram 2 (ROM) 7: Subprogram 3 (ROM) 8: Main program (E2PROM) 9: Subprogram 1 (E2PROM) A: Subprogram 2 (E2PROM) B:Subprogram 3 (E2PROM) • Indicates which sequence program is run presently. One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code. D9016 SD1016 D9017 SD1017 SD520 Scan time Minimum scan time (In 10 ms units) • If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520, the value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code. D9018 SD1018 SD524 Scan time Scan time (In 10 ms units) • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always rewritten. SD526 Scan time Maximum scan time (In 10 ms units) • If scan time is larger than the content of SD526, the value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code. • Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples of 10 ms. 0 : No setting 1 to 200 : Set. Program is executed at intervals of (set 10 ms. value) • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always rewritten. D9019 SD1019 D9020 SD1020 Constant scan Constant scan time (User sets in 10 ms units) D9021 SD1021 Scan time Scan time (In 1 ms units) App - 84 Special Register List (Continued) ACPU Special Register D9022 Special Register after Conversion SD1022 Special Register for Modification SD412 Name 1 second counter Corresponding CPU Meaning Explanation Count in units of 1s. • When the PLC CPU starts running, it starts counting 1 every second. • It starts counting up from 0 to 32767, then down to -32768 and then again up to 0. Counting repeats this routine. • Stores the year (2 lower digits) and month in BCD. D9025 Time data SD1025 Time data (year, month) B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 Year B0 (e.g.) July. 1987 H8707 B0 (e.g.) 31st, 10 o'clock H3110 Month • Stores the day and hour in BCD. D9026 Time data SD1026 B15 Time data (day, hour) B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 Day Hour • Stores the minute and second in BCD. D9027 Time data SD1027 Time data (minute, second) B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 Min. (e.g.) 35, 48 H3548 B0 Sec. • Stores the day of the week in BCD. B15 D9028 D9035 D9036 D9037 Time data SD1028 SD1035 SD648 SD1036 Extensio n file register Extensio n file register for designati on of device number SD1037 Device number when individual devices from extension file register are directly accessed B8 B7 B4 B3 (e.g.) Friday H0005 B0 Day of week Time data (, day of week) Use block No. B12 B11 "0" must be set 0 1 Sun Mon 2 Tues 3 Wed 4 Thur 5 Fri 6 Sat • Stores the block No. of the extension file register being used in BCD code. • Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN data. Use consecutive numbers beginning with R0 of block No. 1 to designate device numbers. Extension file register 0 to 16383 Block No.1 area 16384 Block No.2 areaa to SD1036,SD1037 Device No. (BIN) to D9038 SD1038 SD207 Priorities 1 to 4 LED display priority ranking D9039 SD1039 SD208 • Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate (or flicker) to indicate errors with error code numbers. • Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below. B15 to B12 B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to B0 SD207 4th priority 3rd priority 2nd priority 1st priority SD208 Priorities 5 to 7 7th priority 6th priority 5th priority • For details, refer to the applicable CPUs User's Manual and the ACPU Programming manual (Fundamentals) SH-3435 (version I or later). App - 85 Special Register List (Continued) ACPU Special Register Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification Name Meaning Corresponding CPU Explanation Turned on/off with a peripheral device. When STRA or STRAR is executed, the value stored in SD1044 is used as the sampling trace condition. At scanning 0 At time Time (In 10 ms units) The value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code. • Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a binary value. • Stores "0" if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller, which cannot be expansion file register No. 1, is used or if SM320 is OFF. • Stores error code of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code. 0 : No error 80 : SFC program parameter error 81 : SFC code error 82 : Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded 83 : Block start error 84 : SFC program operation error • Stores the block number in which an error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code. In the case of error 83 the starting block number is stored. • Stores the step number, where error code 84 occurred in an SFC program, in BIN code. Stores "0" when error code 80, 81 or 82 occurred. Stores the block stating step number when error code 83 occurs. D9044 SD1044 For sampling trance Step or time during sampling trace D9049 SD1049 Work area for SFC Block number of extension file register D9050 SD1050 SFC program error number Error code generated by SFC program D9051 SD1051 Error block Block number where error occurred D9052 SD1052 Error step Step number where error occurred D9053 SD1053 Error transition Transition condition number where error occurred D9054 SD1054 Error sequence step Sequence step number where error occurred • Stores the transition condition number, where error code 84 occurred in an SFC program, in BIN code. Stores "0" when error code 80, 81, 82 or 82 occurred. • Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code. Status latch step • Stores the step number when status latch is executed. • Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program. • Stores the block number and the step number if status latch is executed in a SFC program. D9055 SD1055 SD812 Status latch Block No. (BIN) Step No. (BIN) Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits • Stores the software version of internal system in ASCII code. D9060 D9072 D9081 SD1060 SD392 Software version SD1072 PLC communic ation check SD1081 Number of empty blocks in communic ations request registration area SD714 Software version of internal system High byte Low byte Stored in low byte Inconsistent value in high byte QnA "41H" is stored when using version "A" Note: The software version of the initial system may differ from the version indicated by the version information printed on the rear of the case. Serial communication module data check • In the self-loopback test of the serial communication module, the serial communication module writes/reads data automatically to make communication checks. 0 to 32 • Stores the number of empty blocks in communication request registration area to remote terminal module connected to MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master unit, A2CCPU A52GCPU. App - 86 the the the or QnA Special Register List (Continued) ACPU Special Register D9085 Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification Register for setting time check value SD1085 D9090 SD1090 D9091 SD1091 D9094 SD1094 D9100 SD1100 D9101 SD1101 D9102 SD1102 D9103 SD1103 D9104 SD1104 D9105 SD1105 D9106 SD1106 D9107 SD1107 D9108 SD1108 D9109 SD1109 D9110 SD1110 D9111 SD1111 D9112 SD1112 D9113 SD1113 D9114 SD1114 D9116 SD1116 D9117 SD1117 D9118 SD1118 D9119 SD1119 D9120 SD1120 D9121 SD1121 Name SD251 Head device No. in data area of microcomp uter sub routine INPUT Instruction error Head I/O number of I/O module to be replaced Meaning Corresponding CPU Explanation 1S to 65535S • Sets the time check time of the data link instructions (ZNRD, ZNWR) for the MELSECNET/10. • Setting range : 1 s to 65535 s (1 to 65535) • Setting unit :S • Default value : 10 s (If 0 has been set, default 10 s is applied) See each micro computer package • For details, refer to the manual of each microcomputer package. Detailed error code • Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error. Head I/O number of I/O module to be replaced • Stores the first two digits of the head I/O number of the I/O module, which will be dismounted/mounted online (with power on), in BIN value. Example) Input H2F module X2F0 • Output module numbers (in units of 16 points), of which fuses have blown, are entered in bit pattern (Preset output module numbers when parameter setting has been performed.). Fuse blown module Bit pattern in units of 16 points, indicating the modules whose fuses have blown 15 14 13 12 11 10 SD1100 0 0 0 SD1101 0 0 0 SD1107 0 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y7 B0 0 0 (YCO) 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y7 30 0 0 0 (Y80) 1 0 Indicates fuse flown status • Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I/O stations. (If normal status is restored, clear is not performed. Therefore, it is required to perform clear by user program.) • Set the set value of the step transition watchdog timer and the annunciator number (F number) that will turn on when the watchdog timer times out. B15 to B8 B7 to B0 Step transfer monitoring timer setting Time setting value and the F number at time out Set time limit of timer 0 to 255 (1 to 255 sec.: (In 1 sec units)) Set F number (By turning on any of MS1108 to SM1114, the monitoring timer starts. If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time, set annunciator (F) is tuned on.) I/O module verification error Bit pattern, in units of 16 points, indicating the modules with verification errors. • When I/O modules, of which data are different from those entered at power-on, have been detected, the I/O module numbers (in units of 16 points) are entered in bit pattern. (Preset I/O module numbers set in parameters when parameter setting has been performed.). B15 14 13 12 11 10 SD1116 SD1117 SD1123 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 XY 100 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 0 1 1 0 XY 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates I/O module verification error D9122 SD1122 D9123 SD1123 • I/O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote I/O stations. (If normal status is restored, clear is not performed. Therefore, it is required to perform clear by user program.) App - 87 Special Register List (Continued) ACPU Special Register Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification D9124 SD1124 SD63 D9125 SD1125 SD64 D9126 SD1126 SD65 D9127 SD1127 SD66 D9128 SD1128 SD67 D9129 D9130 D9131 D9132 SD1129 SD1130 SD1131 SD1132 SD68 Name Annunciat or detection quantity Meaning Annunciator detection quantity Annunciator detection numbers • When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by SET F , 1 is added to the contents of SD63. When RST F or LEDR instruction is executed, 1 is subtracted from the contents of SD63. (If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the CPU module, pressing the switch can execute the same processing.) Quantity, which has been turned on by SET F is stored up to 8. • When any of F0 to 2047 is turned on by SET F , the annunciator numbers (F numbers) that are turned on in order are registered into D9125 to D9132. The F number turned off by RST F is erased from any of D9125 to D9132, and the F numbers stored after the erased F number are shifted to the preceding registers. By executing LEDR instruction, the contents of SD64 to SD71 are shifted upward by one. (If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the CPU module, pressing the switch can execute the same processing.) When there are 8 annunciator detections, the 9th one is not stored into SD64 to SD71 even if detected. SET F50 Annunciat or detection number SD69 SD70 SD71 App - 88 Corresponding CPU Explanation SET F25 SET F99 RST F25 SET F15 SET F70 SET F65 SET SET SET SET F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 SD63 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 SD65 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15 SD66 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 SD67 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65 SD68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38 SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110 SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151 SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210 (8) Fuse blown module Number Name Meaning SD1300 SD1301 SD1302 SD1303 SD1304 SD1305 SD1306 SD1307 Fuse blown module SD1308 SD1309 to SD1330 Bit pattern in units of 16 points, indicating the modules whose fuses have blown 0: No blown fuse 1: Fuse blown present • The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a bit pattern (in units of 16 points). (If the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set numbers are stored.) • Also detects blown fuse state at remote station output modules B15 14 13 12 11 10 SD1300 0 SD1301 SD1331 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (YC0) 0 0 (Y1F0) 0 0 0 0 (Y1A) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Y1F B0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Y1F 30) 1 1 1 External power supply disconnecte d module (For future extension) Bit pattern in units of 16 points, indicating the modules whose external power supply has been disconnected 0: External power supply disconnected 1: External power supply not disconnected D9101 D9102 D9103 D9104 D9105 S (Error) D9106 Rem D9107 New 1 New to New • Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one. This flag is cleared by error resetting operation. • The module number (in units of 16 points) whose external power supply has been disconnected is input as a bit pattern. (If the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set numbers are used.) B15 14 13 12 11 10 Corresponding Corresponding ACPU CPU D9 D9100 Indicates fuse flown status SD1331 SD1350 to SD1381 Set by (When set) Explanation 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SD1350 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SD1351 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SD1381 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 New S (Error) New QCPU remote Indicates fuse flown status (9) I/O module verification Number Name Meaning SD1400 SD1401 SD1402 SD1403 SD1404 SD1405 SD1406 SD1407 SD1408 SD1409 to SD1430 SD1431 I/O module verification error Bit pattern, in units of 16 points, indicating the modules with verification 0: No I/O verification errors. errors 1: I/O verification error present Set by (When set) Explanation • When the I/O modules whose I/O module information differs from that registered at power on are detected, the numbers of those I/O modules (in units of 16 points) are entered in bit pattern. (If the I/O numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set numbers are stored.) • Also detects I/O module information of remote station B15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ( X0Y) Corresponding Corresponding ACPU CPU D9 D9116 D9117 D9118 D9119 D9120 D9121 D9122 S (Error) D9123 D9116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9117 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 190 ( ) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New D9123 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New to New ( 1 ) XY 1FE0 1 Indicates I/O module verification error • Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one. This flag is cleared by error resetting operation. App - 89 New Rem Appendix 5 Appendix 5.1 Application Program Examples Flip-flop ladder (1) Y70 turns ON when X00 is turned ON, and turns OFF when X01 is turned ON. 0 2 X0 X1 SET Y70 RST Y70 CIRCUIT END (2) When X02 is turned ON, Y71 turns OFF if Y70 is ON, and turns on if Y70 is OFF. This flip-flop operation is repeated. 0 6 X2 T1 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-16 Program name MAIN T0 T0 T1 K5 K5 Y70 12 T0 Y71 CIRCUIT END X2 T0 contact T1 contact Y70 Y71 App - 90 (3) The flip-flop operation starts when X2 is turn-ed on. In this operation, Y70 turns on if the timer T0 is on, and Y71 turns on if the timer T1 is on. (Cycle: 10 s) 0 X2 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-17 Program name MAIN T1 T0 K50 T1 7 T0 PLS M0 Y70 11 16 M0 RST T0 T1 T1 K50 T1 22 26 T1 Y71 M1 CIRCUIT END X2 T0 contact T1 contact Y70 Y71 App - 91 PLS M1 RST T0 Appendix 5.2 One shot ladder (1) Output starts and continues for a certain time after input X1 is turned on. (Time for the input being on must be longer than the set time limit.) 0 K70 T15 X1 T15 Y75 CIRCUIT END X1 T15 normally close Y75 Set time limit 7s (2) When the input X0 is turned on momentarily, Y76 turns on for a certain time. 0 X0 K100 T16 T16 Y76 Y76 CIRCUIT END (3) Output starts and continues for a certain time when the input X0 is switched from on to off. 0 3 X0 M1 PLF T16 M1 K100 T16 Y76 Y76 CIRCUIT END X0 Y76 Set time limit 10 s App - 92 Pulse width Appendix 5.3 Long time timer (1) Necessary time is obtained by connecting timers in serial. 0 5 11 X2 K30000 3000.0 s T9 K20000 T10 2000.0 s T9 T10 Y72 CIRCUIT END Turns on after the timer goes time limit X2 T9 normally open T10 normally open Y72 3000 s 2000 s 5000 s (2) Necessary time is obtained by using timers and counters. Timer time limit X Counter's set value = Long time timer (note that accuracy of timers are accumulated.) 0 7 X2 M56 X2 C7 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-18 Program name MAIN K9000 T14 Y73 Y73 Y73 12 T14 C7 Turns on after the timer goes time limit K4 M56 18 C7 RST C7 CIRCUIT END X2 1 scan T14 coil T14 normally open (M56) C7 Y73 900 s x 4 = 3600 s = 1 hour (Note) Sufficient time is obtained with the counter C7, which counts the number of time-outs of the timer T14. With M56, T14 is reset after it goes time-out. With C7, the output Y73 is self-energized while count up is in progress. With Y73, T14 is reset and following time-limit actions are stopped. App - 93 Appendix 5.4 Off delay timer MELSEC-Q PLCs do not provide off delay timers. Make it as follows. (1) T6 starts operating at the timing when X5 is turned OFF. 0 6 Y70 X5 X5 T6 T6 K8 Y70 Y70 CIRCUIT END X5 T6 coil T6 normally close Y70 Set time limit 0.8 s (2) Turn on X5 momentarily. After that, the timer T8 starts operating at the timing when X6 is momentarily turned ON. 0 X5 T8 Y71 Y71 4 X6 Y71 T8 M45 K41 M45 CIRCUIT END X5 X6 T8 coil,M45 T8 normally close Y71 Set time limit 4.1 s (Note) The above ladder behaves as an off delay ladder by momentarily turning ON input X5 and X6. M45 is equivalent to a momentary contact of T8. App - 94 Appendix 5.5 On delay timer (momentary input) PLC's timers operate with the on delay system, which allows easy continuous inputs but requires relays M for momentary inputs. 0 X1 X2 10 A: SCHOOL Project name QA-19 Program name MAIN T4 T4 K62 M50 The timer starts after X1 turns ON, and continue self-energized. Y70 Turn ON 6.2 s later Y71 Turn OFF 6.2 s later T4 M50 8 Path name CIRCUIT END X1 X2 T4,M50 Y70 Y71 Set time limit 6.2 s (Note) The above ladder behaves as an on delay ladder by momentarily turning on input X1 and X2. App - 95 Appendix 5.6 ON-OFF repeat ladder In an ON-OFF repeat ladder, Y70 turns ON when X0 is turned ON, and turns OFF when X0 is turned ON again. 0 X1 FF Y70 CIRCUIT END Appendix 5.7 Preventing chattering input The timer is set so that it starts output when the input keeps being on for 0.2 s. 0 5 X0 T1 T1 K2 M1 CIRCUIT END M1 turns ON when X0 keeps being ON for 0.2 s or longer. Therefore, this is used instead of X0 when writing a program. App - 96 Appendix 5.8 Ladders with a common line The following ladder cannot be operated by PLC programs. To make such ladders controllable, use master control instructions (MC, MCR) in a program. Manual X0 Relay ladder Auto X1 X4 X3 Y71 Y79 X2 Y70 X2 X7 X6 Y71 X7 Y71 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-1 Program name MAIN A sequence program with master controls 0 N0 4 6 X0 X1 MC M1 X2 N0 14 17 X7 X1 X0 M2 X4 X3 X7 Y79 M10 Y71 Manual circuit M11 MCR MC N0 N0 M2 M20 Auto circuit M21 20 21 M1 M10 X6 9 10 N0 MCR N0 Y70 M20 25 M11 X2 Y71 M21 Y71 CIRCUIT END App - 97 Common circuit Appendix 5.9 Time control program With the time control program, time value is set in the two digits of a digital switch, according to which the outputs Y70 to Y72 turn on after the set time limit has elapsed. Currently elapsed time is displayed on Y40 to Y47. This operation is repeated. Digital switch for setting time 59 0.1 s units Display for current time 26 PLC X20 to X27 0 3 16 7 21 Pushbutton for reading time X3 Switch for timer X4 Switch for operation X5 Y40 to Y47 Turns on if the current value Y70 is less than 2 s Turns on if the current value Y71 is just 3 s Turns on if the current value Y72 is 4.1 s or more. X3 M5 BIN Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-2 Program name MAIN PLS M5 K2X20 D1 T3 X4 T4 T4 <> 0.1 s units K0 D1 T3 X5 BCD T3 K10 D1 Reading the set time 2 digits in 0.1 s units Flicker for repeating the timer K2Y40 Output time value to exterior > K20 T3 Y70 Turns on when a current value of T3 is from 0.1 to 1.9 s = K30 T3 Y71 < K40 T3 Y72 Turns on when a current value of T3 is 3.0 s Turns on when a current value of T3 is 4.1 s or more. CIRCUIT END App - 98 Appendix 5.10 Clock ladder With a clock ladder, the clock data such as hour, minute and second is output to a digital display. A: SCHOOL Project name QA-3 Program name MAIN T0 5 T1 T1 0 T0 T1 10 C11 15 RST C12 24 RST C13 33 38 Path name SM400 K5 K5 0.5 s flicker K60 C11 Count seconds C11 K60 C12 Count minutes C12 K99 C13 Count hours RST C13 BCD C11 K2Y40 BCD C12 K2Y48 BCD C13 K2Y50 CIRCUIT END 47 Ones digit seconds K2Y40 Tens digit 18 Ones digit minutes K2Y48 Tens digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Ones digit 64 hours K2Y50 Tens digit LED of output module ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 Y4F Y4E Y4D Y4C Y4B Y4A Y49 Y48 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40 8 4 2 Tens digit 1 8 4 2 Ones digit K2Y50 hour, Output 1 8 4 2 1 8 Tens digit 4 2 Ones digit K2Y48 minute, Output App - 99 1 8 4 2 Tens digit 1 8 4 2 Ones digit K2Y40 second, Output 1 Appendix 5.11 Starting - operation of electrical machinery By turning the start switch on, machinery starts operation. After operation time operation mode. has elapsed, the machinery enters an arc interlock state and then 13 0 18 A: SCHOOL Project name QA-20 Program name MAIN T5 X0 T6 X1 Y70 9 Path name Y70 K20 T5 Y72 Y70 T5 Y72 T6 Y70 Y71 K5 Y72 operation Start X0 Stop X01 Operation Y70 operation operation T5 = 2 s T6 = 0.5 s·····Arc interlock App - 100 period timer operation CIRCUIT END Y72 RUN Y71 Y72 Y71 Arc interlock Appendix 5.12 Displaying elapsed time and outputting before time limit With the following ladder, time elapsed in the timer is displayed on the LED, and output is performed before the set time limit has been reached. This system can also be applied to counters. Elapsed time display (4 digits of BCD) Output module Y6C to 6F x 100 Y68 to 6B x 10 Y64 to 67 x1 Y60 to 63 x 0.1 X2 Starts when turned on Stops when turned off 0 1234 X2 BCD T53 K6000 Timer starts when X2 T53 is turned ON K4Y60 Outputs current value of timer = Y76 K500 T53 Y76 Turns on if the current value is 50 s or more > K120 T53 Y77 Turns on if the current value is 12 s or less CIRCUIT END 0 X2 T4 BCD T4 K3000 K4Y60 Outputs current value of timer Y70 Turns on if the current value is 30 s or less Turns on if the current value is from 30 to 31.9 s Turns on if the current value is from 32 to 33.9 s Turns on if the current value is 34 s or more Turns on if the current value is 60 s or more Turns on if the current value is 80 s or more > K300 T4 < K299 T4 > K320 T4 Y71 < K319 T4 > K340 T4 Y72 < K339 T4 Y73 <= K600 T4 Y74 <= K800 T4 Y75 CIRCUIT END App - 101 Timer starts when X2 is turned on Appendix 5.13 Retentive timer Input X2 switches between on and off continuously. The time of X2 being on is accumulated and Y72 turns on according to this accumulated value n. (1) When using a ladder that accumulates value without a retentive timer. 0 2 X2 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-21 Program name MAIN M0 M0 PLS Timer starts when X2 is turned on M1 K600 T195 9 12 15 M1 M0 T195 MOV D7 T195 MOV T195 D7 MOV K0 D7 Y72 CIRCUIT END Writes D7 to timer when X2 is turned on Save the current value of the timer to D7 Clears D7 when the timer goes time out Y72 turns on when the timer goes time out (2) When retentive timers are allocated in the device settings of PLC parameters. Retentive timer (ST): 224 points (ST0 to ST223) 0 5 7 X2 T195 X1 RST CIRCUIT END App - 102 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-8 Program name MAIN K600 T195 Timer starts when X2 is turned on Y72 Cannot be cleared by turning off T195 Can be cleared by turning on X1 Appendix 5.14 Switching timer set value externally (1) With an external switch, a value to be set in one timer can be selected from three patterns; 1 s, 10 s, and 100 s A timer is activated and reset by a pushbutton switch. 1s SC 10 s 100 s PB Starts the timer PB Resets the timer ~ Input power supply 0 3 6 9 11 12 OL X0 Y70 X1 X2 Indicates the timer is in operation RL Indicates the timer has gone time out Y71 X3 Y72 Load MC X4 to to ~ Load power supply X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 M0 Program name MAIN Set value 1 s MOV K100 D0 Set value 10 s MOV K1000 D0 Set value 100 s SET M0 Starts the timer RST M0 Stops the timer D0 Y72 App - 103 QA-22 D0 Y71 CIRCUIT END Project name K10 T8 T8 A: SCHO MOV Y70 19 Path name ON while the timer is in operation Turns ON when the timer goes time out Appendix 5.15 Setting counters externally With an external digital switch having 4 digits, counters can be set remotely and their current values are displayed in 4 digits. In addition to every count-up, the timer outputs data when it reaches a value of 100 and 50 before the set limit. Note that a setting error is indicated if the set limit of counters is less than 100. I/O UNIT1 I/O UNIT0 I/O UNIT3 I/O UNIT4 X20-2F X0-1F Y60-6F Y70-74 Digital switch (BCD x 4 digits) 1 2 3 4 DC12V AC100V PB PB PB Setting signal X0 Start X5 Reset or stop X1 Y70 Y71 Count pulse X3 DC12V Current value display BCD x 4 digits Y72 Y73 RL Setting error RL ON during RUN R1 R2 DC24V Y74 R3 Turns on at 100 before the set value Turns on at 50 before the set value Turns on at counter stop Setting value Maximum setting value 9999 Set error range Start Turn on X5 Y71 turns on Y72 turns on at 100 before the set value App - 104 Y73 turns on at 50 before the set value Y74 turns on at the set value 0 2 4 12 24 X0 X1 M0 M0 X5 BIN > Y70 K100 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-4 Program name MAIN SET M0 RST M0 K4X20 D0 Reading the set value Y70 Outputs an error if 100 or less D0 MOV D0 D1 - K100 D1 MOV D0 D2 - K50 D2 C0 Setting Set value ? 100 (100 before the set value) Y71 Set value ? 50 (50 before the set value) ON during RUN Y71 28 N0 31 Y71 MC N0 M3 X3 M3 C0 C1 C2 44 45 58 62 64 66 X1 M0 BCD C1 MCR N0 RST C0 RST C1 RST C2 C0 D0 D1 D2 K4Y60 Y72 C2 Y73 C0 Y74 CIRCUIT END App - 105 Counter that turns on at stop Counter that turns on at 100 before the set value Counter that turns on at 50 before the set value Counter is reset by turning on X1 Display counted values to exterior Turns on at 100 before the set value Turns on at 50 before the set value Turns on at a the set value Appendix 5.16 Measuring operation time Setting operation time to a control target is useful for judging when to replace its components, do lubrication to it, etc. The timer ST and data register D must have back-up power source so that they can continue operating at power failure. With the contents of D31 (in one hour units) displayed externally, it can work as an operation timer. 0 5 25 A: SCHOOL Project name QA-23 Program name MAIN K3600 ST250 X2 ST250 RST = 21 Path name K10 D30 SM400 (Always ON) <= K1000 Appendix 5.17 T250 + K1 D30 MOV K0 D30 + K1 D31 Measures in 1 hour units BCD D31 K4Y60 Output operation time to exterior Indicates when to replace D31 CIRCUIT END 6 minutes timer 1 hour timer Y70 100 hours is set as the management time. Measuring cycle time By measuring operation time of a control target (from its start to end), it is possible to display cycle time out, control time lag, etc. The following ladder can indicate cycle time out. To measure time lag, use the <, >, and = instructions to judge the state of T200, and turn on a counter. 0 X0 X1 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-24 Program name MAIN M56 In a cycle M56 K32760 Measures cycle time T200 M56 T200 10 < K400 T200 14 < X7 K300 T200 4 24 SET >= K400 T200 RST RST CIRCUIT END App - 106 Cycle time run out Y70 K32760 Number of cycle times of C10 3.01 to 4.00 s Y70 Clears the time out display and accumulated counts C10 Complement Appendix 5.18 Application example of (D) CML (P) Obtain absolute values of negative values – 32768 or smaller (to –2147483648 ...... 32 bit data). DCML D0 D20 D+ K1 D20 D0 D1 B B B B B B ·················· B1 B0 15 14 ·················· 1 0 15 14 Before 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 DCML execution (Negative number) D21 After DCML execution 0 1 0 0 D20 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 D21 After D + execution 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 D20 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 (Absolute value) (Example) 999 is subtracted from a set value each time X1 is turned on, and the resulting value is displayed. When the resulting value goes down below zero, the output Y70 turns on, and the absolute value of the resulting value is displayed. Read the set value Turn on X0 Subtraction (- 999) Turn on X1 Negative number obtained? NO YES Y70 setting DCML execution + 1 execution Results display 0 4 X0 X1 D> 18 K0 K4X20 D0 Input data D-P K999 D0 Subtract 999 SET Y70 F3 PLS F3 M0 Turn Y70 on if negative number obtained D0 M0 D+ 31 DBIN Y70 CIRCUIT END App - 107 DCML D0 D20 D20 D30 K1 If D0 is a negative number, complement of 2 is taken to have a positive number (absolute value) DBCD D30 K8Y40 Output an absolute value DBCD D0 K8Y40 Outputs a positive number Appendix 5.19 Program showing divided value of 4-digit BIN value to 4 places of decimals (1) Example 1 Two digital switches are provided, one of which contains a dividend, and the other of which contains a divisor. The results of operation using this dividend and divisor are displayed in its 4 integral parts and 4 decimal parts. Digital display Digital switch QCPU QX 42 Y5F to Y50 QY 42P Y4F to Y40 X3F to X30 X2F to X20 X0 Dividend Digital switch X30 to X3F→D0 Divisor Digital switch X20 to X2F→D1 Import dividend and dividor Division (D0)÷(D1)= (D2)……(D3) Quotient Remainder Display a quotient Clear index register Z0, Z1, data register D10 FOR 4×(Z1)→(D10) HC-(D10)→(Z0) 1st time 4×0 → 0 HC- K0 →HC HC- K4 →H8 2nd time 4×1 → 4 3rd time 4×2 → 8 HC- K8 →H4 4th time 4×3 → 12 HC- K12 →H0 (D3)×10→(D3) (D3)÷(D1)= (D2)……(D3) Set display address after the decimal point Multiply the remainder with 10, divide the result and take a quotient of lower 1 digit Display lower 1 digit Count the number of times (register Z1) INC Z1 NO NEXT Y4C Y48 Y44 Y40 to to to to 4F 4B 47 43 4 obtained? Last-1st YES END App - 108 2nd 3rd 4th digit The sequence program of example 1. The FOR-NEXT instruction is issued to divide each decimal place individually and display 4 decimal places in K4Y40. 0 X0 /P Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-5 Program name MAIN BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 D1 D2 Division D2 K4Y50 BCD-outputs a quotient Z0 Clears the index Z0 K0 D10 Clears D10 PLS M0 FOR K4 D0 BCDP DMOVP K0 MOVP 22 24 M0 * K4 Z1 D10 - H0C D10 Z0 * D3 K10 D3 / D3 D1 D2 D2 K1Y40Z0 INC Z1 BCD NEXT 45 CIRCUIT END The value of Z1 is added one every App - 109 INC Z1 instruction. Reads data Repeats 4 times (2) Example 2 D0 is divided by D1 to obtain D5 in 4 decimal places. The dividend D0 is multiplied with 10,000. The result of dividing calculation using this multiplied value is converted to a BCD value and output to an external digital display. K4Y50 K4Y40 D6 Integral number D5 Decimal number in 4 digits in 4 digits K4Y60 D7 Remainder of a decimal number 0 X0 Path name A: SCHOOL Project name QA-6 Program name MAIN BINP K4X30 D0 BINP K4X20 D1 MOVP K0 D2 Clears D2 10000-fold *P D0 K10000 D3 D/P D3 D1 D5 DBCDP D5 D5 DBCDP D7 D7 MOVP D6 K4Y50 Integral part MOVP D5 K4Y40 Decimal fraction MOVP D7 K4Y60 Decimal number remainder CIRCUIT END App - 110 Appendix 5.20 Carriage line control The following is an example of sequence control using a carriage to convey works (materials). Series of operations performed in one cycle is as follows; A work is set on the carriage, the carriage moves forward, the carriage stops at forward limit, the pushing arm pushes the work to the other conveyer side, and the carriage moves back to the backward limit. Container for work LS open complete (X4) LS work present (X1) LS backward limit (X3) Push (Y73) Carriage Carriage moves forward (Y71) Carriage moves back (Y72) Push back (Y74) Control panel LS forward limit (X2) RUN indicator (Y70) Start button (X0) MELSEC-Q Input Output Start button Switch (LS work present) X0 Y70 X1 Y71 M Carriage moves forward X2 Y72 M Carriage moves back X3 Y73 Push X4 Y74 Push back RUN indicator Switch (LS forward limit) Switch (LS backward limit) Switch (LS open complete) App - 111 0 X0 Y70 M2 Path name A: SCHO Project name QA-10 Program name MAIN Y70 X1 X3 M1 Y71 X2 PLS M1 F3 SET Y71 F3 RST F3 Y71 SET Y73 F3 K30 T0 RST Y73 F3 SET Y74 F3 RST Y74 F3 SET Y72 F3 RST Y72 F3 Y73 T0 Y74 X4 Y72 X3 M2 CIRCUIT END Timing chart Start buttonX0 Switch (LS work present)X1 Switch (LS forward limit)X2 Switch (LS backward limit) X3 Switch (LS open complete) X4 RUN indicator Y70 Carriage moves forward Y71 Carriage moves back Y72 Push Y73 Push back Y74 3sec App - 112 RUN indicator Carriage moves forward Push Push back Carriage moves back Completion flag Appendix 5.21 Starting compressors in order using ring counters This system provides pressure control using three compressors. Pressure shortage is detected by the three pressure switches. The less pressure is provided, the more compressors are activated. To equal the number of usages of each compressor, compressors are activated according to the set order. System configuration of compressor control MELSEC-Q Compressor A B C Pressure switch PX1 PX2 PX3 Control panel Pressure shortage "Major" Sufficient pressure Pressure shortage "Medium" Pressure shortage "Minor" Start button Stop button MELSEC-Q Start Stop PB0 PB1 Pressure switch PX1 PX2 PX3 Input X0 X1 Output Y70 MC A Compressor A Y71 MC B Compressor B Y72 MC C Compressor C X2 X3 X4 Y73 Sufficient pressure Y74 Pressure shortage "Major" Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium" Y76 Pressure shortage "Minor" App - 113 Operation explanation (1) The pressure switches (X2, X3, X4) are initially off. In this state, turning on the start switch (X0) activates the three compressors all together, and when sufficient pressure is obtained (X2, X3, and X4 turn on), the three compressors stop. This is the basic operation of this system. If all compressors are at stop with sufficient pressure provided and the pressure shortage "Minor" is detected (X4 turns off), one compressor is activated and supplies pressure until sufficient pressure is obtained. The compressor activated as such is decided in order from A to C each time compressors are reactivated in reaction to pressure shortage. Note that the stop switch (X1) is available for stopping compressors at any time. (2) If one compressor could not supply sufficient pressure, the pressure shortage level goes up to "Medium" (X3 turns off) and the second compressor is activated to support the first compressor. This second compressor will be compressor C if compressor A has been in operation, A if B has been in operation, and B if C has been in operation. (3) If two compressors could not supply sufficient pressure, pressure shortage level goes up to "Major" (X2 turns off), and the last compressor is activated. When only one compressor is in operation and pressure shortage level goes from "Minor" to "Major" directly, the rest two compressors are activated at once. (4) When two or three compressors are in operation, they continue operating together until sufficient pressure is obtained and stop together when obtained (X4 turns on). Timing chart Start - (X0) PX3 - (X4) Pressure switch PX2 - (X3) PX1 - (X2) A - (Y70) Compressor B - (Y71) C - (Y72) Pressure shortage Compressor Major Minor A,B,C B App - 114 Minor Medium C A,C Major A,B,C Minor A Minor Minor Medium B C A,C 0 X0 X1 Path name A: SCHO Project name QA-11 Program name MAIN M0 RUN Y73 Indicates pressure status Y74 Pressure shortage "Major" Y75 Pressure shortage "Medium" Y76 Pressure shortage "Minor" PLS M1 F3 Turns on M9 at startup PLS M2 F3 SET M9 F3 Shifts by pressure shortage "Minor" RST M9 F3 RST F3 M12 RST F3 M11 RST F3 M10 SFT M13 F3 SFT F3 M12 SFT F3 M11 SFT F3 M10 RST F3 M13 SET M10 F3 Returns shift to M10 Y70 Compressor A Y71 Compressor B Y72 Compressor C M0 4 6 X4 X4 X3 X4 Y76 Y75 Pressure shortage "Minor" is indicated when the pressure switch X4 turns off. Y74 13 X3 X2 X4 Y76 Pressure shortage "Medium" is indicated when the pressure switch X3 (Medium) turns off. Y75 19 X2 X4 Pressure shortage "Major" is indicated when the pressure switch X2 (Minor) turns off. Y76 23 26 29 31 36 45 M0 Y74 M1 M0 M2 M10 Reset when X1 (stop) turns on Shift register M0 48 50 M13 X4 M0 M10 Y75 M11 Y76 M11 Y75 M12 Y76 M12 Y75 M10 Y76 CIRCUIT END App - 115 After the basic operation, one compressor is activated in reaction to pressure shortage detected. To use the three compressors equally, there is ordering control available. This control is enabled by the 3-stage ring counter (ring-shaped shift registers) M10 to M12. A shift signal is generated when pressure shortage is detected (X04 switches from on to off). Compressor A X0 Start X1 Stop SET M9 RST M10 B M11 C M12 X4(PX3)OFF Shift operation X4 M10 M11 M12 App - 116 Appendix 5.22 Application example of positioning control The following is an example of a positioning system with a pulse generator that outputs pulses per motor, brake, and unit of distance. In this system, a command value is set with the digital switch, and this set command value is compared with the current value at start-up to decide in which way, forward or reverse, the motor rotates. The current value in the register D16 is subtracted by 1 when in forward direction, and incremented by 1 when in reverse direction. Positioning completes when the command value matches the current value. The current value is converted to a BCD value so that current position is represented in 4-digit decimal numbers. OP Forward rotation Reverse rotation Motor Pulse generator OP Start MELSEC-Q X2 X0 Command value setting switch 5 4 0 Y70 Y71 Y72 X1 Forward rotation Reverse rotation Brake for current value display 0 3 6 2 mm X1 X10 X100 X1000 0 X0 X20 to X23 X24 to X27 X28 to X2B X2C to X2F Y4C to Y4F X1000 Y48 to Y4B X100 Y44 to Y47 X10 Y40 to Y43 X1 M0 BINP 20 M0 A: SCHO Project name QA-26 Program name MAIN M0 RUN Y72 Releases the brake D15 Reads the command value D16 Y70 Forward rotation > D15 X1 Y70 D16 Y71 Reverse rotation = 41 K4X20 Path name D15 Y71 38 8 mm M2 < brake D15 -P K1 D16 - 1 during forward rotation +P K1 D16 + 1 during reverse rotation M2 Checks consistency with the command value D16 X2 SM400 (Always ON) CIRCUIT END App - 117 MOV K0 D16 Clears OPR BCD D16 K4Y40 Displays the current value to exterior Appendix 5.23 Application example using index Z (1) Counts the number of manufactured products every day in one month cycle, and stores the resulting number to the corresponding register of the date (D1 to D31). (2) Inputs the planed number of products to manufacture using the external digital switch. Production stops when this number is accomplished. (3) Inputs the date using the external digital switch. (4) Displays to exterior how many products have been manufactured in the current month as well as the number manufactured on the current day. Date 3 0 Planed number of products 0 1 K2X20 8 K4X30 0 Input module Output module X02 Count value K2Y58 3 0 K4Y40 0 1 8 0 Manufactured number on the current day K4Y60 3 7 8 2 Accumulated number Date How many products manufactured on the current day is counted with C5. Accumulated number of products manufactured is counted with C6. The date is entered in the index Z to indirectly designate the data register corresponding to the date using D0Z0. When Z0 is 30, D0Z0 becomes 0 + Z, designating D30. D 0 0 D 8 124 D 16 263 D 24 170 D 32 0 D 1 159 D 9 129 D 17 241 D 25 194 D 33 3782 D 2 145 D 10 169 D 18 181 D 26 219 D 34 0 D 3 168 D 11 119 D 19 179 D 27 0 D 35 180 D 4 144 D 12 247 D 20 0 D 28 0 D 36 30 D 5 130 D 13 0 D 21 0 D 29 213 D 37 0 D 6 0 D 14 0 D 22 163 D 30 180 D 38 0 D 7 0 D 15 124 D 23 129 D 31 0 D 39 0 Accumulated number Planed number of products Date Manufacturing results of each day ranging from 1 to 31 are stored in D1 to D31, being available as production data. App - 118 0 5 16 43 46 57 71 79 = K0 SM410 X2 (0.1s clock) Tentative count value is set X0 K4X20 K0 K4X20 <= K32 D36 <= K1 D36 >= K31 <> Project name QA-7 Program name MAIN K32760 D35 D35 C5 K32760 C6 Digital switch When X20 to 2F are 0, writes 32760 to D35 and counts products manufactured BIN K4X20 D35 Inputs a production command BIN K2X30 D36 Inputs date SET M2 F3 RST M2 F3 PLS M3 F3 D36 M2 SM411 M3 A: SCHO MOV C5 <> Path name Y70 flashes indicating an error if date exceeding 31 is set Y070 D36 Z0 RST MOV SM400 (Always ON) X6 D36 C5 F3 Z0 MOV C5 D0Z0 BCD Z0 K2Y58 BCD D0Z0 YK440 BCD C6 K4Y60 MOV C6 D33 -P C5 C6 X7 RST C5 RST C5 RST C6 FMOV K0 D0 K32 FMOV K0 K4Y40 K3 Indirectly designates date Stores the number of products manufactured to data register Displays the manufacture date to exterior Displays the manufactured number on the current day Displays the manufactured number in one month Clears the daily manufactured number anytime on the day, if necessary Clears all at the end of month CIRCUIT END FMOV K0 D0 K32 Simultaneously transfers data 0 to D0 to D31. FMOV K0 K4Y40 K3 Simultaneously transfers data 0 to D0 to D31. App - 119 Appendix 5.24 Application example of FIFO instruction Manual coating work and its working time can be stored and duplicated by machinery later. Conveyor system MELSEC-Q Steps to Teaching panel X 20 21 22 23 24 Coating bath 25 Position is detected by sensors of X20 to 25 (K2X20) FIFO table 6 Pointer D10 Coating bath pattern Read using FIFRP K2Y72 D30 6 31 1 32 2 33 8 Step 1 11 1 Step 2 12 2 Step 3 13 8 Step 4 14 4 34 4 Step 5 15 16 Backed up data is read when X05 is turned on 35 16 Step 6 16 32 36 32 37 0 38 0 39 0 40 6 41 135 32 K2X20 1 Data is backed up when X03 is turned on Write using FIFWP FIFO table 6 Pointer D20 Read using FIFRP D1 (timer constant of T1) Step 1 21 135 Step 2 22 150 42 150 Washing Step 3 time Step 4 23 120 Data is backed up when X03 is turned on 43 120 24 100 44 100 Step 5 25 20 Backed up data is read when X05 is turned on 45 20 Step 6 26 135 46 135 0 Current value of T0 D0 135 135 Write using FIFWP App - 120 0 0 X0 Path name A: SCHO Project name QA-9 Program name MAIN Y70 Moves in right direction Y71 Moves in left direction M1 3 X1 M2 6 X2 Washes M3 K32000 T0 MOV 14 17 27 32 37 X2 M10 PLS < D10 K6 X3 52 56 60 62 67 71 D0 M10 F3 FIFWP K2X20 D10 FIFWP D0 D20 Stores the pattern of coating bath's position Stores washing time BMOVD10 D30 K20 Backs up stored data BMOVD30 D10 K20 Reads backed up data FIFRP K2Y72 D10 FIFRP D1 D20 Reads the position pattern of the washing bath Reads washing time K2X20 K2Y72 M1 Moves in right direction > K2X20 K2Y72 M1 M2 M2 Moves in left direction PLS M4 SET M5 Starts washing if the patters match X5 X6 <= K1 D10 M6 48 T0 < M4 M5 T1 T1 SM400 CIRCUIT END App - 121 RST M5 PLS M6 D1 BCD D10 K1Y60 MOV T1 D3 Washes Reads the next washing bath when current washing completes Outputs the pointer Appendix 5.25 Application example of data shift Working materials are conveyed along with their code numbers, and the data register of the processing machinery is analyzed to machine the work material according to its code number. Start Stop Code number 1 to 8 Move of work material Machinery X0 X1 Type detection Shift instruction Data register Y70 Input module K1X20 RUN Output module X2 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 A D30 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 B D31 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 C D32 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 D D33 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 E D34 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 F D35 M51 M52 M53 M54 M55 M56 M57 M58 A code number is stored in the data register, and the M corresponding to the stored number is activated to perform machining. Machinery A Machinery B Machinery C Machinery D Machinery E Machinery F D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 A code number is input by K1X20. A code number shifts when X2 is turned on. App - 122 0 X0 X1 Path name A: SCHO Project name QA-12 Program name MAIN Y70 RUN D30 Imports a code number K6 Shifts a code number Y70 4 8 12 53 94 SM400 (Always ON) MOV X2 Y70 Y70 Y70 K1X20 DSFLP D30 = K1 D30 M1 = K2 D30 M2 = K3 D30 M3 = K4 D30 M4 = K5 D30 M5 = K6 D30 M6 = K7 D30 M7 = K8 D30 M8 = K1 D31 M11 = K2 D31 M12 = K3 D31 M13 = K4 D31 M14 = K5 D31 M15 = K6 D31 M16 = K7 D31 M17 = K8 D31 M18 = K1 D32 M21 = K2 D32 M22 = K3 D32 M23 = K4 D32 M24 = K5 D32 M25 = K6 D32 M26 = K7 D32 M27 = K8 D32 M28 App - 123 Machinery A Machinery B Machinery C 135 176 217 Y70 Y70 Y70 = K1 D33 M31 = K2 D33 M32 = K3 D33 M33 = K4 D33 M34 = K5 D33 M35 = K6 D33 M36 = K7 D33 M37 = K8 D33 M38 = K1 D34 M41 = K2 D34 M42 = K3 D34 M43 = K4 D34 M44 = K5 D34 M45 = K6 D34 M46 = K7 D34 M47 = K8 D34 M48 = K1 D35 M51 = K2 D35 M52 = K3 D35 M53 = K4 D35 M54 = K5 D35 M55 = K6 D35 M56 = K7 D35 M57 = K8 D35 M58 CIRCUIT END App - 124 Machinery D Machinery E Machinery F Appendix 5.26 Path name A: SCHO Project name QA-14 Program name MAIN Example of operation program calculating square root of data The data stored in D5 is calculated to its square root and the result is stored in D6 and D7. 0 X0 MOVP K4X20 D5 Sets data BSQR D5 D6 Calculates the square root MOVP D7 K4Y50 Square root (integral part) MOVP D6 K4Y60 Square root (decimal part) CIRCUIT END Results of square root operation are stored as follows. Square root (integral part) Square root (decimal part) .... A value in 5th decimal pace is rounded off.Therefore a value in 4th D6 D5 D7 · = decimal place has error of ±1. 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 (BCD value) (BCD value) (BCD value) REMARK QCPUs provide square root operation instructions for data in a real number (floating point) format. App - 125 Appendix 5.27 Path name A: SCHO Project name QA-15 Program name MAIN Example of operation program calculating n-th power of data A value stored in D10 is calculated to its n-th power (n is a value stored in D14) and the result is stored in D10. 0 X1 FMOVP K0 BINP 18 P0 D D10 K4X30 D10 Sets data BINP K2X20 D14 -P K1 D14 D15 28 29 Clears data D15 21 23 K10 MOVP D10 X1 X1 D10 SCJ P0 CJ P0 FOR D14 D10 Sets n Multiplies the value n times NEXT X1 D/ D10 K10000 D16 DBCD D16 K6Y50 DBCD D18 K4Y40 BCD-outputs a value in 10 digits to exterior CIRCUIT END NOTE An operation error occurs if a value in D10 exceeds 2147483647. App - 126 Appendix 5.28 Program using digital switch to input data When always inputting and storing a set value of the digital switch to D10 of the PLC Input module Digital switch 1 2 3 CPU 4 X20 to X2F Data register BIN conversion D10 SM400 (Always ON) Wrong configuration BIN K4X20 D10 In the above program, changing a value of the digital switch with the PLC in RUN mode may cause codes other than 0 to 9 to occur at the timing of the change. This generates "OPERATION ERROR" of the CPU. To avoid this, write a program as follows. (Example 1) When 4 digits of X20 to X2F are used. 0 SM400 <= K0 K1X20 >= K9 K1X20 MOV K1X20 K1M20 <= K0 K1X24 >= K9 K1X24 MOV K1X24 K1M24 <= K0 K1X28 >= K9 K1X28 MOV K1X28 K1M28 <= K0 K1X2C >= K9 K1X2C MOV K1X2C K1M32 BIN K4M20 D10 (Example 2) When 8 digits of X20 to X3F are used. 0 SM400 4 7 <= K0 K1X20Z0 >= K9 K1X20Z0 Z0 FOR K8 MOV K1X20Z K1M100Z + K4 Z0 31 32 RST NEXT SM400 DBIN K8M100 DBCD D10 CIRCUIT END App - 127 D10 K8Y40 Appendix 5.29 Displaying number of faults with fault numbers using fault detection program The following program sequentially displays the number of turned-on bit devices (X, M. F, etc.) among many bit devices being used continuously, together with their device numbers. [Application example] When M or F is used as an output device of a fault detection program, use the following program to know how many faults were occurred and fault code numbers of the faults occurred. [Sequence program flow] (Operating procedure) Device F is used in the program example Fault detection ladder X2 ON OFF 1) Search fault (ON) devices 2) Display the number of faulty devices Displays the number of faulty devices on display A Display B Display A (Y50 to Y5F) (Y40 to Y4F) Display C X0 ON (Y60 to Y6F) OFF Displays the first fault number Displays the fault number on display C Condition of program The total number of faulty circuits are set to 50. X1 ON OFF Displays the number of remaining faulty devices. This number includes the next fault number and currently displayed fault number. NO Displays the last fault number Displays the number of remaining faulty devices on display A Displays the next fault number on display C YES App - 128 End 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 73 80 95 X20 Path name A: SCHO Project name QA-31 Program name MAIN F3 X24 F5 X28 F8 X2C F13 X30 F33 X34 F35 X38 F37 X3C Faulty circuit F39 X4 F1 X5 F11 X6 F16 X7 F40 X2 M200 DSUMP K8F1 D0 F3 MOVP D10 DSUMP K8F33 D0 +P D0 D10 BCDP D10 K4Y40 SET M400 RST M700 PLS M500 SET M700 SET M200 RST M600 MOV K0 Z0 DMOV K8F1 D0 X000 M200M400 M500 M600 D0 DMOVP K8F33 App - 129 D0 Searches ON devices Designates the head number of a faulty circuit (F1 to 0) 103 M100M200 DROR D0 SM700 BCD 120 125 X1 M700 M300 < K0 D10 K1 SET M100 INC Z0 Z0 K4Y60 PLS M300 RST M100 - K1 D10 BCD D10 K4Y40 144 = K32 Z0 SET M600 150 = K50 Z0 RST M200 MOVP K0 164 M800 Searches ON devices shifting 32-bit data to right K4Y60 PLS M800 RST M400 Searches next ON device Resets when search is finished CIRCUIT END (1) Searching ON devices DSUMP K8F1 D0 DSUMP K8F33 D0 32 bits F F 3231 F F F F 4 3 2 1 S before execution (K8F1) 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 b0 b15 A0 after execution 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 The total number of bits with 1 is stored in BIN. (16 in this example) When X2 is turned on, the number of turned-on bits among F1 to F64 is stored to D10 and displayed. App - 130 F 16 Transferred by a MOVP instruction F 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 F 32 F 48 D0 D10 16 16 F 17 F 33 D0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 F 64 Added by a + P instruction F F 5049 D10 Number of turned-on inputs among X20 to 5B 23 DROR (2) Searching ON devices shifting 32-bit data to left DMOV DMOV K8F1 K8F33 F F 32 31 1 1 D0 D0 F 3 F 2 F 1 0 0 1 K1 F 0 D0 (32 bits) DMOV instruction D1,D0 1 1 1 0 0 D1 (16 bits) DRDR D0 K1 D0 b31 b30 b29 b28b27 1 1 D0 (16 bits) D1 Before execution 0 1 1 0 b17b16 b15 b14 b13 0 0 1 1 1 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Contents of B0 before execution After execution To b31 Carry flag (SM700) 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 To b31 (1) When X0 is turned on, the above shift data (D0, D1) is set. After that, the data is shifted in right direction by 1 bit at each scan until a turned on bit is detected. When a turned-on bit is detected, shifting stops in that scan (SM700 turns on), and the accumulated number of shifts (equivalent to a device number) is displayed. (2) Detecting the next turned-on bit takes place each time X1 is turned on, and the detected device number is displayed in the same manner. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the number of turned-on bits, which was obtained in advance, to display the remaining number of turned-on bits. App - 131 APPENDIX 6 Keys of GX Developer The following table lists keys used in GX Developer with their applications. (1) Names and applications of keys Names JIS compliant keys Special keys Application Names Application Esc Closes windows, stops execution, opens/closes instruction selection windows Alt Selects menus Tab Inputs TAB codes, moves a cursor fast Back Space Deletes a character before a cursor Ctrl Enables various operation in combination with alphanumerical keys or function keys Shift Selects characters at the shift position Shift + Caps Lock Switches alphabet characters between upper and lower case Enter Inputs a carriage return Print Screen Captures a screen shot Page Up Goes up in a displayed page such as ladders, HELP, etc. (scrolls 1 screen in - direction) Page Down Goes down in a displayed page such as ladders, HELP, etc. (scrolls 1 screen in + direction) Scroll Lock Disables scroll-up and scroll down Insert Switches between overwrite and insert in ladder screens Num Lock Makes the ten keys function only for inputting numbers Delete Deletes a character after a cursor (clears all set contents) Home Moves a cursor to the home position Moves a cursor, or scrolls a line in screens such as ladders, lists, etc.( ) App - 132 (2) Function keys in ladder mode Combination F1 F2 None ― Write Alt Ladder/ list switch ― Ctrl ― ― F3 F4 Monitor stop ― start (all ― windows) ― Ctrl Comment display ― ― Conversion (write Read write mode during RUN) Monitor ― ― Monitor Alt + F6 ― F7 F8 F9 F10 Monitor Conversion Monitor Shift F5 stop (all windows) Conversion (all program being edited) ― Device name display Border delete Border write C V X ― ― ― ― ― ― Copy Paste Cut ― ― Statement display Note display ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― Horizontal Vertical stripe stripe delete delete 1) Press function key F2 (write), Shift + F2 (read), or (monitor) to switch between each mode. To convert, press (conversion) key. F3 F4 2) Edit ladders using Ctrl + C (copy), Ctrl + V (paste), and Ctrl + X (cut). 3) Press F4 to convert. Press Shift + F4 to perform write during RUN. Press Alt + Ctrl + F4 to perform write during RUN to all programs currently being edited. App - 133 Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Training Manual Q-series basic course(for GX Developer) Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller Q-series basic course(for GX Developer) Training Manual Q-series basic course(for GX Developer) MODEL SCHOOL-Q-BASIC-WIN-E MODEL CODE 13JW50 SH(NA)-080617ENG-A(0601)MEE HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission. Specifications subject to change without notice.